FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D

FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

PARAMETER MANUAL

B-64310EN/04
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-64310EN/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
B-64310EN/04 PREFACE

PREFACE
Applicable models
This manual describes the following models that are 'Nano CNC'.
'Nano CNC system' which realizes high precision machining can be constructed by combining these
models and high speed, high precision servo controls.
In the text, the abbreviations may be used in addition to Model name indicated below.

Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 0i -TD 0i -TD
Series 0i -D 0i -D
FANUC Series 0i -MD 0i -MD
FANUC Series 0i Mate -TD 0i Mate -TD
Series 0i Mate -D 0i Mate -D
FANUC Series 0i Mate -MD 0i Mate -MD

NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to
the types of path control used:
- T series: 0i -TD / 0i Mate -TD
- M series: 0i -MD / 0i Mate -MD
2 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-64302EN).
3 The 0i -D / 0i Mate -D requires setting of parameters to enable part of basic
functions. For the parameters to be set, see Section 4.51, "PARAMETERS OF 0i
-D / 0i Mate -D BASIC FUNCTIONS".

Related manuals of Series 0i -D,Series 0i Mate -D

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i -D,Series 0i Mate -D. This manual is indicated
by an asterisk(*).

Table 1 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
DESCRIPTIONS B-64302EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64303EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64303EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64304EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64304EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64304EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64305EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64310EN *
START-UP MANUAL B-64304EN-3
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-2
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64304EN-5
C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-3
PMC
PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64393EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64403EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64414EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64443EN
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64453EN
p-1
PREFACE B-64310EN/04

Manual name Specification number

Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64303EN-4
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63874EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-2
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-1
MANUAL GUIDE 0i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64434EN
TURN MATE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64254EN

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

Table 2 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65272EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
B-65302EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65312EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
B-65282EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
B-65322EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series B-65270EN
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series,
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL

This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.

p-2
B-64310EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS................................................................. 1
2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI .................................................... 2
3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ......................................................... 4
3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE .................................................................................................. 4
3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE .................................................................................................. 5
3.3 I/O FORMATS ............................................................................................... 6
3.3.1 Keywords .................................................................................................................6
3.3.2 Inch/Metric Switching ..............................................................................................7
3.3.3 Bit Format.................................................................................................................7
3.3.4 Bit Machine Group Format ......................................................................................7
3.3.5 Bit Path Format ........................................................................................................7
3.3.6 Bit Axis Format ........................................................................................................8
3.3.7 Bit Spindle Format ...................................................................................................8
3.3.8 Byte/Word/Two-Word Format.................................................................................9
3.3.9 Byte/Word/Two-Word Machine Group Format.......................................................9
3.3.10 Byte/Word/Two-Word Path Format.........................................................................9
3.3.11 Byte/Word/Two-Word Axis Format ......................................................................10
3.3.12 Byte/Word/Two-Word Spindle Format..................................................................10
3.3.13 Real Number Format ..............................................................................................10
3.3.14 Real Number Machine Group Format ....................................................................11
3.3.15 Real Number Path Format ......................................................................................11
3.3.16 Real Number Axis Format......................................................................................12
3.3.17 Real Number Spindle Format.................................................................................12
3.3.18 Start and End of a Record.......................................................................................13

4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS ...................................................... 14

4.1 DATA TYPE................................................................................................. 14
4.2 REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS .................................................... 15
4.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES........................................... 16
4.4 PARAMETERS OF SETTING...................................................................... 18
4.5 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .............................. 20
4.5.1 Parameters Common to All Channels ....................................................................21
4.5.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) .......................................................24
4.5.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) .......................................................25
4.5.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) .......................................................26
4.6 PARAMETERS OF CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTIONS........................ 27
4.7 PARAMETERS OF ETHERNET/DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS.................. 27
4.8 PARAMETERS OF POWER MATE CNC .................................................... 30
4.9 PARAMETERS OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ....................................... 31

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64310EN/04

4.10 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM..................... 33

4.11 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES........................................................... 44
4.12 PARAMETERS OF STORED STROKE CHECK ......................................... 51
4.13 PARAMETERS OF THE CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER
(T SERIES) .................................................................................................. 55
4.14 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE .................................................................. 59
4.15 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL .......... 71
4.16 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (1 OF 2) .......................................................... 84
4.17 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO (1 OF 2)........................................................... 122
4.18 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (1 OF 6) .................................... 129
4.19 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (1 OF 3) ................................................ 155
4.20 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............................ 164
4.21 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 169
4.22 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (1 OF 3) ............................. 202
4.23 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES..................................................... 215
4.23.1 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Drilling (1 of 2) ................................................215
4.23.2 Parameters of Thread Cutting Cycle (T Series)....................................................221
4.23.3 Parameters of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle (T Series)................................221
4.23.4 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Drilling (2 of 2) ................................................226
4.23.5 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Grinding (for Grinding Machine).....................230
4.24 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING (1 OF 2) .......................................... 233
4.25 PARAMETERS OF SCALING (M SERIES) /COORDINATE ROTATION
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................... 245
4.26 PARAMETERS OF SINGLE DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING (M SERIES) 248
4.27 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
(T SERIES) ................................................................................................ 248
4.28 PARAMETERS OF NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) ........ 250
4.29 PARAMETERS OF INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES) ..................... 251
4.30 PARAMETERS OF FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL
(1 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 254
4.31 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................... 258
4.32 PARAMETERS OF INCLINATION COMPENSATION .............................. 259
4.33 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS ................................................... 261
4.34 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT ............................................ 275
4.35 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION ....................................................... 275
4.36 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT .......................... 286
4.37 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (1 OF 2) .................... 287
4.38 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (1 OF 3) .................................... 292
4.39 PARAMETERS OF SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (1 OF 2)...................... 295
4.40 PARAMETERS OF RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY............. 296
4.41 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (1 OF 3) ............. 299
4.42 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (1 OF 2)........................ 300
4.43 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS ............................. 308
4.44 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL OPERATION AND AUTOMATIC
OPERATION.............................................................................................. 309

c-2
B-64310EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.45 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE INTERRUPTION

AND HANDLE FEED IN TOOL AXIAL DIRECTION .................................. 310
4.46 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION WITH MECHANICAL
STOPPER ................................................................................................. 314
4.47 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL .......................... 315
4.48 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAM RESTART ............................................... 318
4.49 PARAMETERS OF POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES) ............................ 319
4.50 PARAMETERS OF THE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (EGB) (M SERIES) /
GENERAL-PURPOSE RETRACTION....................................................... 326
4.51 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (1 OF 4) ........................... 334
4.52 PARAMETERS OF 2-PATH CONTROL (T SERIES) ................................ 343
4.53 PARAMETERS OF 0i -D / 0i Mate -D BASIC FUNCTIONS ...................... 345
4.54 PARAMETERS OF INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH
(T SERIES) (2-PATH CONTROL) ............................................................. 351
4.55 PARAMETERS OF SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL AND
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES) (1 OF 2) ................................. 353
4.56 PARAMETERS OF ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ...................................... 366
4.57 PARAMETERS OF AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ........................... 368
4.58 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP .. 374
4.59 PARAMETERS OF HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION
(1 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 374
4.60 PARAMETERS OF ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI ADVANCED
PREVIEW CONTROL / AI CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR
CONTROL II (1 OF 2)................................................................................ 376
4.61 OTHER PARAMETERS (1 OF 2) .............................................................. 378
4.62 PARAMETERS OF MAINTENANCE ......................................................... 383
4.63 PARAMETERS OF THE INCORRECT OPERATION PREVENTION
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 386
4.64 OTHER PARAMETERS (2 OF 2) .............................................................. 394
4.65 PARAMETERS OF AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP.................................... 395
4.66 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL ........................................................ 396
4.67 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (2 OF 4) ........................... 396
4.68 PARAMETERS OF SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (2 OF 2)...................... 397
4.69 PARAMETERS OF WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS ......................................... 397
4.70 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR
(1 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 398
4.71 PARAMETERS OF TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
(1 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 404
4.72 PARAMETERS OF INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND
DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (1 OF 2) .............................................. 405
4.73 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO (2 OF 2)........................................................... 406
4.74 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE CONTROL AND
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL........................................ 406
4.75 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATE SYSTEM............................................ 407
4.76 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (2 OF 6) .................................... 409
4.77 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (2 OF 3) .................................... 415

c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64310EN/04

4.78 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (3 OF 6) .................................... 420

4.79 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (2 OF 3) ............................. 423
4.80 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING (2 OF 2) .......................................... 423
4.81 PARAMETERS OF ARBITRARY SPEED THREADING............................ 427
4.82 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (2 OF 3) ................................................ 430
4.83 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (4 OF 6) .................................... 431
4.84 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (3 OF 3) ................................................ 432
4.85 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................... 433
4.86 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (2 OF 2) ........................................................ 434
4.87 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (3 OF 4) ........................... 434
4.88 PARAMETERS OF PMC ........................................................................... 435
4.89 PARAMETERS OF MALFUNCTION PROTECTION................................. 436
4.90 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE..................................................... 436
4.91 PARAMETERS OF SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL AND
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES) (2 OF 2) ................................. 443
4.92 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (4 OF 4) ........................... 443
4.93 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (5 OF 6) .................................... 445
4.94 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (2 OF 3) ............. 453
4.95 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (2 OF 2)........................ 465
4.96 PARAMETERS OF FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL
(2 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 465
4.97 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (4 OF 4) ................................................ 468
4.98 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (3 OF 3) ............. 468
4.99 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 473
4.100 PARAMETERS OF PARAMETER CHECK SUM ...................................... 478
4.101 PARAMETERS OF INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND
DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (2 OF 2) .............................................. 479
4.102 PARAMETERS OF LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
REFERENCE POSITION .......................................................................... 480
4.103 PARAMETERS OF FSSB.......................................................................... 481
4.104 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (3 OF 3) .................................... 484
4.105 PARAMETERS OF EMBEDDED ETHERNET........................................... 485
4.106 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (2 OF 2) .................... 486
4.107 PARAMETERS OF ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI ADVANCED
PREVIEW CONTROL / AI CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR
CONTROL II (2 OF 2)................................................................................ 487
4.108 PARAMETERS OF NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES)
(1 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 489
4.109 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (3 OF 3) ............................. 490
4.110 PARAMETERS OF TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
(2 OF 2) / 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M SERIES)........................ 492
4.111 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (6 OF 6) .................................... 503
4.112 PARAMETERS OF HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION
(2 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 504

c-4
B-64310EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.113 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR

(2 OF 2) ..................................................................................................... 505

APPENDIX
A CHARACTER CODE LIST .................................................................. 509

c-5
B-64310EN/04 1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS

1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
Follow the procedure below to display parameters.
1 Press the function key on the MDI as many times as required, or alternatively, press the

function key once, then the PARAM section display soft key. The parameter screen is then
selected.

Function keys

2 The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b) to display the page that contains
the parameter you want to display.
(a) Use the page select key or the cursor move keys to display the desired page.
(b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display from the keyboard, then press the
[NO.SRH] soft key. The parameter page containing the specified data number appears with the
cursor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in reverse video.)

NOTE
If key entry is started with the section select soft keys displayed, they are
replaced automatically by operation select soft keys including [NO.SRH].
Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key can also cause the operation select keys to be
displayed.

-1-
2.SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI B-64310EN/04

2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI

Follow the procedure below to set parameters.
1 Place the NC in the MDI mode or the emergency stop state.
2 Follow the substeps below to enable writing of parameters.
2-1 To display the setting screen, press the function key as many times as required, or

alternatively press the function key once, then the [SETTING] section select soft key.
(The first page of the setting screen appears.)

2-2 Position the cursor on "PARAMETER WRITE" using the cursor move keys.
2-3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.

2-4 To set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 1, press the [ON:1] soft key, or alternatively enter 1 and
press the [INPUT] soft key. From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm
condition (SW0100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the CNC.
3 To display the parameter screen, press the function key as many times as required, or

alternatively press the function key once, then the PARAM section select soft key. (See
Chapter 1, "DISPLAYING PARAMETERS.")
4 Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and position the cursor on the parameter.
(See Chapter 1, "DISPLAYING PARAMETERS.")
5 Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicated by the cursor is set to the
entered data.

-2-
B-64310EN/04 2.SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the selected parameter, by separating
each data item with a semicolon (;).
[Example]
Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the INPUT key assigns values 10, 20, 30, and 40 to
parameters in order starting at the parameter indicated by the cursor.
6 Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.
7 If parameter setting is complete, set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 0 on the setting screen to disable
further parameter setting.
8 Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (SW0100).
If an alarm condition (PW0000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occurs in the NC, turn it off before
continuing operation.

-3-
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-64310EN/04

3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING

PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
This section explains the parameter input/output procedures for input/output devices connected to the
reader/puncher interface.
The following description assumes the input/output devices are ready for input/output. It also assumes
parameters peculiar to the input/output devices, such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits, have
been set in advance. (See Section 4.5, “PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE.”)

3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE

READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
1 Select the EDIT mode or set to Emergency stop.
2 To select the parameter screen, press the function key as many times as required, or

alternatively press the function key once, then the PARAM section select soft key.
3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys, then press the forward menu key
located at the right-hand side of the soft keys to display another set of operation select keys
including [F OUTPUT].

4 Pressing the [F OUTPUT] soft key changes the soft key display as shown below:

5 The [NON-0] soft key selects outputting of the parameters with a non-zero value. The [ALL] soft
key selects outputting of all parameters. When the [NON-0] soft key or [ALL] soft key is pressed,
the soft keys change as described below.

-4-
 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
B-64310EN/04 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
6 Press the [EXEC] soft key to start parameter output. When parameters are being output, "OUTPUT"
blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the screen.
7 When parameter output terminates, "OUTPUT" stops blinking. Press the key to interrupt
parameter output.

3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE

READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
1 Place the NC in the emergency stop state.
2 Enable parameter writing.
2-1 To display the setting screen, press the function key as many times as required, or

alternatively press the function key once, then the [SETING] section select soft key.
The first page of the setting screen appears.

2-2 Position the cursor on "PARAMETER WRITE" using the cursor move keys.

2-3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.

2-4 To set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 1, press the [ON:1] soft key, or alternatively enter 1, then
press the [INPUT] soft key. From now on, parameters can be set.
At the same time an alarm condition (SW0100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the
NC.
3 To select the parameter screen, press the function key as many times as required, or

alternatively press the key once, then [PARAM] soft key.

4 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select keys, then press the forward menu key
located at the right-hand side of the soft keys to display another set of operation select soft keys
including [F INPUT].

5 Pressing the [F INPUT] soft key changes the soft key display as shown below:
6 Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting parameters from the input/output device.

When parameters are being input, "INPUT" blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the
screen. Press the key to interrupt parameter input.
7 When parameter read terminates, "INPUT" stops blinking, and an alarm condition (PW0000) occurs
in the NC. Turn it off before continuing operation.

-5-
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-64310EN/04

3.3 I/O FORMATS

This section describes the I/O formats of parameters.
Parameters are classified by data format as follows:

Data format Remarks

Bit
Bit machine group
Data of these formats is represented by an 8-digit
Bit path
binary number, with each digit corresponding to a bit.
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
Byte path
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
Word path
Word axis
The setting range of data varies from one parameter
Word spindle
to another.
2-word For details, refer to the description of each parameter.
2-word machine group
2-word path
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group
Real path
Real axis
Real spindle

3.3.1 Keywords
The alphabetic characters listed below are used as keywords.
A numeric value after each keyword has the following meaning:

Keyword Meaning of a numeric value that follows

N Parameter number
Q Data identifier (1: Parameter data, 0: Pitch error compensation data)
Ｔ Machine group number (1) of a machine group type parameter
Ｌ Path number (1 to number of controlled paths) of a path type parameter
A Controlled axis number (1 to number of controlled axes) of an axis type parameter
S Spindle number (1 to number of controlled spindles) of a spindle type parameter
P Value of a parameter independent of inch/metric switching
M Metric input value of a parameter dependent on inch/metric switching
I Inch input value of a parameter dependent on inch/metric switching

-6-
 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
B-64310EN/04 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

3.3.2 Inch/Metric Switching

For parameters dependent on inch/metric switching such as those for length and feedrate, whether data is
inch data or metric data is specified by the input mode in the case of input from the MDI panel, or by the
keyword I or M prefixed to the data in the case of input from an external I/O device. The keyword I or M
is added also when data is output from an external I/O device.
If the input mode or keyword differs from the actually used mode as in a case where data input in the inch
mode is used in the metric mode, the CNC performs automatic data conversion. So, data need not be
converted according to a mode change. Moreover, when parameter data is displayed, the data is converted
according to the display mode. However, when data is output from an external I/O device, the original
data is output according to the original keyword.

3.3.3 Bit Format

N ***** Q1 P ******** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
An 8-digit binary number after P represents the bit values (0/1) of a parameter, with the first digit
corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit corresponding to bit 7.
Leading zeros may not be omitted.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N00010Q1P00000001;
Parameter No. 10
Parameter value
Bit 0 is set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.

3.3.4 Bit Machine Group Format

N ***** Q1 T1 P ******** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
T1 indicates the 1st machine group (for the 0i-D/0i Mate-D, the 1st machine group is always assumed).
The 8-digit binary number that follows P includes the bit values (0 or 1) of the parameter in the 1st
machine group; the first bit corresponds to bit 0 and the eighth bit to bit 7.
Leading zeros may not be omitted.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01005Q1T1P10000001;
Parameter No. 1005
Parameter value
1st machine group: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.

3.3.5 Bit Path Format

N ***** Q1 L * P ******** L * P ******** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

-7-
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-64310EN/04

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.

A numeric value after L represents a path number (1 to number of controlled paths).
An 8-digit binary number after P represents the bit values (0/1) of a parameter for each path, with the first
digit corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit corresponding to bit 7.
Leading zeros may not be omitted.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01005Q1L1P10000001L2P10000001;
Parameter No. 1005
Parameter value
Path 1: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
Path 2: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.

3.3.6 Bit Axis Format

N ***** Q1 A * P ******** A * P ******** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after A represents a controlled axis number (1 to number of controlled axes).
An 8-digit binary number after P represents the bit values (0/1) of a parameter for each controlled axis,
with the first digit corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit corresponding to bit 7.
Leading zeros may not be omitted.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01005Q1A1P10000001A2P10000001A3P10000001.......;
Parameter No. 1005
Parameter value
1st axis: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
2nd axis: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
3rd axis: Bits 0 and 7 are set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
▪

3.3.7 Bit Spindle Format

N ***** Q1 S * P ******** S * P ******** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after S represents a spindle number (1 to number of controlled spindles).
An 8-digit binary number after P represents the bit values (0/1) of a parameter for each spindle, with the
first digit corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit corresponding to bit 7.
Leading zeros may not be omitted.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

-8-
 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
B-64310EN/04 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

Example
N05603Q1S1P00001000S2P00001000S3P00000000;
Parameter No. 5603
Parameter value
1st spindle: Bit 3 is set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
2nd spindle: Bit 3 is set to 1, and the other bits are set to 0.
3rd spindle: All bits are set to 0.

3.3.8 Byte/Word/Two-Word Format

N ***** Q1 P ******** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after P represents a parameter value (integer).
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N00100Q1P31515;
Parameter No. 100
Parameter value 31515

3.3.9 Byte/Word/Two-Word Machine Group Format

N ***** Q1 T1 P ****** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
T1 indicates the 1st machine group (for the 0i-D/0i Mate-D, the 1st machine group is always assumed).
The value that follows P indicates the value (integer) of the parameter in 1st machine group.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01020Q1T1P88;
Parameter No. 1020
Parameter value 1st machine group: 88

3.3.10 Byte/Word/Two-Word Path Format

N ***** Q1 L * P ****** L * P ****** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after L represents a path number (1 to number of controlled paths).
A numeric value after P represents the value (integer) of a parameter for each path.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

-9-
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-64310EN/04

Example
N01020Q1L1P88L2P89;
Parameter No. 1020
Parameter value Path 1: 88
Path 2: 89

3.3.11 Byte/Word/Two-Word Axis Format

N ***** Q1 A * P ****** A * P ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after A represents a controlled axis number (1 to number of controlled axes).
A numeric value after P represents the value (integer) of a parameter for each controlled axis.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01020Q1A1P88A2P89A3P90A4P66......;
Parameter No. 1020
Parameter value 1st axis: 88
2nd axis: 89
3rd axis: 90
4th axis: 66
▪

3.3.12 Byte/Word/Two-Word Spindle Format

N ***** Q1 S * P ****** S * P ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after S represents a spindle number (1 and up).
A numeric value after P represents the value (integer) of a parameter for each spindle.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N05680Q1S1P19S2P19S3P0;
Parameter No. 5680
Parameter value 1st spindle: 19
2nd spindle: 19
3rd spindle: 0

3.3.13 Real Number Format

N ***** Q1 P ****** ;

N ***** Q1 M ****** ;

N ***** Q1 I ****** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
- 10 -
 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
B-64310EN/04 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
A numeric value after each of P, M, and I represents the value (real number) of a parameter.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01451Q1P5000.0;
Parameter No. 1451
Parameter value 5000.0

3.3.14 Real Number Machine Group Format

N ***** Q1 T1 P ****** ;

N ***** Q1 T1 M ****** ;

N ***** Q1 T1 I ****** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
T1 indicates the 1st machine group (for the 0i-D/0i Mate-D, the 1st machine group is always assumed).
The value that follows P, M, or I indicates the value (real number) of the parameter in 1st machine group.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01220Q1T1M50.0;
Parameter No. 1220
Parameter value 1st machine group: 50.0

3.3.15 Real Number Path Format

N ***** Q1 L * P ****** L * P ****** ;

N ***** Q1 L * M ****** L * M ****** ;

N ***** Q1 L * I ****** L * I ****** ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after L represents a path number (1 to number of controlled paths).
A numeric value after each of P, M, and I represents the value (real number) of a parameter for each path.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01220Q1L1M50.0L2M60.0;
Parameter No. 1220
Parameter value Path 1: 50.0
Path 2: 60.0

- 11 -
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-64310EN/04

3.3.16 Real Number Axis Format

N ***** Q1 A * P ****** A * P ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

N ***** Q1 A * M ****** A * M ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

N ***** Q1 A * I ****** A * I ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after A represents a controlled axis number (1 to number of controlled axes).
A numeric value after each of P, M, and I represents the value (real number) of a parameter for each
controlled axis.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N01220Q1A1M50.0A2M60.0A3M70.0A4M0.0A5M0.0 ........;
Parameter No. 1220
Parameter value 1st axis: 50.0
2nd axis: 60.0
3rd axis: 70.0
4th axis: 0.0
5th axis: 0.0

3.3.17 Real Number Spindle Format

N ***** Q1 S * P ****** S * P ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

N ***** Q1 S * M ****** S * M ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

N ***** Q1 S * I ****** S * I ****** ･ ･ ･ ;

A numeric value after N represents a parameter number.

Q1 indicates that the data is parameter data.
A numeric value after S represents a spindle number (1 to number of controlled spindles).
A numeric value after each of P, M, and I represents the value (real number) of a parameter for each
spindle.
A semicolon (;) marks the end of a block. (LF is used for the ISO code, and CR is used for the EIA code.)

Example
N05898Q1S1P30.0S2P30.0S3P0.0;
Parameter No. 5898
Parameter value 1st spindle: 30.0
2nd spindle: 30.0
3rd spindle: 0.0

- 12 -
 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
B-64310EN/04 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

3.3.18 Start and End of a Record

A parameter record starts with "%" and ends with "%".

Example
%; ......................................... Start of record
N00000Q1P00001100;
N00002Q1P00000000;
▪
▪
N09162Q1P00000000;
N09163Q1P00000000;
% .......................................... End of record

When parameters and pitch error compensation data are included in a single file, the file starts with "%"
and ends with "%".

- 13 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.1 DATA TYPE
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
Bit path 0 or 1
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
-128 to 127 Some parameters handle these types of
Byte path 0 to 255 data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
-32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
Word spindle
2-word
2-word machine group
Some parameters handle these types of
2-word path 0 to ±999999999
data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group
See the Standard Parameter
Real path Setting Tables.
Real axis
Real spindle

NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and bit
spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight
different meanings).
2 For machine group types, the parameters corresponding to the maximum
number of machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for
each machine group. For the 0i -D/0i Mate-D, the maximum number of
machine groups is always 1.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.

- 14 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.2 REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS

Parameters of the bit type, bit machine group type, bit path type, bit axis type,
and bit spindle type
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC

Data No. Data (Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.)

Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above

1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

Data No. Data

NOTE
1 There are bits that are indicated as a blank or parameters whose numbers are
displayed on the screen but not shown in the list in Chapter 4. "DESCRIPTION
OF PARAMETERS". Basically, set these parameters to 0.
2 Parameters that are valid only for either the lathe system (T series) or the
machining center system (M series) are indicated in two rows as shown in the
following examples. When a row is blank, the parameter is not usable with the
corresponding series. Basically, set these parameters to 0.

[Example 1]
Parameter HTG is a parameter common to the M and T series, but
Parameters RTV and ROC are parameters valid only for the T series.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV HTG ROC T series
1403
HTG M series

[Example 2]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1411 M series
Cutting feedrate

3 When "to" is inserted between two parameter numbers, there are parameters
with successive numbers between the two starting and ending parameter
numbers, but those intermediate parameter numbers are omitted for
convenience.
4 The lower-case letter "x" or "s" following the name of a bit-type parameter
indicates the following:
-” x” : Bit axis type parameters
-” s” : Bit spindle type parameters

- 15 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES

Overview
This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and
unit of data of each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.

Explanation
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999

(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999

(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 0.0 to +999000.00
mm/min
IS-B 0.001 0.0 to +999000.000
degree/min
IS-C 0.0001 0.0 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.0 to +96000.000
inch/min IS-B 0.0001 0.0 to +9600.0000
IS-C 0.00001 0.0 to +4000.00000

If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
mm/min IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000

(D)Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
2 IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm/sec
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg./sec2
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch/sec2 IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999

- 16 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
mm/min IS-C
0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999

Notes
(1) Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data unit.
(2) A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values representing actual
performance.
(3) For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D, "LIST OF
COMMAND RANGES," in the "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).

- 17 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.4 PARAMETERS OF SETTING

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#1 ISO Code used for data output

0: EIA code
1: ISO code

NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0139.
2 The I/O setting of data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter
No. 0908.
3 The I/O setting of an USB memory is made by bit 0 (ISU) of
parameter No.11505.

#2 INI Unit of input

0: In metrics
1: In inches

#5 SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 0 standard format
(This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)
1: Series 10/11 format

- 18 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used
for operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98,M198
2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series)
3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series)
5 Drilling canned cycle
G80 to G89 (T series)
G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 SJZ

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#7 SJZ On an axis for which bit 3 (HJZx) of parameter No. 1005 is set:
0: If a reference position is not established yet, reference position return is performed
with deceleration dogs.
If a reference position is already established, reference position return is performed
at a parameter-set feedrate without using deceleration dogs.
1: Reference position return is performed with deceleration dogs at all times.

NOTE
SJZ is valid for an axis for which bit 3 (HJZx) of parameter No.
1005 is set to 1. When bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to
1, however, manual reference position return after a reference
position is set is performed at a parameter-set feedrate, regardless
of the setting of SJZ.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PEC PRM PZS

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is:

0: Not zero-suppressed.
1: Zero-suppressed.

#1 PRM Whether the parameter whose setting is 0 is output or not:

0: It is selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0].
1: It is not selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. The parameter whose setting is 0
is not output.

#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, the data whose value is 0 is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.

- 19 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx MIRx

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis

0: Mirror image is off. (Normal)
1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)

#7 RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0: Not released
1: Released
(Equivalent to the control axis detachment signals DTCH1, DTCH2, and so forth)

NOTE
1 RMVx is valid when bit 7 (RMBx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 1.
2 Switch RMVx while the axis is stopping. When switching while the
axis is moving, the control axis is detached after the movement of
the axis is completed.

4.5 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

To transfer data (programs, parameters, and so forth) to and from an external input/output
device through the I/O device interface (RS-232-C serial interface), the parameters
described below need to be set.
The input/output device connected to a channel (such as RS-232-C serial port 1 and
RS-232-C serial port 2) can be selected by setting I/O CHANNEL (parameter No. 0020).
The specifications (input/output specification number, baud rate, and the number of stop
bits) of an input/output device connected to each channel must be set in the parameters
corresponding to each channel beforehand.
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are
provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device interface
parameters for the channels.

- 20 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

0020 I/O CHANNEL Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020)

or foreground input
↓
Set channels to be used 0101 Stop bit and other data
for data input/output.
I/O CHANNEL=0 0102 Number specified for the input/output device
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) (Channel 1)
0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1
=2 : Channel 2 0111 Stop bit and other data
=3 : Channel 3
: I/O CHANNEL=1 0112 Number specified for the input/output device
(Channel 1)
: 0113 Baud rate
:
Input/output to and from the memory card
interface, etc. is also possible. 0121 Stop bit and other data

When IO4 is set I/O CHANNEL=2 0122 Number specified for the input/output device
(Channel 2)
0123 Baud rate
0021 Foreground output
:
0022 Background input :

0023 Background input :

I/O CHANNEL=9
The channel setting is the same as No.0020.

4.5.1 Parameters Common to All Channels

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

0021 Foreground output device setting

0022 Background input device setting

0023 Background output device setting

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 17
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
• Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
• Memory card interface
• Data server interface
• Embedded Ethernet interface
• USB memory interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
To execute the DNC operation or M198 command with FOCAS2/Ethernet, set this
parameter to 6.

- 21 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
6 Execution of the DNC operation or M198 command with FOCAS2/Ethernet
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB memory interface

Setting of communication with the ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing
0024
package)

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter is used to enable or disable the PMC online connection function.
By specifying this parameter, the PMC online connection function can be enabled or
disabled without displaying the PMC online setting screen.

Setting RS-232-C High-speed interface

0 The setting on the PMC online setting screen is not altered.
1 To be used (channel 1) Not to be used
2 To be used (channel 2) Not to be used
10 Not to be used To be used
11 To be used (channel 1) To be used
12 To be used (channel 2) To be used
255 Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [FORCED STOP] soft key).

NOTE
1 The setting of this parameter becomes valid when the power is
turned on or this parameter is modified. After this parameter is set,
the power need not be turned off then back on.
2 A setting modification made on the PMC online setting screen is
not reflected in this parameter.
3 The communication settings of a baud rate and so forth for using
RS-232-C made on the PMC online setting screen are valid. When
no modification is ever made to the settings on the PMC online
setting screen, the baud rate is 9600, parity is not used, and the
number of stops bits is 2.
4 Be sure to set 255 in this parameter to change the state of the
PMC online connection function from valid to invalid. Even if 0 is
set in this parameter, the function does not become invalid.
5 When the PMC online connection function occupies RS-232C or
High-speed interface, if other functions try to use RS-232C or
High-speed interface, warning "CANNOT USE I/O DEVICE" is
issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS IOP NCR CRF CTV

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

- 22 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0: Performed
1: Not performed

#2 CRF Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100.
1: CR, LF are output.

#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.

#6 IOP Stopping a program output or input operation by a reset is:

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(Stopping a program input/output operation with the [STOP] soft key is enabled at all
times.)

#7 ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0110 IO4

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter
No. 0020.
If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the
foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters No.
0020 to No. 0023 respectively.
Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing,
program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MNC SCH MDP
0138
MNC SCH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is:

0: Not added.
1: Added.

- 23 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored, and
a path number is not added to the extension.

#5 SCH The schedule operation function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the
memory card are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes
1: ISO codes

WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.

4.5.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SB2 The number of stop bits

0: 1
1: 2

#3 ASI The codes used during data input/output is:

0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000)
1: ASCII codes during input and output

NOTE
To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set
bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.

- 24 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0: Output
1: Not output
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.

0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=0.
The following table lists the specification numbers and corresponding input/output device
specifications.

Specification numbers and corresponding input/output device specifications

Specification number Input/output device specification
0 RS-232-C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1(FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3(FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate、FANUC FA Card Adaptor,
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232-C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 0)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0.
When setting this parameter, see the following table:

Baud rates and corresponding settings

Setting Baud rate (bps) Setting Baud rate (bps)
1 50 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
6 300 11 9600
7 600 12 19200

4.5.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 25 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 SB2 The number of stop bits

0: 1
1: 2

#3 ASI The codes used during data input/output is:

0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000)
1: ASCII codes during input and output

NOTE
To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set
bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.

#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output

0: Output
1: Not output
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.

0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=1.

0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.

4.5.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SB2 The number of stop bits

0: 1
1: 2
#3 ASI The codes used during data input/output is:
0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000)
1: ASCII codes during input and output

NOTE
To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set
bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.

- 26 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0: Output
1: Not output

0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=2.

0123 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 2)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.

4.6 PARAMETERS OF CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0300 PCM

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 PCM If the CNC screen display function is enabled, when a memory card interface is provided
on the NC side,
0: The memory card interface on the NC side is used.
1: The memory card interface on the PC side is used.

4.7 PARAMETERS OF ETHERNET/DATA SERVER

FUNCTIONS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0901 EFT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 EFT The FTP file transfer function by the Ethernet function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
In a 2-path system, the setting of the parameter for path 1 is used
throughout the system.

- 27 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 LCH DHC DNS UNM D1E

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 D1E When the DHCP function is used:

0: Default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are set.
Port number (TCP) 8193
Port number (UDP) 0
Time interval 0
1: Default parameters for FANUC i CELL communication are set.
Port number (TCP) 8193
Port number (UDP) 8192
Time interval 50

#4 UNM The CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#5 DNS The DNS client function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#6 DHC The DHCP client function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#7 LCH In the LIST-GET service of the Data Server function, when a list file specifies 1025 or
more files:
0: A check for duplicated file names is performed.
1: A check for duplicated file names is not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 UNS DSF PCH DNE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 DNE During DNC operation using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the termination of DNC
operation is:
0: Waited.
1: Not waited.

#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server function, FTP file transfer function, or
machine remote diagnosis function, checking for the presence of the server using PING
is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

- 28 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
Usually, set 0.
If 1 is set not to check the presence of the server by using PING, it
may take several tens of seconds to recognize an error when the
server is not present in the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. To communicate
with such a personal computer, set 1.

#3 DSF When an NC program is stored on the memory card of the Data Server:
0: The file name takes priority.
1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.

NOTE
Only when the file of the personal computer side is registered to
the memory card of the data server by operating the CNC side, this
parameter becomes effective.

#4 UNS In the CNC Unsolicited Messaging function, when the end of the function is requested by
other than the CNC Unsolicited Messaging server currently connected:
0: The request for the end of the function is rejected.
1: The request for the end of the function is accepted.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0908 ISO

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ISO When the data server is selected as an I/O device, data is input or output using:
0: ASCII codes
1: ISO codes

0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS.

0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS.

0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX, VMS.
2: Linux.

NOTE
Some FTP server software products do not depend on the OS. So,
even when the above parameters are set, it is sometimes
impossible to display a list of files properly.

- 29 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet waiting time setting

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] millisecond
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When the FOCAS2/Ethernet and Data Server functions are used simultaneously, this
parameter sets the FOCAS2/Ethernet function waiting time in milliseconds.
When a value of 0 is set, the functions operate with assuming that 1 millisecond is
specified.

0929 File attribute specification during FTP server operation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
This parameter sets whether to give priority to the file attribute specified in a TYPE
command of FTP during operation as an FTP server.
0: Priority is given to the file attribute specified in a TYPE command from an FTP
client.
1: Text files are always assumed.
2: Binary files are always assumed.

Maximum number of files that can be registered to the memory card of the Data Server and maximum
0930
size per file that can be registered

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0, 10 to 15

No.930 Maximum number of files Maximum size per file

0 2047 512MB
10 511 2048MB
11 1023 1024MB
12 2047 512MB
13 4095 256MB
14 8191 128MB
15 16383 64MB

NOTE
1 When the memory card is formatted after this parameter is set, the
maximum number of files and maximum size per file are changed.
2 Each folder is counted as one file.

4.8 PARAMETERS OF POWER MATE CNC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PPE PMN MD2 MD1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 30 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
# 1, 2 MD1,MD2 These parameters set a slave parameter input/output destination.
Parameter MD2 Parameter MD1 I/O destination
0 0 Program memory
0 1 Memory card

NOTE
The output destination depends on the setting for path 1.

#3 PMN The Power Mate CNC manager function is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
When priority is to be given to commands to slaves by a ladder (communication by the
Power Mate CNC manager function is to be stopped) after necessary data setting and
checking for each of the connected slaves are completed, set this bit to 1 for every path.

#4 PPE
0: The Power Mate CNC manager can set slave parameters at all times.
1: Slave parameter setting by the Power Mate CNC manager follows the setting of
PWE for the host CNC. When PWE = 0, the setting of the I/O LINK βi parameter is
prohibited.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0961 PMO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 PMO The O number of a program for saving and restoring the I/O LINK βi parameter is set
based on:
0: Group number and channel number
1: Group number only

4.9 PARAMETERS OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

0980 Machine group number to which each path belongs

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1
Set the machine group number to which each path belongs.
For the 0i-D/0i Mate-D, be sure to set this parameter to 1.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0, a setting of 1 is assumed.

- 31 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

0981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1 to Max. control paths
Set the path to which each axis belongs.

NOTE
1 When 0 is set for all axes, the parameter is automatically set
according to the number of controlled axes of each path.
2 When the setting falls outside the range, the axis is assumed to
belong to the first path.

0982 Absolute path number to which each spindle belongs

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 1 to Max. control paths
Set the path to which each spindle belongs.

NOTE
1 When 0 is set for all axes, the parameter is automatically set
according to the number of controlled axes of each path.
2 When the setting falls outside the range, the axis is assumed to
belong to the first path.
3 When spindle control with servo motor is enabled, the servo motor
used as the spindle controlled axis is treated as a spindle.
Therefore, it is necessary to set the path to which the axis subject
to spindle control with servo motor.

0983 Path control type of each path

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 For the 0i -D/0i Mate-D, this parameter does not need to be set
because it is set automatically.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Set the path control type of each path.

- 32 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
The following two path control types are available:
T series (lathe system) : 0
M series (machining system) : 1

4.10 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis

0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 IDG XIK AZR JAX

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid traverse and manual
reference position return
0: 1 axis
1: 3 axes

#3 AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes:

0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual reference
position return) to be executed.
1: Alarm (PS0304) "G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT ZERO RETURN" to be
displayed.

NOTE
When reference position return without dogs is specified, (when bit 1
(DLZ) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) the G28 command specified
before a reference position is set causes an alarm PS0304 to be
issued, regardless of the setting of AZR.

#4 XIK When bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401, is set to 0, namely, when positioning is
performed using non-linear type positioning, if an interlock is applied to the machine
along one of axes in positioning,
0: The machine stops moving along the axis for which the interlock is applied and
continues to move along the other axes.
1: The machine stops moving along all the axes.

- 33 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of bit 0 (IDGx) of
parameter No.1012 to prevent the reference position from being set again is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, bit 0 (IDGx) of parameter No. 1012
is invalid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
IPR IPI
1004
IPR IPI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#6 IPI Bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 is:

0: Invalid for inch input.
1: Valid for inch input.

#7 IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as large as the
least command increment is specified, in increment systems of IS-B or IS-C at setting
mm.
0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as large as the least command
increment.
1: The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least command
increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:

Input increment Least input increment

IS-B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch
IS-C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 inch

NOTE
For IS-A, the least input increment cannot be set to a value 10
times as large as the least command increment.
The least input increment is not multiplied by 10 also when the
calculator-type decimal point input (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.
3401) is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 RMBx MCCx EDMx EDPx HJZx DLZx ZRNx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 ZRNx If a move command other than G28 is specified by automatic operation when no
reference position return is performed yet after the power is turned on:
0: The alarm (PS0224) "ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED" is issued.
1: Operation is performed without issuing an alarm.

- 34 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 The state in which a reference position has not been established
refers to the following state:
- When an absolute position detector is not used and reference
position return has not been performed even once after power-up
- When an absolute position detector is used and the association of
the machine position with the position detected with the absolute
position detector has not been completed (See the description of
bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No. 1815.)
2 When the Cs axis coordinates are to be set up, set this parameter
to 0.
3 To use a function that establishes the reference point and makes a
movement with a command other than G28, such as an axis of Cs
contour control, set this parameter to 1.

#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

#3 HJZx When a reference position is already set:

0: Manual reference position return is performed with deceleration dogs.
1: Manual reference position return is performed using rapid traverse without
deceleration dogs, or manual reference position return is performed with
deceleration dogs, depending on the setting of bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002.
When the function for setting the reference position without dogs (see the description of
bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005) is used, manual reference position return after a
reference position is set is always performed at a parameter-set feedrate, regardless of the
setting of HJZx.

#4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid

NOTE
Be sure to set 1 to this parameter if bit 5 (EDR) of parameter
No.1405 is set to 0 when positioning of linear interpolation type is
used (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401 is 1).

#5 EDMx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the - direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid

NOTE
Be sure to set 1 to this parameter if bit 5 (EDR) of parameter
No.1405 is set to 0 when positioning of linear interpolation type is
used (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401 is 1).

#6 MCCx If a multi-axis amplifier is used, and another axis of the same amplifier is placed in the
control axis detach state, the MCC signal of the servo amplifier is:
0: Turned off.
1: Not turned off.

- 35 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
This parameter can be set for a control axis.

WARNING
1 When this parameter is set to 1, the dynamic brake does not
operate during removal of an axis. Therefore, if a failure occurs in
the mechanical brake, driving circuit, or sequence, a vertical axis
may fall freely in a significant manner. Since an excess error
check cannot also be performed during removal of an axis, set this
parameter to 0 for a vertical axis.
2 When the servo motor of a controlled axis to be detached is
connected to a multi-axis amplifier such as a two-axis amplifier,
placing the axis in the control axis detach state causes the
activating current in the amplifier to drop. As a result, alarm
(SV0401) "IMPROPER V_READY OFF" is issued in the other axes.
This alarm can be suppressed by setting this parameter bit.
With this method, however, the target axis for the control axis
detach operation is placed in the servo off state (the amplifier
remains on, but no current flows through the motor). The torque of
the target axis becomes 0, so care should be taken. Even when a
controlled axis has been detached, detaching a cable (a command
cable or feedback cable) of the axis causes an alarm.
In such applications, it is impossible to perform a control axis
detach operation with a multi-axis amplifier by setting this
parameter bit. (Prepare a single-axis amplifier.)

#7 RMBx The control axis detachment signal for each axis and the setting input RMV (bit 7 of
parameter No. 0012) are:
0: Invalid
1: Valid

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx DIAx ROSx ROTx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis.

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter
No.3624)

- 36 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

ROSx ROTx Meaning

0 1 Rotation axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No.3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotation axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter
No.3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll-over function and the index
table indexing function (M series)
Except for the above. Setting is invalid (unused)

#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification

NOTE
For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides
setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based
on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of
movement.
• Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not
changed).
• Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear
(DMR).
For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set,
the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above
changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed).
To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.

#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1007 GRDx ALZx RTLx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

- 37 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 RTLx When manual reference position return is performed on a rotation axis (A type) with the
deceleration dog pressed before a reference position is established:
0: A movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL.
1: Until a servo motor grid is established, a movement is not made at the reference
position return feedrate FL even if the deceleration dog is pressed, but a movement
is made at the rapid traverse rate.

If the deceleration dog is released after a movement at the rapid traverse rate and the
deceleration dog is then pressed again and released after the rotation axis makes one
revolution, reference position return operation is completed.
When this parameter is set to 0, the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE" is issued if the deceleration dog is released before a servo motor grid is
established.
If this alarm is issued, start manual reference position return at a position sufficiently far
away from the reference position.

#1 ALZx In automatic reference position return (G28):

0: Reference position return is performed by positioning (rapid traverse).
If no reference position return is performed after the power is turned on, however,
reference position return is performed using the same sequence as for manual
reference position return.
1: Reference position return is performed using the same sequence as for manual
reference position return.

NOTE
1 There is no effect on the axis for reference position return without
dogs.
2 When this parameter is 1, the settings of bit 3 (HJZx) of parameter
No. 1005 and bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No. 0002 determine which
reference position return without deceleration dogs using rapid
traverse or reference position return with deceleration dogs is used.

#4 GRDx When absolute position detection is performed for an axis and the correspondence
between the machine position and the position on the absolute-position detector has not
yet been established for the axis, reference position setting without dogs is:
0: Not performed more than once.
1: Performed more than once.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RMCx SFDx RRLx RABx ROAx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 ROAx The roll-over function of a rotation axis is

0: Invalid
1: Valid

- 38 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No.1006, is set to 1)

#1 RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.

NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.

#2 RRLx Relative coordinates are

0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation

NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter No.1260.

#4 SFDx In reference position return based on the grid method, the reference position shift function
is:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

#5 RMCx When machine coordinate system selection (G53) is specified, bit 1 (RABx) of parameter
No. 1008 for determining the rotation direction of an absolute command for the roll-over
function of a rotation axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1012 IDGx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 IDGx The function for setting the reference position again, without dogs, is:
0: Not inhibited.
1: Inhibited.
(The alarm (PS0301) is issued.)

- 39 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
IDGx is enabled when the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter
No.1002) is 1.
If the function for setting the reference position without dogs is
used, and the reference position is lost in absolute position
detection for a cause, the alarm DS0300, "APC ALARM: NEED
REF RETURN", is issued when the power is turned on again.
If the operator performs reference position return, as a result of
mistakenly identifying the alarm as that requesting the operator to
perform a normal reference position return, an invalid reference
position may be set. To prevent such an operator error, the IDGx
parameter is provided to prevent the reference position from being
set again without dogs.
(1) If the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.1002) is set to 1,
the IDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) is
automatically set to 1 when the reference position is set using
the function for setting the reference position without dogs.
This prevents the reference position from being set again
without dogs.
(2) Once the reference position is prevented from being set for an
axis again, without dogs, any attempt to set the reference
position for the axis without dogs results in the output of an
alarm (PS0301).
(3) When the reference position must be set again without dogs,
set IDGx (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) to 0 before setting the
reference position.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 IESPx ISCx ISAx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx Increment system of each axis
Increment system #1 ISCx #0 ISAx
IS-A 0 1
IS-B 0 0
IS-C 1 0

#7 IESPx When the least input increment is C (IS-C), the function to allow to set the larger value to
the parameter of the speed and the acceleration:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

As for the axis which set this parameter when the least input increment is C (IS-C), the
larger value can be set to the parameter of the speed and the acceleration.

- 40 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
The valid data ranges of these parameters are indicated in the table of velocity and
angular velocity parameters in (C) of the standard parameter setting tables and the table
of acceleration and angular acceleration parameters in (D).
When this function is made effective, the digit number below the decimal point of the
parameter on input screen is changed. The digit number below the decimal point
decreases by one digit in case of the least input increment C (IS-C).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1014 CDMx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#7 CDMx The Cs contour control axis is:

0: Not a virtual Cs axis
1: Virtual Cs axis

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1015 DWT WIC ZRL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 ZRL Positioning in automatic reference position return (G28), positioning in the 2nd/3rd/4th
reference position return (G30) and machine coordinate positioning (G53) are:
0: Positioning of nonlinear interpolation type
1: Positioning of linear interpolation type

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is
set to 1.

#6 WIC Workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is:

0: (M series) Performed without considering the external workpiece origin offset value.
(T series) Valid only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system.
1: (M series) Performed considering the external workpiece origin offset value.
(T series) Valid in all coordinate systems.

NOTE
In the T series, if this parameter bit is set to 0, workpiece origin
offset measurement value direct input is enabled only in the
currently selected workpiece coordinate system or an external
workpiece coordinate system. If an attempt is made to perform
workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input in a
workpiece coordinate system other than these workpiece
coordinate systems, warning "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed.

- 41 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 DWT When time for dwell per second is specified by P, the increment system:
0: Depends on the increment system
1: Does not depend on the increment system (1 ms)

1020 Program axis name for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 65 to 67,85 to 90
An axis name (parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from 'A', 'B', 'C', 'U', 'V',
'W', 'X', 'Y', and 'Z'. (When G code system A is used with the T series, however, 'U', 'V',
and 'W' are not selectable.)

(Tip) ASCII code

Axis name X Y Z A B C U V W
Setting 88 89 90 65 66 67 85 86 87

For the axes with axis names of 'X', 'Y', 'Z', and 'C' in G code system A of the T series, the
'U', 'V', 'W', and 'H' commands are the incremental commands of these axes.

NOTE
1 When G code system A is used in the T series, U, V, or W cannot
be used as an axis name.
2 The same axis name cannot be set for multiple axes.
3 When the second auxiliary function is provided (when bit 2 (BCD)
of parameter No. 8132 is 1), if the address (parameter No. 3460)
that specifies the second auxiliary function is used as an axis
name, the second auxiliary function is disabled.
4 When address C or A is used during chamfering/corner rounding or
direct drawing dimension programming (when bit 4 (CCR) of
parameter No. 3405 is 1) in the T series, address C or A cannot be
used as an axis name.
5 When the multiple repetitive canned cycle (T series) is used, only
'X', 'Y', and 'Z' can be used for the address of the target axis.

1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
To determine a plane for circular interpolation, tool radius/tool nose radius compensation,
and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane), specify which of
the basic three axes (X, Y, and Z) is used for each control axis, or a parallel axis of which
basic axis is used for each control axis.
A basic axis (X, Y, or Z) can be specified only for one control axis.
Two or more control axes can be set as parallel axes for the same basic axis.
Setting Meaning
0 Rotation axis (Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis)
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
- 42 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Setting Meaning
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis

In general, the increment system and diameter/radius specification of an axis set as a

parallel axis are to be set in the same way as for the basic three axes.

1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Usually set to same number as the control axis number.
The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting the axis-type
parameters or axis-type machine signals
- With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set
-(spindle number) as the servo axis number.
Example)
When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the
first spindle, set -1.
- For tandem controlled axes or electronic gear box (EGB) controlled axes, two axes
need to be specified as one pair. So, make a setting as described below.
Tandem axis:
For a master axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, ...) servo axis number. For a slave axis to be
paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value set for the master axis.
EGB axis:
For a slave axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, ...) servo axis number. For a dummy axis to
be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value set for the slave axis.

1031 Reference axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
The unit of some parameters common to all axes such as those for dry run feedrate and
one-digit F code feed may vary according to the increment system. An increment system
can be selected by a parameter on an axis-by-axis basis. So, the unit of those parameters
is to match the increment system of a reference axis. Set which axis to use as a reference
axis.
Among the basic three axes, the axis with the finest increment system is generally
selected as a reference axis.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the reference axis is 1st axis.

- 43 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.11 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WZR NWS ZCL ZPR
1201
WZR ZCL ZPR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically

NOTE
ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used
(when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). When the
workpiece coordinate system is used, the workpiece coordinate
system is established based on the workpiece origin offset
(parameters No. 1220 to 1226) during a manual reference position
return, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#2 ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed
0: The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1: The local coordinate system is canceled.

NOTE
ZCL is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is used (when
bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0). To use the local
coordinate system (G52), set bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to
0.

#6 NWS The workpiece coordinate system shift amount setting screen is:
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed

NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate shift amount setting screen is not
displayed, a workpiece coordinate system shift amount modification
using G10P0 cannot be made.

#7 WZR If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and
rewind signal, or emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to
0, the G code of group number 14 (workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the reset state (G code is not returned to G54)
1: Placed in the clear state (G code is returned to G54)

- 44 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 When the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set, and bit
2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the G code is placed in
the reset state, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
2 When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, whether to
place the G code in the reset state depends on bit 6 (C14) of
parameter No. 3407.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RLC G92 EWS EWD
1202
RLC G92 EWD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 EWD The shift direction of the workpiece coordinate system is:

0: The direction specified by the external workpiece zero point offset value
1: In the opposite direction to that specified by the external workpiece zero point offset
value

#1 EWS The external workpiece zero point offset is made:

0: Valid
1: Invalid

NOTE
When the external workpiece zero point offset is made invalid, the
following operation results:
1 As the external workpiece zero point offset on the workpiece
zero point offset setting screen, a workpiece coordinate system
shift amount is displayed.
2 Data keyed through the MDI panel for the workpiece coordinate
system shift amount and external workpiece zero point offset is
loaded into the memory for the workpiece coordinate system
shift amount.
3 A write to or read from the workpiece coordinate system shift
amount and external workpiece zero point offset with a macro
variable is performed using the respective memory.
4 A write to or read from the workpiece coordinate system shift
amount and external workpiece zero point offset with the window
function is performed using the respective memory.

#2 G92 When the workpiece coordinate system is used (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136
is 0), if the G code (M series: G92, T series: G50) for coordinate system setting is
specified:
0: G command is executed and no alarm is issued.
1: G command is not executed and an alarm (PS0010) is issued.

#3 RLC Local coordinate system is

0: Not cancelled by reset
1: Cancelled by reset

- 45 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0, and bit 7
(WZR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, the local coordinate
system is cancelled, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
2 When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, and bit 6 (C14)
of parameter No. 3407 is set to 0, the local coordinate system is
cancelled, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
3 When the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode is
set, and bit 2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the local
coordinate system is not cancelled, regardless of the setting of this
parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1203 EMS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
When the extended external machine zero point shift function is
enabled, the conventional external machine zero point shift function
is disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1205
WTC 3TW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#6 3TW When workpiece coordinate system selection is specified with G code in tilted working
plane indexing mode:
0: The alarm PS5462, "ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69)" occurs.
1: Workpiece coordinate system selection is executed.

CAUTION
When this parameter is 1, only G54 to G59 or G54.1 can be
specified. Specifying G52 or G92 causes alarm PS5462. Specifying
G54 to G59 or G54.1 suppresses buffering.

- 46 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Feature coordinate Feature coordinate
system (G68.2) system (G68.2)
Coordinate Coordinate
system zero system zero
point shift point shift
amount amount
Machine
zero point
G54 G55

Feature coordinate
system (G68.2) Feature coordinate
system (G68.2)
Coordinate
Coordinate system zero
system zero point shift
point shift amount
amount

G56 G57

Program example
G90 G17
G54
G68.2 X_Y_Z_ I_ J_ K_
X_Y_Z_: Coordinate system zero point shift amount
G53.1
G43H_
G55 X_Y_Z_
G56 X_Y_Z_
G57 X_Y_Z_
G49
G69

#7 WTC When workpiece coordinate system preset is done, actual tool length with tool movement
(M series) and actual tool position offset with tool movement (T series) are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered..

When this parameter is set “1”, it is possible to preset the workpiece coordinate system by
G-code, MDI operation or the workpiece coordinate system preset signal without
canceling the tool length compensation modes.
The compensation vector is kept as the below figure when the workpiece coordinate
system preset is done to the coordinate shifted by amount of movement during manual
intervention.
G54 workpiece coordinate
System before manual
intervention Po

WZo Tool length offset value

Amount of movement
during manual intervention
G54 workpiece coordinate
system after manual
intervention

Machine zero point Pn

WZn

Tool length offset value

- 47 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1206 HZP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 HZP When a high-speed reference position return is performed, the coordinate system is:
0: Preset.
1: Not preset (FS0i-C-compatible specification).

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is
not used (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1) and bit 0
(ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1207
WOL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 WOL The calculation method for workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is as
follows:
0: In a machine that requires that the difference from the reference tool be set as the
tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set
with the reference tool mounted on the machine.
(The tool length of the reference tool is assumed to be 0.)
1: In a machine that requires that the tool length itself be set as the tool length
compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set considering
the tool length when the tool length compensation for the mounted tool is enabled.

NOTE
The setting of this parameter is valid only when the system used is
the M series and bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104 is set to 1. If
this parameter is set to 1 in other than the above conditions, the
system operates as if this parameter bit were set to 0.

1220 External workpiece zero point offset value in each axis

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This is one of the parameters that give the position of the zero point of workpiece
coordinate system (G54 to G59). It gives an offset of the workpiece zero point common
to all workpiece coordinate systems. In general, the offset varies depending on the
workpiece coordinate systems. The value can be set from the PMC using the external data
input function.

- 48 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
1221 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)

1222 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 2(G55)

1223 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 3(G56)

1224 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 4 (G57)

1225 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 5 (G58)

1226 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59)

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The workpiece zero point offset values in workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 (G54 to
G59) are set.

1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the reference position in the machine coordinate system.

1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system

1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system

1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.

Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is
1250
performed

[Input type] Parameter input

- 49 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Real axis

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a
coordinate system automatically.

1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis.
For the rotation axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.

1280 Start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] Even number from 0 to 32767
Set the start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift
function. If a nonexistent address value is specified, this function is disabled.
If 100 is set, for example, this function uses R100 and up. The last R address to be used
depends on the number of controlled axes. When five controlled axes are used, R100 to
R109 are used.

NOTE
1 If a nonexistent R address or an address in the system area is set,
this function is disabled.
2 This parameter is valid when bit 0 (EMC) of parameter 1203 is 1.

Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image

1290

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image.

- 50 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.12 PARAMETERS OF STORED STROKE CHECK

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LZR RL3 LMS NAL OUT

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area
0: Inside
1: Outside

#1 NAL If the tool enters the inhibition area of stored stroke limit 1 during manual operation:
0: An alarm is issued and the tool is stopped.
1: An alarm is not issued, the stroke limit reach signal is output to the PMC, and the
tool is stopped.

NOTE
When the tool enters the inhibition area of stored stroke limit 1 due
to the move command issued during automatic operation, even if
this parameter is set to 1, an alarm is issued and the tool is
stopped. Even in this case, the stroke limit reach signal is output
to the PMC.

#2 LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When bit 0 (DLM) of parameter No. 1301 is set to 1, the stored stroke check 1 switch
signal EXLM <G007.6> is made invalid.

#5 RL3 Stored stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 is

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

#6 LZR When the stored stroke limit check immediately after power-on is enabled (bit 0 (DOT)
of parameter No. 1311 is set to 1), the stored stroke check is:
0: Performed even before a manual reference position return is made.
1: Not performed until a manual reference position return is made.

#7 BFA When the stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm is issued, an interference alarm is issued
with Interference check for each path function (T series), or a chuck/tail stock barrier (T
series) alarm is issued:
0: The tool stops after entering the prohibited area.
1: The tool stops before the prohibited area.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid even in AI contour control.
2 This parameter is invalid for the slave axis under axis synchronous
control.

- 51 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1301 PLC OTS OF1 NPC DLM

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DLM The stored stroke limit switching signals +EXLx and -EXLx for each axial direction are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this parameter is set to 1, the stored stroke check 1 switch signal EXLM <G007.6>
is made invalid.

#2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in
G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool
compensation (T series)) blocks is:
0: Checked
1: Not checked

#4 OF1 If the tool is moved into the range allowed on the axis after an alarm is raised by stored
stroke check 1,
0: The alarm is not canceled before a reset is made.
1: The OT alarm is immediately canceled.

NOTE
In the cases below, the automatic release function is disabled. To
release an alarm, a reset operation is required.
1 When a setting is made to issue an alarm before a stored stroke
limit is exceeded (bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is set to 1)
2 When an another overtravel alarm (such as stored stroke check
2, stored stroke check 3, and interference check) is already
issued

#6 OTS When the overtravel alarm is issued:

0: The overtravel alarm signal is not output to the PMC.
1: The overtravel alarm signal is output to the PMC.

#7 PLC Stroke check before movement is:

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1310 OT3x OT2x

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 OT2x Stored stroke check 2 for each axis is :

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

#1 OT3x Stored stroke check 3 for each axis is :

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

- 52 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1311 DOTx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 DOTx Stored stroke limit check immediately after power-on is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

If the stored stroke limit check is enabled, the machine coordinate value present
immediately before the power is turned off is stored.
The machine coordinate value is set immediately after the power is turned on.
Based on the machine coordinate value, absolute coordinate and relative coordinate
values are set.

NOTE
Because this function uses software to store machine coordinates,
the function puts an extra load on the system. So, this function
should not be set for axes that do not require this function. The
amount of a movement made while the power is off is not reflected
in machine coordinates immediately after the power is turned on.

1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis

1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 1 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.

NOTE
1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter
programming is specified.
2 The area outside the area set by parameter No. 1320 and No. 1321
is a prohibited area.

1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis

1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)

- 53 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.

NOTE
1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter
programming is specified.
2 Whether the inside area or outside area is a prohibited area is set
using bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300.

1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis

1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.

NOTE
1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter
programming is specified.
2 The area inside the area set by parameter No. 1324 and No. 1325
is a prohibited area.

1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis

1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 1 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.
When the stored stroke check switch signal EXLM is set to “1”, or the stored stroke
check switch signal for each axis direction +EXLx and -EXLx are set to “1”, parameter
No. 1326 and No. 1327 are used for stroke check instead of parameter No.1320 and No.
1321.

- 54 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter
programming is specified.
2 The area outside the area set by parameter No. 1326 and No. 1327
is a prohibited area.
3 The EXLM signal is valid only when bit 2 (LMS) of parameter No.
1300 is set to 1.
4 The +EXLx and -EXLx signals are valid only when bit 0 (DLM) of
parameter No. 1301 is set to 1.

4.13 PARAMETERS OF THE CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK

BARRIER (T SERIES)
Profile of a chuck
1330

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Select a chuck figure.
0 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface
1 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface

Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L)

1331

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the length (L) of the claw of the chuck.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (W)

1332

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the width (W) of the claw of the chuck.

- 55 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a radius value at all times.

Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L1)

1333

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the length (L1) of the claw of the chuck.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (W1)

1334

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the width (W1) of the claw of the chuck.

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a radius value at all times.

X coordinate of a chuck (CX)

1335

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the chuck position (X coordinate) in the workpiece coordinate system.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

- 56 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Z coordinate of a chuck (CZ)
1336

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the chuck position (Z coordinate) in the workpiece coordinate system.

NOTE
1 Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.
2 The direction of the chuck and of the tail stock is decided by a big
and small relation between this parameter and parameter No.1348
(Z coordinate of a tail stock (TZ)). Even when you not use the
chuck, please set this parameter.

Length of a tail stock (L)

1341

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the length (L) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

Diameter of a tail stock (D)

1342

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the diameter (D) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a diameter value at all times.

- 57 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Length of a tail stock (L1)

1343

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the length (L1) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

Diameter of a tail stock (D1)

1344

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the diameter (D1) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a diameter value at all times.

Length of a tail stock (L2)

1345

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the length (L2) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.

Diameter of a tail stock (D2)

1346

[Input type] Parameter input

- 58 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the diameter (D2) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a diameter value at all times.

Diameter of the hole of a tail stock (D3)

1347

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the diameter (D3) of the tail stock.

NOTE
Specify this parameter by using a diameter value at all times.

Z coordinate of a tail stock (TZ)

1348

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the tail stock position (Z coordinate) in the workpiece coordinate system.

NOTE
1 Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or
radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based
on diameter specification or radius specification.
2 The direction of the chuck and of the tail stock is decided by a big
and small relation between this parameter and parameter No.1336
(Z coordinate of a chuck (CZ)). Even when you not use the tail
stock, please set this parameter.

4.14 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR TDR RF0 JZR LRP RPD

[Input type] Parameter input

- 59 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the
reference position return.
0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1: Enabled

#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves
along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight
line.
When using 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, set this parameter to 1.

#2 JZR The manual reference position return at JOG feedrate

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.

#5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

#6 RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV JOV NPC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NPC Feed per revolution without the position coder (function for converting feed per
revolution F to feed per minute F in the feed per revolution mode (G95)) is:
0: Not used
1: Used

NOTE
1 When using the position coder, set this parameter to 0.
2 While this parameter is set to 1, threading cannot be performed
even if a position coder is provided.

#1 JOV Jog override is:

0: Enabled
1: Disabled (tied to 100%)

#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is

0: Performed at feed per minute.
1: Performed at feed per rotation.

- 60 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No.1423.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV HTG ROC
1403
HTG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 and G76, rapid traverse override for retraction after threading
is finished is:
0: Effective
1: Not effective (Override of 100%)

#5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation is:

0: Specified using the feedrate along the tangent to an arc
1: Specified using the feedrate along axes including a linear axis

#7 RTV Rapid traverse override while the tool is retracting in threading

0: Rapid traverse override is effective.
1: Rapid traverse override is not effective.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FC0 FM3 DLF
1404
FC0 DLF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 DLF After a reference position is set, manual reference position return performed at:
0: Rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1420)
1: Manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424)

NOTE
This parameter selects a feedrate for reference position return
performed without dogs. This parameter also selects a feedrate
when manual reference position return is performed according to
bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002 using rapid traverse without
deceleration dogs after a reference position is set.

#2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per minute is:
0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input)
1: 0.001 mm/min (0.00001 inch/min for inch input)

#7 FC0 Specifies the behavior of the machine tool when a block (G01, G02, G03, etc.) containing
a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is issued during automatic operation, as
follows:
0: PS0011 alarm occurs.
1: PS0011 alarm does not occur, and the block is executed.

- 61 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
This parameter is disable when the inverse time feed mode (G93)
is available.
This parameter is set from 1 to 0 , if a parameter CLR (No.3402#6)
is 1 , reset the CNC. Or if CLR is 0, turn off and on the CNC.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EDR PCL
1405
EDR PCL FR3

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 FR3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per revolution is:
0: 0.01 mm/rev (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input)
1: 0.001 mm/rev (0.00001 inch/rev for inch input)

#2 PCL The function for constant surface speed control without the position coder is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 Enable constant surface speed control (set bit 0 (SSC) of
parameter No. 8133 to 1).
2 When setting this parameter to 1, set bit 0 (NPC) of parameter No.
1402 to 0.

#5 EDR As the external deceleration rate for positioning of linear interpolation type:
0: The external deceleration rate for cutting feed is used.
1: The external deceleration rate for the first axis in rapid traverse is used.
Let us use external deceleration 1 as an example.
When this parameter bit is set to 0, the value of parameter No. 1426 is used as the
external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.
When this parameter bit is set to 1, the value of axis 1 of parameter No. 1427 is used as
the external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.

NOTE
Be sure to set 1 to bit 4 (EDPx) of parameter No. 1005 and bit 5
(EDMx) of parameter No. 1005 if this parameter is set to 0 when
positioning of linear interpolation type is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EX3 EX2
1406
F1O EX3 EX2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 EX2 External deceleration function setting 2 is:

0: Invalid
1: Valid

- 62 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 EX3 External deceleration function setting 3 is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid

#7 F1O For the cutting feedrate specified by a single-digit F code (F1 to F9), feedrate override,
and override cancellation are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
For the F0 feedrate, rapid traverse override is enabled regardless
of the setting of this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1408 IRCx RFDx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 RFDx Feedrate control on a rotation axis is exercised using:

0: Conventional method
1: Method that specifies a feedrate on the virtual circle of the rotation axis

#3 IRCx The least input increment of the maximum cutting feedrates set in parameter Nos. 1430
and 1432 is:
0: Not multiplied by ten.
1: Multiplied by ten.
Set this parameter for the following axes, which are operated by the following functions:
• Spindle control with servo motor
• Tool rotation axis in the polygon turning function

To a rotation speed of 1000 (1/min) (=360000 (deg/min)) is to be used when this

parameter is set to 1, set 36000.0 in parameter No. 1430/1432.

1410 Dry run rate

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate specification dial. The unit of
data depends on the increment system of the reference axis.

NOTE
When the operation is begun, alarm PS5009 is issued if the setting of
this parameter is set to 0.0.
Even if the operation which is not dry run is performed, this alarm is
issued.

- 63 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

1411
Cutting feedrate

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
When the machine doesn’t need to change cutting feedrate frequently during cutting, a
cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This eliminates the need to specify a
cutting feedrate (F command) in the NC program.

The feedrate set in this parameter is valid from when the CNC enters the clear state (when
bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 1) due to power-on or a reset to when the feedrate is
specified by a program command (F command). After the feedrate is specified by a
program command (F command), the feedrate is valid. For details on the clear state,
refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN).

1414
Feedrate for retrace

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a cutting feedrate for retrace operation of Retrace function. When 0 is set, a retrace
operation is performed at a programmed feedrate.

1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis.

1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
- 64 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
(1) When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No.1402, is set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog
feedrate (feed per minute) under an override of 100%.
(2) When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No.1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution), specify a
jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an override of 100%.

NOTE
This parameter is clamped to the axis-by-axis manual rapid traverse
rate (parameter No. 1424).

1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the manual rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.

NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 (rapid traverse rate for
each axis) is assumed.
2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set
in this parameter, regardless of the setting of bit 4 (JRV) of
parameter No. 1402.

1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return is performed
for each axis.

1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
- 65 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set an external deceleration rate for cutting feed or positioning of linear interpolation type
(G00).

1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.

1428 Reference position return feedrate for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)

This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for reference position return operation using
deceleration dogs, or for reference position return operation before a reference position is
set.
This parameter is also used to set a feedrate for the rapid traverse command (G00) in
automatic operation before a reference position is set.

- 66 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 To this feedrate setting (100%), a rapid traverse override (F0, 25,
50, or 100%) is applicable.
2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return
and machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid
traverse rate is used.
3 As a manual rapid traverse rate before machine coordinate system
establishment by reference position return, the jog feedrate or
manual rapid traverse rate can be selected with bit 0 (RPD) of
parameter No. 1401.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return
No.1428 No.1420
(G28)
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No.1428 No.1420
Manual reference position return
No.1428 No.1428 *3
*1
Manual rapid traverse No.1423 *2 No.1424
4 When parameter No. 1428 is set to 0, the following parameter-set
feedrates are applied.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return
No.1420 No.1420
(G28)
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No.1420 No.1420
Manual reference position return
No.1424 No.1424 *3
*1
Manual rapid traverse No.1423 *2 No.1424
1420: rapid traverse rate
1423: Jog feedrate
1424: Manual rapid traverse rate
*1 : By using bit 2 (JZR) of parameter No. 1401, the jog feedrate
can be used for manual reference position return at all times.
*2 : When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, the setting
of parameter No. 1424 is used.
*3 : When rapid traverse is used for reference position return
without dogs or manual reference position return after
reference position establishment, regardless of the
deceleration dog, the feedrate for manual reference position
return based on these functions is used (the setting of bit 1
(DLF) of parameter No. 1404 is followed).

1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.

- 67 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode such as advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI
contour control I or AI contour control II. When the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode is not set, the maximum cutting feedrate set in parameter No. 1430 is
used.
Moreover, this parameter is valid in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping.
Be sure to set this parameter for tapping axis.

1434 Maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis in case of maximum manual handle
feedrate switch signal HNDLF<Gn023.3>= “1”.

1440 External deceleration rate setting 2 in cutting feed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set external deceleration rate 2 for cutting feed or positioning of linear interpolation type
(G00).

1441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in rapid traverse

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set external deceleration rate 2 for each axis in rapid traverse.

1442 Maximum manual handle feedrate setting 2 for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

- 68 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a maximum manual handle feedrate 2 for each axis.

1443 External deceleration rate setting 3 in cutting feed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set external deceleration rate 3 for cutting feed or positioning of linear interpolation type
(G00).

1444 External deceleration rate setting 3 for each axis in rapid traverse

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set external deceleration rate 3 for each axis in rapid traverse.

1445 Maximum manual handle feedrate setting 3 for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a maximum manual handle feedrate 3 for each axis.

1450
Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator during one-digit F feed code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 127
Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse generator is
rotated one graduation during one-digit F feed code.
F max i
ΔF = (where, i=1 or 2)
100n
In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions
of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers
to the upper limit of the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed command, and set it in
parameters No. 1460 or No. 1461.
Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter No. 1460)
Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter No. 1461)

- 69 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

1451
Feedrate for F1
to to

1459
Feedrate for F9

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
These parameters set the feedrates for one-digit F code feed commands F1 to F9. When a
one-digit F code feed command is specified, and the feedrate is changed by turning the
manual pulse generator, the parameter-set value also changes accordingly.

1460
Upper limit of feedrate for F1 to F4

1461
Upper limit of feedrate for F5 to F9

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the upper limit of feedrate for the one-digit F code feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the feedrate is clamped
when it reaches the upper limit set. If a one-digit F feed command F1 to F4 is executed,
the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1460. If a one-digit F code feed command F5
to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1461.

1465 Radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate is specified on the virtual circle of a rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)
Set the radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate on the virtual circle of a rotation axis is
specified.
If 0 is set for a rotation axis, the axis is excluded from feedrate calculation.
If the input unit is the inch, enter a value in inches.
The data is then converted to a millimeter value and displayed.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006
and bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 are 1.
2 Be careful to set bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and
parameter No. 1465 for the virtual radius. If the virtual radius is
set to a small value and a feedrate on the virtual circle of the
rotation axis is specified, the movement of the axis becomes faster.

- 70 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92, G76

1466

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
When threading cycle G92, G76 is specified, retraction is performed after threading. Set a
feedrate for this retraction.

CAUTION
When the manual handle interrupt is valid (Bit 1 (NHI) of parameter
No.8135 is 0), set the same value as the parameter No.1430 to this
parameter.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0 or bit 1 (CFR) of parameter No.
1611 is set to 1, the rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1420
is used.

4.15 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION

CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI RTO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse

0: Blocks are not overlapped in rapid traverse.
1: Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse.

#5 NCI An in-position check:

0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration delay
becomes 0) at deceleration time and that the machine position has reached a
specified position (the servo positional deviation is within the in-position width set
by parameter No. 1826).
1: Confirms only that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration
delay becomes 0) at deceleration time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 LS2 BS2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 71 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 BS2 Acceleration/deceleration in a mode of acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead

interpolation such as the advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI
contour control I or AI contour control II mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is used.
(The setting of bit 6 (LS2) of parameter No. 1602 is followed.)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.

#6 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration in a mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation such

as the advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI
contour control II mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.

BS2 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration

0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 (The bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation option is required.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1603 PRT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 PRT For positioning of linear interpolation type:

0: Acceleration/deceleration of acceleration fixed type is used.
1: Acceleration/deceleration of time fixed type is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1604 SHP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SHP When automatic operation is started, the state equivalent to the specification of G5.1Q1
for AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I/AI contour control II is:
0: Not set
1: Set
Upon reset, the state where G5.1Q1 is specified is set.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1606 MNJx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 MNJx In manual handle interrupt :

0: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is enabled, and jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
1: Both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog feed acceleration/deceleration
are applied.

- 72 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
THLx JGLx CTBx CTLx
1610
JGLx CTBx CTLx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.

NOTE
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and set bit 1 (CTBx) of
parameter No. 1610 to select bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation.
Parameter
Acceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

#1 CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No.1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation function is
used. When this function is not used, the
acceleration/deceleration is determined according to bit 0 (CTLx) of
parameter No. 1610 regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#4 JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)

#5 THLx Acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
As the time constant and FL feedrate, however, the settings of parameter Nos. 1626
and 1627 for threading cycles are used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
AOFF CFR
1611
AOFF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
- 73 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92, G76 and G76.7:
0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used
together with the threading time constant (parameter No. 1626) and FL feedrate
(parameter No. 1627).
1: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse is used
together with the rapid traverse time constant.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, a check is made before a retraction to
see that the specified feedrate has become 0 (the delay in
acceleration/deceleration has become 0). For retraction, the rapid
traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used, regardless of the
setting of parameter No. 1466. When this parameter is set to 0,
parameter No. 1466 is used as the feedrate for retraction. As
acceleration/deceleration used for retraction, only
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse
before look-ahead interpolation is disabled.

#2 AOFF If the advanced preview feed forward function is enabled by parameter setting when the
advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI
contour control II mode is not set, the advanced preview feed forward function is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1612 AIR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 AIR During rapid-traverse, the mode signals and status display in the advanced preview
control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control mode are:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
When this parameter is set to 1, mode blink display, AI advanced preview control(M
series), AI contour control I or AI contour control II mode signal AICC<Fn062.0>,
and advanced preview control signal G08MD<Fn066.0> (T series) are valid.

- 74 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
In addition to the setting of this parameter, the following settings
are required. In a rapid traverse command, the above items are
valid when conditions 1 to 3 below are satisfied. In the G28, G30,
and G53 commands, the above items are valid when conditions 1
to 5 below are satisfied.
1 Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is 1 (interpolation type
positioning is enabled).
2 Parameter No.1671 (maximum acceleration during rapid
traverse) is set.
3 Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 is 1
(acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled for
rapid traverse).
4 Bit 4 (ZRL) of parameter No. 1015 is 1 (the G28, G30, and G53
commands are of interpolation type).
5 Bit 1 (AMP) of parameter No. 11240 is 1
(acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled for the
G28, G30, and G53 commands in the advanced preview control,
AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI contour
control II mode.)

Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

1620
in rapid traverse for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
[Example]
For linear acceleration/deceleration

Speed
Rapid traverse rate
(Parameter No. 1420)

T T
Time
T : Setting of parameter No. 1620

- 75 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

Speed Rapid traverse rate
(Parameter No. 1420)

T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1

T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620

T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621
(However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.)
Total acceleration (deceleration) time : T1 + T2
Time for linear portion : T1−T2
Time for curve portion : T2 × 2

1621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
Specify time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration in rapid traverse
for each axis.

1622 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed,
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which type to
use is selected with bits 1(CTBx) and 0(CTLx) of parameter No.1610. Except for special
applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If the time
constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be
obtained.

1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for
each axis.

- 76 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
Except for special applications, set 0 for all axes in this parameter.
Otherwise, the correct straight line or arc shape cannot be
obtained.

1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.

1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis.
This parameter allows only the exponential type.

Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis

1626

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 and G76 for each axis.

FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis

1627

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set an FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 and G76 for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in a special case.

1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

- 77 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for each axis.
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed.

If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum
allowable acceleration rate set for another axis by a factor or 2 or more, the feedrate at a
corner where the direction of travel abruptly changes can decrease temporarily.

Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1671
traverse for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for linear rapid traverse.
If a value greater than 100000.0, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of the following is assumed:
1000.0 mm/sec2
100.0 inch/sec2
100.0 degrees/sec2
If 0 is specified for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not
performed.

Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1672
traverse

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration for linear rapid
traverse (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state of constant
acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the acceleration rate
set in parameter No. 1671: time of (B) in the figure below).
F e e d ra te in ta n g e n t d ire ctio n
M a xim u m a cce le ra tio n ra te n o t e xce e d ing
m a xim u m a llo w a b le a cce le ra tion ra te set b y
p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 1 for e a ch a xis is
a u to m a tica lly ca lcula te d .

(A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A )

T im e s e t b y p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 72

- 78 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner
override

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for an inner circular cutting feedrate change by
automatic corner override.

In the case of circular cutting offset inward, the actual feedrate is determined by a
specified feedrate (F) as follows:
Rc Rc: Radius of tool center
F× path
Rp Rp: Programmed radius
Thus, the feedrate along the programmed path satisfies the specified value of F.

Programmed path

Rc
Tool center path
Rp

However, if Rc is too small when compared with Rp, Rc/Rp 0 results to stop the tool.
So, a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set, and the feedrate of the tool is set to
F×(MDR) when Rc/Rp ≤ MDR.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the minimum deceleration ratio
(MDR) is 100%.

1711
Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner override

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 2 to 178
Set an inner determination angle for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.

1712
Override value for inner corner override

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
- 79 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 1 to 100

Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding.

1713
Start distance (Le) for inner corner override

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set a start distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.

1714
End distance (Ls) for inner corner override

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set an end distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.

When θ ≤ θp, an inner corner is assumed. (Parameter No. 1711 is used to set θp.)
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, an override is applied to the feedrate
in the range of Le in the previous block from the intersection of the corner and in the
range of Ls in the next block from the intersection of the corner.
Distances Le and Ls represent linear distances from the intersection of a corner to points
on the tool center path.
Le and Ls are set in parameter No. 1713 and No. 1714.

Programmed path

Tool center path

An override is applied to the range from point a to point b.

1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged successively, or when a
rapid traverse block is followed by a block that does not cause, movement. When the
feedrate for each axis of a block is reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution
of the next block is started.

- 80 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
The parameter No.1722 is effective when parameter No.1601 #4
(RTO) is set to 1.

Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1732
interpolation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum
feedrate is automatically calculated so that acceleration produced by changing the move
direction in circular interpolation does not exceed the maximum allowable acceleration
rate specified in parameter No. 1735.
If the radius of an arc is very small, a calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.

Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1735
interpolation for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on
acceleration in circular interpolation.
Feedrate is controlled so that acceleration produced by changing the move direction in
circular interpolation does not exceed the value specified in this parameter.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled.
If a different value is set in this parameter for each axis, a feedrate is determined from the
smaller of the acceleration rates specified for the two circular axes.

Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI
1737
advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI contour control II for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate produced by changing the tool move
direction.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled. If 0 is set for all axes, the deceleration function based on acceleration is not
performed.
- 81 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

In circular interpolation, however, the deceleration function based on feedrate control

using acceleration in circular interpolation (parameter No. 1735) is enabled.

Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI advanced preview
1738
control, AI contour control I or AI contour control II

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
With the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI advanced preview control, AI
contour control I or AI contour control II, a feedrate most suitable for a desired figure is
automatically calculated.
Depending on the figure, however, the calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.

FL rate for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation for each axis in the
1763
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set a minimum allowable feedrate (FL feedrate) for acceleration/ deceleration after
cutting feed interpolation in acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation as in advanced
preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI contour control
II.

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the

1769
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in advanced preview control,
AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI contour control II, not the
ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is used.
Be sure to specify the same time constant value for all axes except for a special
application. If different values are set, correct linear and circular figures cannot be
obtained.

1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 200

- 82 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state of
constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1660: time of (B) in the figure below).

Feedrate in tangent direction

Optimum inclination is automatically
calculated from the setting of parameter
No. 1660.

(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)

Time set by parameter No. 1772

NOTE
The option of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before
look-ahead interpolation is required. This parameter is valid only
in the AI contour control I or AI contour control II mode.

1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner feedrate difference

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
If a feedrate component change for each axis exceeding the value set in this parameter
occurs at the joint of blocks, the feedrate determination function based on corner feedrate
difference finds a feedrate not exceeding the set value and performs deceleration by using
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Thus, a shock to the machine and
machining error at a corner can be reduced.

1788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change
for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based
on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, feedrate control based on acceleration change is
disabled.
If 0 is set for all axes, feedrate control based on acceleration change is not exercised.
- 83 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

1789 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change
for each axis (linear interpolation)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based
on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive
linear interpolation operations.
In feedrate control based on acceleration change at a corner between linear interpolation
operations, the maximum allowable acceleration change rate not set in parameter
No.1788 but set in this parameter is valid.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the maximum allowable acceleration change rate
set in parameter No.1788 is valid.
Feedrate control based on acceleration change is disabled for an axis with 0 set in
parameter No.1788, so that the setting of this parameter for such an axis is ignored.

1790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 50
Set the ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration to the change time of
acceleration (*1) by percentage (%) in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before look-ahead interpolation.
If 0 is set in this parameter or a value not within the valid data range is specified in this
parameter, smooth bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before look-ahead interpolation
is not performed.
(*1) Parameter No. 1772 for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation
(cutting feed).
Parameter No. 1672 for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in linear rapid
traverse.

4.16 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 RBK FFR CVR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position control ready signal
PRDY comes ON
0: A servo alarm is generated.
1: A servo alarm is not generated.

- 84 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#3 FFR Feed-forward control in rapid traverse is:

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Feed-forward is enabled only in normal cutting feed. When this parameter is set to 1,
feed-forward is enabled in rapid traverse as well. This capability reduces the servo
positional deviation, thus reducing the time required to enter the in-position width at the
time of positioning.

#4 RBK Backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and cutting feed is
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1801 CIN CCI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 CCI As the in-position width for cutting feed:

0: The parameter (No. 1826) applicable to rapid traverse as well is used.
1: The parameter (No. 1827) dedicated to cutting feed is used.
This parameter enables the in-position width for cutting feed (parameter No. 1827) to be
set instead of the in-position width for rapid traverse (parameter No. 1826).
By setting bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801, choose whether to use this function or the
conventional in-position check function.
This function, when specified, is enabled for all axes. So, for an axis that does not require
this function, set the same data in parameter No. 1826 and No. 1827.

#5 CIN When CCI is set to 1, the dedicated parameter for specifying an in-position width for
cutting feed is used:
0: Only when the next block specifies cutting feed.
1: Regardless of the next block.
The table below indicates the relationships between the parameters for cutting feed and
rapid traverse.

Parameter CIN(No.1801 #5)

0 1
Rapid traverse → Rapid traverse →
No.1826 No.1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse → Rapid traverse →
No.1826 No.1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
0
Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No.1826 No.1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No.1826 No.1826
Parameter CCI Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
(No.1801 #4) Rapid traverse → Rapid traverse →
No.1826 No.1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse → Rapid traverse →
No.1826 No.1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
1
Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No.1827 No.1827
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed → Cutting feed →
No.1826 No.1827
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
The parameters CCI and CIN can also be applied to a Cs axis.

- 85 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1802 BKL15x DC2x DC4x

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks:
0: An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting four reference marks.

#2 DC2x Reference position establishment operation for a linear scale with reference marks is
performed as follows:
0: The setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting two reference marks.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 1, specify the direction of the scale
zero point by setting bit 4 (SCP) of parameter No. 1817.
2 When a rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is
used, this parameter is invalid. Even when this parameter is set to
1, the setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.

#4 BKL15x When the direction of a movement is determined in backlash compensation:

0: The compensation amount is not considered.
1: The compensation amount (pitch error, simple straightness, external machine
coordinate system shift, etc.) is considered.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQF TQA TQI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is:

0: Made.
1: Not made.

#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time/move-time error is:

0: Checked.
1: Not checked.

#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1804 SAK ANA IVO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 86 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#4 IVO When an attempt is made to release an emergency stop while the VRDY OFF alarm
ignore signal is “1”:
0: The emergency stop state is not released until the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is
set to 0.
1: The emergency stop state is released.

NOTE
When a reset is issued while the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is
set to “1” and the motor activating current is low, the reset state can
also be released, provided this parameter is set to 1.

#5 ANA When an abnormal load is detected for an axis:

0: Movement along all axes is stopped, and a servo alarm is output. (Abnormal load
detection alarm function)
1: No servo alarm is output, and movement along only the axes of the group containing
the axis with the abnormal load is stopped in interlock mode. (Abnormal load
detection group function) (The group number of each axis is set in parameter
No.1881.)

WARNING
The abnormal load detection group function uses the servo-off
state in which the motor is de-energized and the dynamic brake
does not operate. Accordingly, the servo motor enters the free
running state and no braking force is applied. Therefore, for a
vertical axis, if a failure occurs in the mechanical brake, driving
circuit, or sequence, the axis may fall freely in a significant manner.
When applying abnormal load detection to a vertical axis, use the
abnormal load detection function.

#6 SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is “1”, or when the VRDY OFF
alarm ignore signals IGNVRYn are “1”:
0: Servo ready signal SA is set to “0”.
1: Servo ready signal SA remains set to “1”.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1805 TSM TSA TRE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 TRE When bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0 (not to perform follow-up operation
with a torque control command in PMC axis control), the servo error counter is:
0: Updated.
When the error count exceeds the maximum allowable cumulative travel value
(parameter No. 1885), the alarm SV0423, “EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE” is
issued.
1: Not updated.
No errors are accumulated, so that the alarm (SV0423) is not issued. When the
maximum allowable feedrate is exceeded, however, the alarm SV0422, “EXCESS
VELOCITY IN TORQUE” is issued.
To return to position control when this parameter bit is set to 1, a reference position
return operation needs to be performed.

- 87 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 TSA As the abnormal load detection level during dwell, M code execution, and automatic
operation halt state:
0: The threshold value for rapid traverse is used. (parameter No.2142)
1: The threshold value for cutting feed is used. (parameter No.2104)
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ABG0) of parameter No. 2200 is set to 1.

#4 TSM As the abnormal load detection level in the jog feed mode (excluding manual rapid
traverse) and manual handle feed mode:
0: The threshold value for rapid traverse is used. (parameter No.2142)
1: The threshold value for cutting feed is used. (parameter No.2104)
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ABG0) of parameter No. 2200 is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1814 ALGx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#7 ALGx The servo axis loop gain in the Cs contour control mode is:
0: Not matched with the Cs contour control loop gain.
1: Matched with the Cs contour control loop gain.

NOTE
1 For those axes that are used for electronic gear box (M series),
spindle positioning (T series), index table indexing (M series), PMC
axis control, rigid tapping, and so forth, set this parameter to 0 (Not
matched with the Cs contouring control loop gain).
2 When specifying axes subject to interpolation with the Cs
contouring control axis by using parameter No. 39n0 (n = 0 to 3),
set this parameter to 0.
3 When making a setting so that a position gain is automatically set
at the time of Cs contouring control switching by setting bit 7 (ALG)
of parameter No. 1814 to 1, set all of parameter No. 39n0 (n = 0 to
3) to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 RONx APCx APZx DCRx DCLx OPTx RVSx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 RVSx Specifies to save rotary data by CNC, as for an axis whose movable is over one rotation
and its rotary scale which has no rotary data:
0: Not to save.
1: To save.

- 88 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 In the case of a rotary axis B type whose movable range is over
one rotation, a rotary scale with rotary data had better be used.
2 This parameter is available for only the rotary axis B type with an
absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) or a rotary scale
with distance-coded reference marks (serial).This function cannot
be used for distance coded rotary scale interface (phase A/B).
3 If this parameter is available, the machine coordinate value just
before CNC turns off is saved. In the case of moving over 180
degree during turning off, a machine coordinate value may get out
over a rotation because CNC saves a machine coordinate value
just before CNC turns off and in following turning on get from the
value.
4 When this parameter is set, machine position and position on
absolute position detector become uncorresponding.
Consequently, the parameter APZ (No. 1815#4: indicating that the
correspondence is established) is set to 0, and an alarm DS0300,
"APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN", occurs. Why the parameter
APZ (No. 1815#4) is set to 0 can be checked using diagnostic data
No. 310#0.
5 Absolute coordinate value is set by machine coordinate value.
However, after CNC turns on, the workpiece offset such as G92
and G52 executed before CNC turns off is not set.
6 This function cannot be used together with the parameter SCRx
(No.1817#3) that convert scale data.
7 In the case that the amount of one rotation of rotary axis is 360, the
parameter No.1869 is set to 0. Moreover, set the parameter
No.1240 to 0.
8 If it is necessary to set an amount of one rotation of rotary axis
arbitrarily, the parameter No.1869 is set to the amount of one
rotation. Moreover, set the parameter No.1240 to 0.

#1 OPTx Position detector

0: A separate pulse coder is not used.
1: A separate pulse coder is used.

NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale with reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address zero point
(full-closed system).

#2 DCLx As a separate position detector, a linear scale with reference marks or a linear scale with
an absolute address zero point is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

#3 DCRx As a scale with absolute address reference marks:

0: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is not used.
1: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is used.

- 89 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When using a rotary encoder with absolute address reference
marks, set also bit 2 (DCLx) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.

#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position
detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after
the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be
turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This
completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position
on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically.

#5 APCx Position detector

0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)

#6 RONx With a rotation axis A type, an absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) using a
scale without rotary data is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 This parameter is available for only the rotary axis A type with an
absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder).This function
cannot be used for a rotary scale with distance-coded reference
marks (serial) or for a distance coded rotary scale interface (phase
A/B).
2 Set it to a rotary axis A type using a scale without rotary data.
3 Do not set it to a rotary axis A type using a scale with rotary data.
4 When this parameter is set, machine position and position on
absolute position detector become uncorresponding.
Consequently, the parameter APZ (No. 1815#4: indicating that the
correspondence is established) is set to 0, and an alarm DS0300,
"APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN", occurs. Why the parameter
APZ (No. 1815#4) is set to 0 can be checked using diagnostic data
No. 310#0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

- 90 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#4 DM1x
#5 DM2x
#6 DM3x
By using DM1x, DM2x, and DM3x, a detection multiplication factor (DMR) is set.
This parameter is valid when a separate position detector (AB phase) is used and
parameter No. 2084 and No. 2085 are not set.
DM3x DM2x DM1x DMR
0 0 0 1/2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 3/2
0 1 1 2
1 0 0 5/2
1 0 1 3
1 1 0 7/2
1 1 1 4

NOTE
For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides
setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based
on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of
movement.
• Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not
changed).
• Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear
(DMR).
For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set,
the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above
changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed).
To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1817 TANx SCPx SCRx SBLx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#2 SBLx Smooth backlash compensation is :

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#3 SCRx Specifies whether to convert scale data by using threshold position (parameter No.1868)
so that rotary axis B type is available, in the case of the axis B type that use a rotary scale
without data (the number of rotation), whose movable range is under one rotation:
0 : Not to convert.
1 : To convert.

- 91 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 This parameter is available for only the rotary axis B type with an
absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) or a rotary scale
with distance-coded reference marks (serial).
2 This function cannot be used for distance coded rotary scale
interface (phase A/B).
3 Don't set this parameter in the case of no uncontinuous point within
movable range of rotary axis even if the rotary axis B type.
4 When this parameter is set, machine position and position on
absolute position detector become uncorresponding.
Consequently, the parameter APZ (No. 1815#4: indicating that the
correspondence is established) is set to 0, and an alarm DS0300,
"APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN", occurs. Why the parameter
APZ (No. 1815#4) is set to 0 can be checked using diagnostic data
No. 310#0.
5 This function cannot be used together with the parameter RVSx
(No.1815#0) that save rotary data by CNC.
6 In this function, the amount of one rotation of rotary axis assumes
360, and the machine position 0 assumes the reference position. It
is not possible to apply to a rotary axis other than the
above-mentioned setting.
7 Set the parameter No.1240 to 0.

#4 SCPx For two-point measurement (when bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No. 1802 is set to 1), the
scale zero point direction is:
0: On the minus side. (The reference position is located in the plus direction when
viewed from the scale zero point.)
1: On the plus side. (The reference position is located in the minus direction when
viewed from the scale zero point.)

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No. 1802 is
set to 1.
2 If this parameter is set to an incorrect value, an incorrect coordinate
system is established. In such a case, reverse the setting then
perform reference position establishment operation again.

● When parameter SCP = 0

Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1

0.020 0.040 9.940 9.960 9.980

Scale zero point Machine coordinate system

－ ＋
Reference position

- 92 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

● When parameter SCP = 1

Mark 1 = Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1

0.020 0.040 9.940 9.960 9.980

Scale zero point Machine coordinate system

＋ －
Reference position

#6 TANx Tandem control

0: Not used
1: Used

NOTE
Set this parameter to both master axis and slave axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1818 SDCx DG0x RF2x RFSx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 RFSx If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (ZRF = 0)
when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute
address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position after reference position establishment
operation.
1: No movement is made after reference position establishment operation, but the
operation is completed.

NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.

#1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is already established (ZRF
= 1) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute
address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position.
1: No movement is made to the intermediate position and reference position, but the
operation is completed.

NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.

#2 DG0x When the linear scale function with absolute address reference marks is used, reference
position establishment operation based on the G00 command and jog feed is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 93 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 SDCx A linear scale with an absolute address zero point is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 After setting parameter SDCx, be sure to turn the power off and
back on again. Note that the power-off alarm PW0000, “POWER
MUST BE OFF” is not issued.
2 For the full-closed system, set bit 1 (OPTx) of parameter No. 1815
to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1819 NAHx DATx CRFx FUPx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 FUPx To perform follow-up when the servo is off is set for each axis.
0: The follow-up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow-up is performed or not.
When *FLWU is 0, follow-up is performed.
When *FLWU is 1, follow-up is not performed.
1: Follow-up is not performed.

NOTE
When using the index table indexing function (M series), set FUPx
to 1 for a control axis subject to index table indexing.

#1 CRFx When the servo alarm SV0445 “SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM”, SV0447 “HARD
DISCONNECT(EXT)”, or SV0421 “EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL)” is issued:
0: The reference position established state is not affected.
1: The reference position unestablished state is assumed. (Bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No.
1815 is set to 0.)

#2 DATx When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute
address reference marks is used, the automatic setting of parameter No. 1883 and No.
1884 at manual reference position return time is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

The automatic setting procedure is as follows:

<1> Set an appropriate value in parameter No. 1815, No. 1821, and No. 1882.
<2> Position the machine at the reference position by manual operation.
<3> Set this parameter to 1.
<4> Perform a manual reference position return operation. Upon completion of manual
reference position return operation, parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884 are set, and
this parameter is automatically set to 0.

#7 NAHx In the advanced preview control mode, advanced preview feed-forward is:
0: Used
1: Not used

- 94 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] See below :
Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command increment to the
detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit × command multiplier

Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment

Name of an Least command

Least input increment Maximum stroke
increment system increment
0.01 mm 0.01 mm ±999999.99 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch 0.001 inch ±99999.999 inch
0.01 deg 0.01 deg ±999999.99 deg
0.001 mm 0.001 mm ±999999.999 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch ±99999.9999 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg ±999999.999 deg
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm ±99999.9999 mm
IS-C 0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch ±9999.99999 inch
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg ±99999.9999 deg

When bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No.1004, which multiplies the input increment by 10, is
set to 1 and a value is specified with no decimal point, the specifications of each
increment system are changed as follows.

Name of an Least command

Least input increment Maximum stroke
increment system increment
0.01 mm 0.001 mm ±999999.999 mm
IS-B 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch ±99999.9999 inch
0.01 deg 0.001 deg ±999999.999 deg
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm ±99999.9999 mm
IS-C 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch ±9999.99999 inch
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg ±99999.9999 deg

NOTE
The unit (mm or inch) in the table is used for indicating a diameter
value for diameter programming (when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter
No.1006 is set to 1) or a radius value for radius programming.

Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the
reference counter

- 95 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Command pulse
+ DA To
×CMR Error counter
Converter
least velocity
command - control
increment

Position
Reference counter ×DMR detector
Detection Feedback
unit pulse

Set CMR and DMR so that the pulse weight of + input (command from the CNC) into the
error counter matches the pulse weight of -input (feedback from the position detector).
[Least command increment]/CMR=[Detection unit]=
[Feedback pulse unit]/DMR
[Least command increment]:
Minimum unit of commands issued from the CNC to the machine
[Detection unit]: Minimum unit for machine position detection

The unit of feedback pulses varies, depending on the type of detector.

[Feedback pulse unit]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder]/[Number of
pulses per rotation of the pulse coder]

As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the reference position
return in the grid method.
[Size of the reference counter]=[Grid interval]/[Detection unit]
[Grid interval]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder]

The setting of a command multiplier is as follows:

(1) When command multiplier is 1 to 1/27
Set value = 1 / command multiplier + 100
Valid data range : 101 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 0.5 to 48
Set value = 2 × command multiplier
Valid data range : 1 to 96

NOTE
1 If a feedrate exceeding the feedrate found by the expression below
is used, an incorrect travel amount may result or a servo alarm may
be issued. Be sure to use a feedrate not exceeding the feedrate
found by the following expression:
Fmax[mm/min] = 196602 × 104 × least command increment / CMR

- 96 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
2 For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides
setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based
on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of
movement.
• Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not
changed).
• Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear
(DMR).
For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set,
the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above
changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed).
To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.

1821 Reference counter size for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
Set a reference counter size.
As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on
the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the interval of
mark 1.

1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.01/sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), the same value
must be set for all axes. When the machine requires positioning only, the values set for
the axes may differ from one another. As the loop gain increases, the response by position
control is improved. A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses counted by the
error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:
Positioning deviation = Feedrate / (60 × Loop gain)
Unit : Positioning deviation mm, inch or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inch/min, or deg/min
Loop gain 1/sec

1826 In-position width for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

- 97 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] 2-word axis

[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The in-position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute
value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is
assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)

1827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4
(CCI) of parameter No.1801=1.

1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a
servo alarm (SV0411) is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in
emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some margin in this
parameter.

1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
set for stopped state, a servo alarm (SV0410) is generated, and operation is stopped
immediately (as in emergency stop).

1830 Axis-by-axis positional deviation limit at servo-off time

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit at servo-off time, on an
axis-by-axis basis.
If the value specified with this parameter is exceeded at servo-off time, a servo alarm is
issued to cause an immediate stop (same as an emergency stop). Usually, set the same
value as a positional deviation at stop time.

- 98 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, no positional deviation limit check
is made at servo-off time.

1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.)
When the servo error amount never exceeds this parameter before release of the limit
switch for the deceleration (Reference position return deceleration signal *DEC) in
reference position return, alarm (PS0090) “REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE”
occurs.

Distance to the first grid point when the reference position shift amount in the reference position shift
1844
function is 0 or when a reference position return is made by grid shift

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -999999999 to 999999999
(1) When the reference position shift function is enabled (when bit 4 (SFDx) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 1)
Set the distance (detection unit) to the first grid point from a point at which the
deceleration dog is released when the reference position shift (parameter No. 1850)
is set to 0.
(2) When a reference position return is made by grid shift with a setting not to use
reference position setting without dogs (when bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is
set to 0, and bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0)
Set the distance to the first grid point from a point at which the deceleration dog is
released. (Detection unit)
(3) When a reference position return is made by grid shift with a setting to use reference
position setting without dogs (when bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0,
and bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 1)
Set the distance from the start position for reference position setting without dogs to
the first grid point. (Detection unit)

- 99 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 When the reference position shift function is enabled (when bit 4
(SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 1)
When bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 1, the distance
from a point at which the deceleration dog is released to the first
grid point (parameter No. 1844) is set to 0, and reference position
shift (parameter No. 1850) is set to 0, a manual reference position
return allows this parameter to be set automatically. Do not change
an automatically set value.
2 When a reference position return is made by grid shift with a setting
not to use reference position setting without dogs (when bit 4
(SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0, and bit 1 (DLZx) of
parameter No. 1005 is set to 0)
When a manual reference position return using deceleration dogs
is made, this parameter is set automatically.
3 When a reference position return is made by grid shift with a setting
to use reference position setting without dogs (when bit 4 (SFDx) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 0, and bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.
1005 is set to 1)
When a reference position setting without dogs is made, this
parameter is set automatically.

1846 Distance for starting the second stage of smooth backlash compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
For each axis, set the distance from the point where the axis movement direction is
reversed to the point where the second stage of smooth backlash compensation is started.

Smooth backlash compensation is disabled unless the following conditions are satisfied.
Setting of parameter No. 1846 ≥ 0
Setting of parameter No. 1846 < Setting of parameter No. 1847

1847 Distance for ending the second stage of smooth backlash compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
For each axis, set the distance from the point where the axis movement direction is
reversed to the point where the second stage of smooth backlash compensation is ended.

Smooth backlash compensation is disabled unless the following conditions are satisfied.
Setting of parameter No. 1846 ≥ 0
Setting of parameter No. 1846 < Setting of parameter No. 1847

1848 Value of the first stage of smooth backlash compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis

- 100 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Set the value of the first stage of smooth backlash compensation for each axis.
If the setting of this parameter is greater than the total amount of backlash compensation,
smooth backlash compensation is not performed.
If the backlash compensating value (No. 1851) for each axis is negative, set this
parameter to a negative value. If the sign of the backlash compensating value (No.
1851) for each axis is different, perform compensation with the value of the first stage of
smooth backlash compensation assumed to be 0.

1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this parameter.
Up to the maximum value counted by the reference counter can be specified as the grid
shift.
In case of parameter SFDx(No.1008#4) is 0: Grid shift
In case of parameter SFDx(No.1008#4) is 1: Reference point shift

NOTE
For setting the reference position without dogs, only the grid shift
function can be used.
(The reference position shift function cannot be used.)

1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction
after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.

1852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Set the backlash compensating value used in rapid traverse for each axis. (This parameter
is valid when RBK, #4 of parameter 1800, is set to 1.) More precise machining can be
performed by changing the backlash compensating value depending on the feedrate, the
cutting feed or the rapid traverse positioning. Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be
A and the measured backlash at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is
shown below depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and the
change of the direction of movement.
- 101 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Change of feedrate Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid Cutting feed

Change of cutting feed to rapid traverse to to rapid
direction of movement traverse cutting feed traverse
Same direction 0 0 ±α ±(-α)
Opposite direction ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)

NOTE
1 α=(A-B)/2
2 The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the
direction of movement.

NOTE
1 Jog feed is regarded as cutting feed.
2 The backlash compensation depending on a rapid traverse and a
cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position
return is completed after the power is turned on. The normal
backlash compensation is performed according to the value
specified in parameter No.1851 irrespective of a rapid traverse
and a cutting feed.
3 The backlash compensation depending on a rapid traverse and a
cutting feed is performed only when bit 4 (RBK) of parameter
No.1800 is set to 1. When RBK is set to 0, the normal backlash is
performed.

1860 Value 1 for the zero point of the absolute position detector

1861 Value 2 for the zero point of the absolute position detector

1862 Value 3 for the zero point of the absolute position detector

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Locked parameter

[Data type] 2-word axis
Parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 are values for the zero point of the absolute position
detector (association with reference position and the counter value of the absolute
position detector).
The CNC automatically sets parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 when correspondence between
the reference position and the absolute position detector is performed.
It is not available to set parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 by using inputting of MDI
operation, FOCAS2, PMC window or programmable parameter input(G10).

Parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 can be set as the backup of the zero point data of absolute
position detection by the parameter input from connected I/O unit or by restoring the
SRAM area of boot system.
When parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 are set as the backup of the zero point data of the
absolute position detection, be careful about the following.

- 102 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
- When parameters Nos.1860 to 1862 are set as the backup of the zero point data of
absolute position detection, back up them before the setting and use backup data
after the setting.
- When the motor or the detector is exchanged, don’t use the backup of the zero point
data of absolute position detection.
- Don’t set the backup of the zero point data of absolute position detection as them of
the other machine.
- When the data of the absolute position detector is detected by the backup battery,
check that the data of the absolute position detector is ensured by the backup battery.
When the data of the absolute position detector is lost without the backup battery,
perform the correspondence between the machine position and the absolute position
detector.

WARNING
If the zero point of the absolute position detector is not set properly,
the machine coordinate system is not established correctly.

1868 Threshold position for converting scale data (each axis)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (Refer to the standard parameter setting
table (B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
In the case that scale data of a rotary scale without rotary data is larger than the scale data
of the threshold position (this parameter value), it is converted to be continuous data in
movable range by subtracting one rotary data. The machine coordinate out of movable
range (angle from an uncontinuous point) must be set as threshold position. As for the
axis with this parameter is set to 0, conversion of scale data is not performed.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is available for only the rotary axis B type with an
absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) or a rotary scale
with distance-coded reference marks (serial), as for the parameter
SCRx(No.1817#3) is set to 1.
3 This function cannot be used for distance coded rotary scale
interface (phase A/B).
4 Don't set this parameter in the case of no uncontinuous point within
movable range of rotary axis even if the rotary axis B type.
5 When this parameter is set, machine position and position on
absolute position detector become uncorresponding.
Consequently, the parameter APZ (No. 1815#4: indicating that the
correspondence is established) is set to 0, and an alarm DS0300,
"APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN", occurs. Why the parameter
APZ (No. 1815#4) is set to 0 can be checked using diagnostic data
No. 310#0.

- 103 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

1869 The amount of one rotation of rotary axis B type (each axis)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (Refer to the standard parameter setting
table (B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)

Normally, the amount of one rotation of rotary axis is 360, and the machine position 0 is
the reference position.
In this case, this parameter is set to 0.

For instance, when this parameter is set to 523.000, the amount of one rotation become
523.000 (in the case of IS-B), if it is necessary to set it arbitrarily.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is available for only the rotary axis B type with an
absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) or a rotary scale
with distance-coded reference marks (serial), as for the parameter
SCRx(No.1817#3) is set to 1 or the parameter SCRx(No.1815#0) is
set to 1.
3 In the case that the amount of one rotation of rotary axis is 360, this
parameter is set to 0.If it is necessary to set an amount of one
rotation of rotary axis arbitrarily, this parameter is set to the amount
of one rotation.
4 When this parameter is set, machine position and position on
absolute position detector become uncorresponding.
Consequently, the parameter APZ (No. 1815#4: indicating that the
correspondence is established) is set to 0, and an alarm DS0300,
"APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN", occurs. Why the parameter
APZ (No. 1815#4) is set to 0 can be checked using diagnostic data
No. 310#0.
5 This parameter No.1869 is common in movable range that is under
one rotation (the parameter SCRx (No.1817#3) is set to 1) and
movable range that is over one rotation (the parameter RVS
(No.1815#0) is set to 1).

1874 Numerator of the flexible feed gear for the built-in position detector

1875 Denominator of the flexible feed gear for the built-in position detector

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
- 104 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

When using temporary absolute coordinate setting, set the flexible feed gear for the
built-in position detector on each axis. The settings are as follows:

No.1874 Number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution

=
No.1875 1,000,000

NOTE
When both parameters Nos. 1874 and 1875 are set to 0, both
parameters are assumed to be 1.

1880 Abnormal load detection alarm timer

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the time from the detection of an abnormal load until a servo alarm is
issued.
When 0 is set, however, the specification of 200 msec is assumed.

1881 Group number when an abnormal load is detected

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the group number on each axis when an abnormal load is detected.
When an abnormal load is detected on an axis, only the movements on those axes that
belong to the same group as the axis are stopped.
If 0 is set for an axis, the movement on the axis is stopped when an abnormal load is
detected on any other axis.
This parameter is valid when bit 5 (ANA) of parameter No. 1804 is set to 1.
[Example] When the settings indicated below are made, and an abnormal load is detected on the 3rd
axis, the movements on the 1st axis, 2nd axis, 3rd axis, and 4th axis are stopped. When an
abnormal load is detected on the 4th axis, the movements on the 2nd axis and the 4th axis
are stopped.
Parameter No. 1881 Setting value
(1st axis) 1
(2nd axis) 0
(3rd axis) 1
(4th axis) 0
(5th axis) 2

1882 Interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
- 105 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Set the interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks.

Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1883 marks) or distance 1 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -999999999 to 999999999

Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1884 marks) or distance 2 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -999 to 999
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the distance from
the scale zero point to reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884).
Distance from the zero point to the reference position of a linear scale
= No. 1884 × 1,000,000,000 + No. 1883
The scale zero point represents a point where mark 1 and mark 2 match. Usually, this
point is a virtual point that does not physically exist on the scale. (See the figure below.)
If the reference position is placed in the + direction when viewed from the scale zero
point, set a positive value. If the reference position is placed in the - direction when
viewed from the scale zero point, set a negative value.
Zero point of encoder Encoder end Reference position

Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2

Mark 1 = mark 2

････

8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8

Parameter No.1821

Parameter No.1882

Parameter No.1884) × 1,000,000,000 + Parameter No.1883

- 106 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Example of parameter settings]
When an encoder as shown below is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine:

Scale zero point + direction Reference position - direction

Ａ Ｂ
Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1

20.00 19.980 9.940 10.060 9.960 10.040 9.980 10.020

0
5.000 20.000mm

-[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000 20.020mm

Parameters No.1821 (interval of mark 1) = 20000

No.1882 (interval of mark 2) = 20020
No.1883 (reference position) = position of point A + 5.000
= distance between A and B/(mark 2 - mark 1) × mark 1+ 5000
= 9960/ (20020 – 20000) × 20000＋5000
= 9965000
= -9965000 (the reference position is on the negative side)

[Setting parameter No. 1883]

When it is difficult to measure the distance from the scale zero point to the reference
position (parameter No. 1883), the method described below can be used to find the
distance.

<1> Set parameter No. 1815 to enable this function.

Set an appropriate value in parameter No. 1821 and No. 1882.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(As a result, the machine coordinate represents the distance from the scale zero point
to the current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameter No. 1883, set the machine coordinate of that time converted to the
detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
<5> If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.

When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point is used, set the distance from the
base point to the reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884. The base point is a
point at a scale end as shown below.
Base point Reference position

Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1

10.020 9.980 10.040 9.960 10.060 9.940

20.000

20.020

- 107 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

If the reference position is located in the positive direction when viewed from the base
point, set a positive value; if the reference position is located in the negative
direction, set a negative value. Set the value by following the steps explained below.
<1> Set bit 1 (OPT) of parameter No. 1815 , bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815, and bit
3 (SDC) of parameter No. 1818 to enable this function.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(Consequently, the machine coordinate value indicates the distance from the base
point to current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884, set the machine coordinate of that time converted
to the detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.

NOTE
1 Set parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884 so that the distance from the
scale zero point (for a linear scale with absolute address reference
marks) or the base point (for a linear scale with an absolute
address zero point) to the reference position is within the range
from -999,999,999,999 to +999,999,999,999. If a value beyond this
range is set, an alarm (PS 5325) is issued.
2 The scale area on the scale cannot be extended across the scale
zero point or base point. Make parameter settings not to cause the
scale area to extend beyond the scale zero point or base point.

1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
For the axis subjected to be torque control by the axis control command of the PCM axis
control function, set the maximum allowable value of the total travel value (error counter
value) during torque control. If the movement integration value exceeds this setting
during torque control, a servo alarm (SV0423) occurs.

NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of
No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).

1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
For the axis subjected to be torque control by the axis control command of the PCM axis
control function, set the positional deviation below which torque control is canceled and
switching to positional control is performed. If the positional deviation is equal to or
less than the setting of this parameter, switching to positional control is performed.

- 108 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of
No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).

1895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a
milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

1898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the
speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.

1899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of
a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1902 ASE FMD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

- 109 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is:

0: Automatic setting mode.
(When bit 0 (DFS) of parameter No. 14476 is 0:
If the relationship between the axis and the amplifier and the like are defined on the
FSSB setting screen, parameters No. 1023, No. 1905, Nos. 1936 and 1937, Nos.
14340 to 14357, and Nos. 14376 to 14391 are automatically set.)
(When bit 0 (DFS) of parameter No. 14476 is 1:
If the relationship between the axis and the amplifier and the like are defined on the
FSSB setting screen, parameters No. 1023, No. 1905, Nos. 1910 to 1919, and Nos.
1936 and 1937 are automatically set.)
1: Manual setting 2 mode.
(When bit 0 (DFS) of parameter No. 14476 is 0:
Manually set parameters No.1023, No.1905, Nos.1936 and 1937, Nos.14340 to
14357, and Nos.14376 to 14391.)
(When bit 0 (DFS) of parameter No. 14476 is 1:
Manually set parameters No.1023, No.1905, Nos.1910 to 1919, and Nos. 1936 and
1937.)

#1 ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit
0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), automatic setting is:
0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automatic setting.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1905 PM2x PM1x FSLx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 FSLx The type of interface used between the servo amplifier and servo software is:
0 : Fast type.
1 : Slow type.
The user can choose between two interface types for servo data transfer: fast type or slow
type. Set this parameter so that the following conditions are satisfied:
- When a one-axis amplifier is used, either the fast type or slow type interface can be
used.
- When a two-axis amplifier is used, the use of the fast type for both axes is not allowed.
The slow type can be used for both axes.
- When a three-axis amplifier is used, the requirement for a two-axes amplifier
described above applies to the first and second axes, and the requirement for a
one-axis amplifier, again described above, applies to the third axis.
- When an odd number is specified for parameter No.1023, the fast type interface must
be used. However, the slow type may be used for high-speed current loop axis and
high-speed interface axis.
- When an even number is specified for parameter No.1023, only the slow type
interface can be used. (The FSL bit must always be set to 1.)

- 110 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

CNC

Controlled Program Servo axis

number
I/F type
axis axis name (No. 1023) Fast/Slow
number (No. 1020)
Two-axis X (Fast)
1 X 1 F amplifier
A (Slow)
2 Y 3 F
Single-axis
Y (Fast)
3 Z 4 S amplifier
Single-axis Z (Slow)
4 A 2 S amplifier

NOTE
When the FSSB setting is compatible with Series 0i-C (parameter
DFS (No.14476#0)=1), set this parameter.

#6 PM1x The first separate detector interface unit is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#7 PM2x The second separate detector interface unit is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when
the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), this parameter is
automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting
screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting
(when the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), this parameter
must be set directly. When a separate detector interface unit is
used, a connector number must be set in the corresponding
parameter (No.1936 or No.1937).

1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)

1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR)

1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR)

1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR)

1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR)

1915 Address conversion table value for slave 6 (ATR)

1916 Address conversion table value for slave 7 (ATR)

1917 Address conversion table value for slave 8 (ATR)

1918 Address conversion table value for slave 9 (ATR)

1919 Address conversion table value for slave 10 (ATR)

- 111 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.

[Input type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 3, 16, 40, 48
These parameters set address conversion table values for slaves 1 to 10.
A slave is the generic name given to a device such as a servo amplifier or separate
detector interface unit, connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. Smaller numbers,
starting from 1 are assigned to slaves closer to the CNC; the maximum number that can
be assigned is 10. A two-axis amplifier has two slaves, while a three-axis amplifier has
three slaves. Set each parameter as described below, depending on whether the slave is an
amplifier or separate detector interface unit, or when no slave exists.

- When the slave is an amplifier:

Set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No.1023 for the
axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
- When the slave is a separate detector interface unit:
Set 16 for the first separate detector interface unit (closest to the CNC).
Set 48 for the second separate detector interface unit (furthest from the CNC).
- When no slave exists
Set 40.

NOTE
1 When using the simple electric gear box (EGB) function
The EGB axis (axis set with parameter No.7771) does not actually
require an amplifier. So, assume that the EGB axis is connected to
a dummy amplifier. Accordingly, as the address conversion table
value for a nonexistent slave, set the value obtained by subtracting
1 from the setting made for parameter No.1023 for the EGB axis,
instead of setting 40.
2 When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when
bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No.1902 is set to 0), parameters No.1910
to No.1919 are automatically set when input is performed with the
FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for
FSSB setting (when bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No.1902 is set to 1),
parameter No.1910 to No.1919 must be directly set.

- 112 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

• Examples of axis configurations and parameter settings

CNC

Controlled Program Servo axis Slave ATR

axis axis name number number No.1910 Axis
number No.1020 No.1023 to 1919
1 X 1
2 Y 3 1-axis
3 Z 4 1 0 X
amplifier
4 A 2
2-axis 2 1 A
amplifier 3 2 Y
M1 4 16 (M1)

1-axis 5 3 Z
amplifier
6 48 (M2)
M2
7 40 (None)
8 40 (None)
9 40 (None)
10 40 (None)

CNC

Controlled Program Servo axis Slave ATR

axis axis number number No.1910 Axis
number name No.1023 to 1919
1 X 1
2 Y 3 1-axis
1 0 X
3 Z 4 amplifier
4 A 2
2-axis 2 2 Y
amplifier 3 3 Z
1-axis 4 1 A
amplifier

M1 5 16 (M1)

M2 6 48 (M2)
7 40 (None)
8 40 (None)
9 40 (None)
10 40 (None)

M1/M2: First separate detector interface unit/second separate detector interface unit

1936 Connector number of the first separate detector interface unit

1937 Connector number of the second separate detector interface unit

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 7

- 113 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the connector number corresponding to the connector connected
when using the separator detector interface unit set by bits 6 and 7 of parameter No. 1905
minus 1. That is, set 0 to 7 for connector numbers 1 to 8, respectively. Set 0 for the
axis for which the separator detector interface unit is not used.
Use successive numbers for one separator detector interface unit. Do not omit a
intermediate number.

[Example]
Connector Connector
number for the number for the PM2x, PM1x
Controlle
first separate second separate No.1936 No.1937 (No.1905#7,
d axis
detector interface detector interface #6)
unit unit
X 1 Not used 0 0 0, 1
Y Not used 2 0 1 1, 0
Z Not used 1 0 0 1, 0
A Not used Not used 0 0 0, 0

NOTE
When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), these parameters are
automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting
screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting
(when the parameter FMD is set to 1), these parameters must be set
directly.

Parameters No.2000 to 2999 are for digital servo, The following parameters are not explained in this
manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN)

No. Data type Contents

2000 Bit axis PGEX DGPR PLC0
2001 Bit axis AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0
2002 Bit axis PFSE
2003 Bit axis VOFS OVSC BLEN NPSP PIEN OBEN TGAL
2004 Bit axis TRW1 TRW0 TIB0 TIA0
2005 Bit axis SFCM BRKC FEED
2006 Bit axis FCBL
2007 Bit axis FRCA IGNV ESP2
2008 Bit axis LAXD VFBA TNDM
2009 Bit axis BLST BLCU SERD
2010 Bit axis POLE HBBL HBPE BLTE LINE
2011 Bit axis RCCA FFAL EGB
2012 Bit axis STNG MSFE
2013 Bit axis APTG HRV3
2014 Bit axis
2015 Bit axis BZNG BLAT SSG1 PGTW
2016 Bit axis PK2VDN ABNT
2017 Bit axis PK2V25 HTNG DBST
2018 Bit axis PFBCPY OVR8 MOVOBS RVRSE
2019 Bit axis DPFB SLEN INVSYS LBUFEX TANDMP
2020 Word axis Motor number
2021 Word axis Load inertia ratio
2022 Word axis Direction of motor rotation
2023 Word axis Number of velocity pulses

- 114 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

No. Data type Contents

2024 Word axis Number of position pulses
2028 Word axis Position gain switching speed
2029 Word axis Effective speed for integral acceleration at low speed
2030 Word axis Effective speed for integral deceleration at low speed
2031 Word axis Torque command difference threshold of torque difference alarm
2033 Word axis Number of position feedback pulses for damping control
2034 Word axis Damping control gain
2036 Word axis Damping compensation gain (main axis) and damping compensation phase coefficient
(sub-axis) for tandem control
2039 Word axis Second-stage acceleration for two-stage backlash acceleration
2040 Word axis Current loop integral gain (PK1)
2041 Word axis Current loop proportional gain (PK2)
2042 Word axis Current loop gain (PK3)
2043 Word axis Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V)
2044 Word axis Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V)
2045 Word axis Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V)
2046 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK4V)
2047 Word axis Observer parameter (POA1)
2048 Word axis Backlash acceleration
2049 Word axis Maximum amplitude for dual position feedback
2050 Word axis Observer parameter (POK1)
2051 Word axis Observer parameter (POK2)
2053 Word axis Current dead-band compensation (PPMAX)
2054 Word axis Current dead-band compensation (PDDP)
2055 Word axis Current dead-band compensation (PHYST)
2056 Word axis Variable current gain during deceleration
2057 Word axis Phase-D current at high speed
2058 Word axis Phase-D current limit at high speed
2060 Word axis Torque limit
2062 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)
2063 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)
2064 Word axis Soft disconnection alarm level
2065 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT)
2066 Word axis Acceleration feedback gain
2067 Word axis Torque command filter
2068 Word axis Feed forward coefficient
2069 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient
2070 Word axis Backlash acceleration timing
2071 Word axis Backlash acceleration effective duration, number of times static friction compensation is
performed
2072 Word axis Static friction compensation
2073 Word axis Parameter for determining stop of static friction compensation
2074 Word axis Current-dependent current loop gain
2077 Word axis Overshoot compensation counter
2078 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (numerator)
2079 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (denominator)
2080 Word axis First-order lag time constant for dual position feedback
2081 Word axis Zero width for dual position feedback
2082 Word axis Backlash acceleration stop amount
2083 Word axis Brake control timer (ms)
2084 Word axis Flexible feed gear (numerator)
2085 Word axis Flexible feed gear (denominator)
2086 Word axis Rated current parameter
2087 Word axis Torque offset
2088 Word axis Machine velocity feedback coefficient gain
- 115 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

No. Data type Contents

2089 Word axis Second-stage end magnification for two-stage backlash acceleration
2092 Word axis Advanced preview feed forward coefficient
2094 Word axis Single-direction backlash acceleration amount
2095 Word axis Feed-forward timing adjustment coefficient
2097 Word axis Static friction compensation stop parameter
2099 Word axis N-pulse suppression level
2101 Word axis Overshoot compensation effective level
2102 Word axis Final clamp value for actual current limit
2103 Word axis Amount of track back upon detection of unexpected disturbance torque
2104 Word axis Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm level (for cutting when switching is used)
2105 Word axis Torque constant for torque control
2107 Word axis Velocity loop gain override during cutting
2110 Word axis Magnetic saturation compensation (base/coefficient)
2111 Word axis Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient)
2112 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 1
2113 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 1 : Attenuation center frequency
2114 Word axis Acceleration amount override for backlash acceleration
2116 Word axis Unexpected disturbance torque detection, dynamic friction compensation value
2118 Word axis Excessive error level between semi-closed and closed loops for dual position feedback
2119 Word axis Stop level with variable proportional gain
2126 Word axis Tandem control, time constant for switching position feedback
2127 Word axis Non-interacting control coefficient
2128 Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient)
2129 Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit)
2130 Word axis Two smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair
2131 Word axis Four smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair
2132 Word axis Six smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair
2133 Word axis Deceleration phase delay compensation coefficient (PHDLY1)
2134 Word axis Deceleration phase delay compensation coefficient (PHDLY2)
2137 Word axis Stage 1 acceleration amount override for two-stage backlash acceleration
2138 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 2
2139 Word axis AMR offset
2142 Word axis Alarm level for detecting abnormal load during rapid traverse
2144 Word axis Position feed forward coefficient for cutting
2145 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient for cutting
2146 Word axis Two-stage backlash acceleration end timer
2156 Word axis Torque command filter (during rapid traverse)
2161 Word axis OVC magnification at stop time (OVCSTP)
2162 Word axis Second overload protection coefficient (POVC21)
2163 Word axis Second overload protection coefficient (POVC22)
2164 Word axis Second overload protection coefficient (POVCLMT2)
2165 Word axis Maximum amplifier current
2167 Word axis Stage 2 acceleration amount offset for two-stage backlash acceleration
2177 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 1 : Attenuation band width
2179 Word axis Reference counter capacity (denominator)
2185 Word axis Position pulse conversion coefficient
2200 Bit axis P2EX ABGO IQOB OVSP
2201 Bit axis CPEE RNLV CROF
2202 Bit axis DUAL OVS1 PIAL VGCCR
2203 Bit axis FRC2AX2 CRPI
2204 Bit axis DBS2 PGTWN2 HSTP10
2205 Bit axis HDIS HD2O FULDMY
2206 Bit axis HBSF
2207 Bit axis PK2D50

- 116 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

No. Data type Contents

2210 Bit axis ESPTM1 ESPTM0 PK12S2
2211 Bit axis PHCP
2212 Bit axis QVCK
2213 Bit axis MGPOS
2214 Bit axis FFCHG
2215 Bit axis ABT2 TCPCLR
2220 Bit axis DECAMR
2223 Bit axis BLCUT2 DISOBS
2226 Bit axis MEMCLR PRFCLR QUCKST
2227 Bit axis ANGLNG ANGREF GOKAN ERRCHK PARTLN
2229 Bit axis TAWAMI STPRED ABSEN
2270 Bit axis DSTIN DSTTAN DSTWAV ACREF AMR60
2271 Bit axis RETR2
2273 Bit axis DBTLIM EGBFFG EGBEX POA1NG WSVCPY
2274 Bit axis HP2048
2275 Bit axis RCNCLR 800PLS
2282 Bit axis ISE64
2283 Bit axis NOG54
2300 Bit axis CKLNOH DD HRVEN
2318 Word axis Gain of disturbance elimination filter
2319 Word axis Inertia ratio of disturbance elimination filter
2320 Word axis Inverse function gain of disturbance elimination filter
2321 Word axis Filter time constant of disturbance elimination filter
2322 Word axis Acceleration feedback limit of disturbance elimination filter
2323 Word axis Variable current PI ratio
2324 Word axis Optional magnification at stop of cutting for stop-time variable proportional gain function
2325 Word axis Integral gain (main axis) and phase coefficient (sub-axis) for tandem damping control
2326 Word axis Disturbance input gain
2327 Word axis Start frequency of disturbance input
2328 Word axis End frequency of disturbance input
2329 Word axis Number of disturbance input measurement points
2333 Word axis Incomplete integral gain (main axis) for tandem camping control
2334 Word axis Current loop gain magnification (valid only during high-speed HRV current control)
2335 Word axis Velocity loop gain magnification (valid only during high-speed HRV current control)
Limit of acceleration amount for backlash acceleration
2338 Word axis
Second-stage acceleration limit for two-stage backlash acceleration
2339 Word axis Second-stage acceleration amount (single direction) for two-stage backlash acceleration
Acceleration amount override (single direction) for backlash acceleration
2340 Word axis
Second-stage acceleration override (single direction) for two-stage backlash acceleration
Limit of acceleration amount (single direction) for backlash acceleration
2341 Word axis
Second-stage acceleration limit (single direction) for two-stage backlash acceleration
2345 Word axis Dynamic friction compensation amount at stop for disturbance estimation function
2346 Word axis Limit of dynamic friction compensation amount for disturbance estimation function
2347 Word axis Static friction compensation amount (single direction)
2352 Word axis Active damping filter detection level
2359 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 1 : Damping
2360 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 2 : Attenuation center frequency
2361 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 2 : Attenuation band width
2362 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 2 : Damping
2363 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 3 : Attenuation center frequency
2364 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 3 : Attenuation band width
2365 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 3 : Damping
2366 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 4 : Attenuation center frequency
2367 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 4 : Attenuation band width
2368 Word axis Resonance elimination filter 4 : Damping
- 117 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

No. Data type Contents

2369 Word axis Two smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair (single direction)
2370 Word axis Four smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair (single direction)
2371 Word axis Six smooth compensations per magnetic pole pair (single direction)
2373 Word axis Pull-up amount for vertical axis pull-up function for emergency stop
2374 Word axis Pull-up time for vertical axis pull-up function for emergency stop
2375 Word axis Torque limit magnification during brake control
2394 Word axis Number of data mask digits
2415 Bit axis IAHDON
2455 Word axis Integral part (α) of the number of pulses for one rotation
2456 Word axis Exponential part (β) of the number of pulses for one rotation

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2008 VFAx TDMx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#1 TDMx This bit is automatically set to 1 when bit 6 (tandem axis) of parameter No. 1817 is set to
1.
This bit cannot be directly set.

#2 VFAx In tandem control, the feedrate feedback average function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
XIAx
2011
XIAx SYNx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SYNx When the electronic gear box function (EGB) (M series) is used, this bit sets the axis to
be synchronized.
0: Axis not synchronized by EGB
1: Axis synchronized by EGB
Set 1 for both of the slave and dummy axes of EGB.

NOTE
The setting of this parameter becomes valid after the power is
turned off then back on.

#7 XIAx Temporary absolute coordinate setting is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

- 118 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 When temporary absolute coordinate setting is used, bit 1 (OPTx)
of parameter No. 1815, bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No. 1815,
parameter No. 1874, and parameter No. 1875 must be set.
2 The setting of this parameter becomes effective after the power is
turned off then back on.

2021 Load inertia ratio

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
(Load inertia)/(motor inertia) × 256

For tandem control:

(Load inertia)/(motor inertia) × 256/2
Set the same value for the master axis and slave axis.

2022 Direction of motor rotation

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] -111,111
Set the direction of motor rotation.
If the motor turns clockwise when viewed from the pulse coder side, set 111. If the motor
turns counterclockwise when viewed from the pulse coder side, set -111.

Turned Turned clockwise when

counterclockwise when FANUC viewed from the pulse
viewed from the pulse coder: Set 111.
coder: Set -111.

2031 Torque command difference threshold of torque difference alarm

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 14564
If the absolute value of the torque command difference between two axes exceeds the
value set in this parameter, an alarm is issued.
Set the same value for two axes that are placed under axis synchronous control.
The servo axis numbers of the synchronized master axis and slave axis must be assigned
so that an odd number is assigned to the master axis and the next axis number is assigned
to the slave axis. Examples are (1,2) and (3,4).

- 119 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

2087 Preload value for each axis (Tcmd offset)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] (Ampere limit)/7282
[Valid data range] -1821 to 1821
An offset is applied to a torque command to suppress backlash.
Set a value much greater than the friction.
As a guideline, specify a value that is about one-third of the rated torque.

[Example] To set a torque equivalent to 3 A in the opposite directions:

When the ampere limit is 40 A
3/(40/7282) = 546
Master side = 546
Slave side = -546

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2282 ISE64x

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#3 ISE64x To feed forward (bit 1 (FEED) of parameter No. 2005 is set to 1):
0: Normal feedrate limits are applied.
1: Extended feedrate limits are applied.
When feed forward is enabled, bit 7 of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, and this parameter
is set for an axis, feedrate limits for the axis are extended as follows if the increment
system is IS-C, IS-D, or IS-E:

[Normal position control]

Functions used when Normal position control is used Permissible feedrate
Detection unit: Detection unit:
High-speed, high-precision Feed forward
1μｍ 0.1μｍ
Not used/used (advanced
None
preview type)
advanced preview control IS-B:999m/min IS-B:196m/min
AI advanced preview control Not used/used (advanced IS-C:999m/min IS-C:999m/min
AI contour control I preview type)
AI contour control II
IS-B:240m/min
Electric gear box Used (conventional type) 24m/min
IS-C:100m/min

[When spindle control with servo motor is used]

Functions used when Normal position control is used Permissible feedrate
Feedrate limit Detection unit: Detection unit:
Extended permissible feedrate
multiplied by 10 1/1000deg 1/10000deg
Disabled IS-B:2777min-1 IS-B:2777min-1
-1
Disabled (No.1408#3=0) IS-C: 277min IS-C: 277min-1
(No.1013#7=0) Enabled IS-B:27777min-1 IS-B:27777min-1
-1
(No.1408#3=1) IS-C: 2777min IS-C: 2777min-1
-1
Enabled Disabled IS-B:2777min IS-B:2777min-1
-1
(No.1408#3=0) IS-C: 277min IS-C: 277min-1
(No.1013#7=1) -1
Enabled IS-B:27777min IS-B:27777min-1
(No.2282#3=1) -1
(No.1408#3=1) IS-C: 27777min IS-C: 2777min-1

- 120 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(*1) The values enclosed by a rectangle in the table are limits imposed by internal
processing of the servo software. As CMR is increased to make the detection unit
smaller, the permissible feedrate limited by the internal processing of the servo
software lowers in proportion to the detection unit (when a detection unit of 0.1 μm
is changed to 0.05μm, the permissible feedrate is halved).
(*2) In a semi-closed loop system using a high-resolution detector (a rotary motor or
linear motor), use of nano interpolation allows the maximum resolution of the
detector to be used for position control without using a smaller detection unit.
(*3) Even when a large detection unit is to be used because the feedrate is limited by
detection unit as mentioned above, feedrate feedback data that significantly affects
velocity loop control is controlled by using a maximum resolution of the detector.

- 121 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.17 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI RWM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 RWM While a program in the program memory is being searched for, the rewind signal (RWD)
is:
0: Not output.
1: Output.

#7 MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B

0: Normal
1: High-speed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV MFD CHM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CHM For high-speed M/S/T/B, the distribution end signal DEN <Fn001.3> and an auxiliary
function code signal M00 to M31 <Fn010 to Fn013> are:
0: Not turned off even upon completion of the execution of the auxiliary function.
1: Turned off upon completion of the execution of the auxiliary function.

#2 MFD When the high-speed M/S/T/B interface is used, if a block specifying an M, S, T, or B

code does not contain a move command or dwell command, the distribution end signal
(DEN) and the strobe signal (MF, SF, TF, or BF) for the function are:
0: Output conventionally (the output of the distribution end signal is delayed).
1: Output at the same time.

#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.
Signal of negative logic:
• Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<Gn012>
• Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<Gn151/Gn163/Gn175/Gn187>
• Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<Fn078>
Signals of positive logic:
• Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<Gn014.0, 1>
• Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<Fn076.4, >
• Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g<Gn150.0, 1, Gn162.0, 1, Gn174.0, 1, Gn186.0, 1>

- 122 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MVG DEC DAU DIT ITX ITL
3003
DEC DIT ITX ITL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ITL Interlock signal for all axes

0: Enabled
1: Disabled

#2 ITX Interlock signals for each axis

0: Enabled
1: Disabled

#3 DIT The interlock signal for each axis direction is:

0: Valid.
1: Invalid.

#4 DAU When bit 3 (DIT) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 0, the interlock signal for each axis
direction is:
0: Valid only in manual operation, and invalid in automatic operation.
1: Valid in either manual operation or automatic operation.

#5 DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC5) for reference position return

0: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.

#7 MVG During drawing with the dynamic graphic display function, the axis movement signal is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3004 OTH BCY BSL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 BSL The block start interlock signal (*BSL) and cutting block start interlock signal (*CSL)
are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 BCY When more than one operation is performed by one block command such as a canned
cycle, the block start interlock signal (*BSL) is:
0: Checked only at the beginning of the first cycle.
1: Checked at the beginning of every cycle.

#5 OTH The overtravel limit signal is:

0: Checked
1: Not checked

WARNING
For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel limit signal.
- 123 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3006 WPS EP2 EPS EPN GDC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 GDC As the deceleration signal for reference position return:

0: X0009(for PATH1) and X0007(for PATH2) are used.
1: Gn196 are used. (X0009 and X0007 are disabled.)

#1 EPN In external workpiece number search, signals for workpiece number specification are
selected.
The following signal selections are made by combining this parameter with bit 3 (EP2) of
parameter No. 3006:
EPN Signals
The external workpiece search signals (PN1 to PN16) are used. (A number from 1
0 to 31 can be specified.)
The extended external workpiece number search signals (EPN0 to EPN13) are
1 used. (A number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.)

#2 EPS As the signal for starting external workpiece number search:

0: The automatic operation start signal ST is used. When automatic operation (memory
operation) is started, a search is made.
1: The external workpiece number search start signal EPNS is used. ST does not start a
search.

#6 WPS Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:

0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014,
No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are
not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is
assigned to bit 0 of X0000. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are
not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the
measurement position arrival signal, the interlock signal for each
axis direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to X0000.
- 124 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B
codes are sent, respectively.

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF signal

Delay time

NOTE
When bit 7 (MHI) of parameter No.3000 is 0,
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.
When bit 7 (MHI) of parameter No.3000 is 1,
When 0 is set, 0 ms is assumed.
When 1 to 8 is set, 8 ms is assumed.

3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal
(FIN).

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF signal

FIN sigal

Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width

- 125 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 0 is set, 8 ms is assumed.

3012 Skip signal assignment address

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 327
Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
The X addresses that can be actually used are shown below, but
they depend on the configuration of I/O Link point count expansion
options.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327

3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 327
Set an address to which the deceleration signal (*DECn) for reference position return for
each axis is to be assigned.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
The X addresses that can be actually used are shown below, but
they depend on the configuration of I/O Link point count expansion
options.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327

- 126 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
3014 Bit position of an X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
Set a bit position to which the deceleration signal for reference position return (*DECn)
for each axis is to be assigned.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.

3017 Output time of reset signal RST

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] 16msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
When the output time of the reset signal RST is to be extended, set an extended time.
(RST signal output time) =
(Time required for reset processing) + (Parameter setting) × 16 msec

Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and the measurement position arrival signal are
3019
assigned

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 327
Sets addresses to which X address PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement
position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series); XAE1 and XAE2 (T
series)), and tool compensation write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are allocated.

Example 1. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6

When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)

- 127 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X006 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)

Example 2. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5

When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1
X005 SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
The X addresses that can be actually used are shown below, but
they depend on the configuration of I/O Link point count expansion
options.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327

3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code

3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 8
Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.

NOTE
Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code.

3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 8
Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 must be set
to 1. In this case, the allowable number of digits set in this parameter includes the number
of decimal places.
If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the alarm (PS0003) is
issued.

- 128 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.18 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (1 OF 6)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SBA KBF
3101
KBF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 KBF When the screen or mode is changed, the contents of the key-in buffer are:
0: Cleared.
1: Not cleared.

#7 SBA In 2-path control, the current position display order on the current position display screen
is:
0: Path 1 followed by path 2.
1: Path 2 followed by path 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DIP
3103

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 DIP In 2-path control, the current position display screen displays:

0: Two paths regardless of path selection signal HEAD<G0063.0>.
1: The path selected by path selection signal HEAD<G0063.0>.

NOTE
It is necessary to set bit 4 (9DE) of parameter No.11350 to 1 in
order to display the current position for 2-path on one screen with
8.4” display unit.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAC DRC PPD MCN
3104
DAC DAL DRC DRL PPD MCN

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MCN Machine position

0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is
displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.
1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when
input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.

#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set

0: Not preset
1: Preset

- 129 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative
position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
(1) Manual reference position return
(2) Coordinate system setting based on G92 (G50 for G code
system A on the lathe system)
(3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1
(G50.3 for G code system A on the lath system)
(4) When a T code for the T series is executed. (Bit 5 of parameter
No.3129 is 1)

#4 DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

NOTE
In the T series, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying the
relative position is determined by the setting of bit 0 (DRP) of
parameter No. 3129.

#5 DRC When relative positions are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.

#6 DAL Absolute position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.

NOTE
In T series, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying the
absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No. 3129.

#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 DPS PCF DPF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DPF The actual speed is:

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

- 130 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the actual speed display
0: Added
1: Not added

#2 DPS The actual spindle speed and T code are:

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAK SOV OPH GPL DHD
3106
DAK SOV OPH GPL

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 DHD On the program screen:

0: Only a selected path can be edited and displayed.
1: 2-path can be edited and displayed at the same time.

#1 GPL Displaying and output a program list for a specified group is

0: invalid.
1: Valid.

#4 OPH The operation history screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#5 SOV A spindle override value is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No.
3105 is set o 1.

#6 DAK Specifies whether to display coordinates in the program coordinate system or workpiece
coordinate system as absolute coordinates when the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode or the tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
0: Display coordinates in the program coordinate system.
1: Display coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 MDL SOR GSC

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 GSC The feedrate to be displayed is:

0: Feedrate per minute.
1: Determined by bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191.

#4 SOR Display of the program directory

0: Programs are listed in the order of registration.
1: Programs are listed in the order of name.
- 131 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 MDL The modal information on the program screen for MDI operation of the 8.4” display unit
is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3108 JSP SLM WCI PCT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 PCT For modal T display on the program check screen:

0: A specified T value is displayed.
1: HD.T and NX.T are displayed.

#4 WCI On the workpiece coordinate system screen, a counter input is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#6 SLM The spindle load meter is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No.
3105 is set to 1.
2 This parameter is valid only for serial spindles.

#7 JSP On the current position display screen and program check screen, jog feed is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
In manual operation mode, the jog feedrate of the 1st axis is displayed. In automatic
operation mode, the dry run feedrate is displayed. In each case, the feedrate to which a
manual feedrate override has been applied is displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109 IKY DWT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount

0: The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1: The characters are not displayed.

#2 IKY On the tool offset screen and workpiece shift screen (T series), soft key [INPUT] is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 NPA OPS OPM SVP SPS SVS

[Input type] Setting input

- 132 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Bit path

#0 SVS The soft key for displaying the servo setting screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#1 SPS The soft key for displaying the spindle setting screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#2 SVP Spindle synchronization errors displayed on the spindle tuning screen

0: Instantaneous values are displayed.
1: Peak-hold values are displayed.
Spindle synchronization errors are displayed on the side of the spindle that functions as a
slave axis in spindle synchronization control.

#5 OPM Operating monitor

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

#6 OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen indicates:

0: Spindle motor speed
1: Spindle speed

#7 NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered
0: The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1: The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.

NOTE
When MANUAL GUIDE i is provided, bit 7 (NPA) of parameter No.
3111 must be set to 0. (If this bit is set to 1, a warning message
appears at power-on.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH OMH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#3 EAH Messages of the external alarm/macro alarm in alarm or operation history:

0: Not recorded
1: Recorded

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is
set to 0.

- 133 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 DCL HMC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history:

0: Cannot be erased.
1: Can be erased.

#5 DCL The touch panel compensation screen is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter to 0 usually. Touch panel compensation becomes necessary only when
the panel is replaced or memory all clear operation is performed. Set this parameter to 1
only when performing touch panel compensation. Upon completion of compensation, set
this parameter to 0.

#6 MS0
#7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be
preserved in the external operator message history.

Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages

MS1=0 MS0=0 255 8
MS1=0 MS0=1 200 10
MS1=1 MS0=0 100 18
MS1=1 MS0=1 50 32

NOTE
1 Although up to 255 characters can be specified for each external
operator message, you can use the combination of bits 6 (MS0)
and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 to limit the number of
characters and select the number of messages to be preserved in
the external operator message history.
2 The settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113
take effect the next time the power is turned on. The external
operator message history is erased at that time.
3 Even though you change the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1)
of parameter No. 3113, the alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE
OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again
before the new settings can take effect.
4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered
in character code, the number of characters recorded in the
external operator message history may be smaller than the
maximum number of characters set by bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of
parameter No. 3113.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3114 ICU IGR IMS ISY IOF IPR IPO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 134 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#0 IPO When the function key is pressed while the position display screen is being
displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#1 IPR When the function key is pressed while the program screen is being displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#2 IOF When the function key is pressed while the offset/setting screen is being
displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#3 ISY When the function key is pressed while the system screen is being displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#4 IMS When the function key is pressed while the message screen is being displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#5 IGR When the function key is pressed while the custom or graphic screen is being
displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#6 ICU When the function key is pressed while the custom screen is being displayed:
0: The screen is changed.
1: The screen is not changed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDFx NDAx NDPx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 NDPx The current position is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
When using the electric gear box (EGB) function (M series), set 1
for the EGB dummy axis to disable current position display.

#1 NDAx The current position and the amount of the movement to be made in absolute and relative
coordinates are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 135 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 NDFx In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a selected axis is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3116 MDC T8D PWR

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 PWR Alarm SW0100 (parameter write enabled) is cleared by:

0: "CAN" + "RESET".
1: "RESET" or turning on the external reset.

#6 T8D T code is displayed in the lower right area on screen at:

0: 4 digits.
1: 8 digits.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No.3105 is
1.

#7 MDC Maintenance information data:

0: Cannot be erased entirely.
1: Can be erased entirely.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3117 SPP SMS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SMS On the program check screen of the 8.4” display unit, the function for displaying the
spindle load meter and spindle speed meter in the remaining movement amount display
position and modal information display position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 SPP When a serial spindle is used, the position coder signal pulse data based on the
one-rotation signal is:
0: Not displayed on diagnosis screen No. 445.
1: Displayed on diagnosis screen No. 445.

- 136 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 For a spindle not connected, 0 is indicated.
2 To display this data, the following conditions must be met:
<1> FANUC's α spindle amplifier and serial spindle are used.
<2> The serial spindle detects the one-rotation signal.

To detect the one-rotation signal accurately, spindle orientation

must be performed. This operation must be performed just once
after the power is turned on and is not needed subsequently.
To determine whether the one-rotation signal has been detected or
not, check the serial spindle status signals (PC1DEA to PC1DED).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 TPA DDS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#2 DDS The touch panel is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily, for example, at
start-up time.

#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface is selected, the external touch
panel interface connection is:
0: Valid.
1: Invalid.

For an external touch panel (called ETP hereinafter), the RS-232C serial port 2 ((JD36A
or JD54) on the main board of the CNC is used.
When using ETP, set bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119 to 0.
By this setting, JD36A or JD54 is used for ETP, regardless of the setting of I/O
CHANNEL（I/O device selection）of the existing parameters Nos. 0021 through 0023.
For other I/O devices, use JD56A and so forth.
By the setting above, the settings of the existing parameters Nos. 0100 and 0121 through
0123 become invalid for channel 2 (JD36A or JD54), and the following settings are
applied at all times:
- Baud rate : 19200 bps
- Stop bit : 1 bit
- Parity check : Even parity

3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 1440

- 137 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When history data is recorded within a set time period, the time for each set time period is
recorded in the history data.
When 0 is set, the specification of a time period of 10 minutes is assumed.

NOTE
It is necessary to set the same value in this parameter with both
paths for 2-path system.

3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
After a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123 passes without key operation, the NC
screen is erased automatically. Pressing a key causes the NC screen to reappear.

NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.
If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen
erasure is disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3124 D08 D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3125 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3126 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3127 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

D01 to D32
Set a group of G codes to be displayed on the program check screen.
The table below indicates the correspondence between bits and G code groups.
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Displays the G code group corresponding to a bit.
1: Does not display the G code group corresponding to a bit.

Parameter G code group

D01 01
D02 02
D03 03
: :
D32 32

- 138 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
3128 Retracement time for deleting alarm data from the alarm history

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
From the alarm history, the alarm data that occurred during a set period of time back from
the power-off time is deleted.
When 0 is set, a retracement time of 1 second is assumed to be specified.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RPC RPP MRE DAP DRP
3129
RPP MRE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DRP For relative position display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

NOTE
In the M series, whether to exclude tool length compensation when
displaying the relative position is determined by bit 4 (DRL) of
parameter No. 3104.

#1 DAP For absolute position display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.

NOTE
In M series, whether to exclude the tool length offset when
displaying the absolute position is determined according to the
setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104.

#2 MRE When mirror image is used, relative coordinates are:

0: Updated with respect to the machine coordinates.
1: Updated with respect to the absolute coordinates.

Set this parameter to 1 when handling relative coordinates in the same way as for the T
series of the FS0i-C.

#4 RPP To the value of the preset(or origin) of relative coordinates, the difference below the
least input increment between absolute coordinate point and relative coordinate point is:
0: Not corrected.
1: Corrected.

#5 RPC When a T code is executed on condition that the parameter PPD (Bit 3 of parameter
No.3104) is 1,
0: The differences between new tool offset and old tool offset are added to relative
coordinates.
1: Relative coordinates are preset to the same value as the absolute coordinates.
(FS0i-C compatible specification)

- 139 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

3130 Axis display order for current position display screens

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the order in which axes are displayed on current position display screens (absolute,
relative overall, and handle interrupt screens).

3131 Subscript of axis name

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 9, 32, 65 to 90
In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation, synchronization control, and tandem
control, specify a subscript for each axis name.

Setting value Meaning

Each axis is set as an axis other than a synchronization control axis and
0
tandem control axis.
1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.

[Example] When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as indicated below.

Setting value Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position display screen
0 X
1 X1
77 XM
83 XS

When the subscription of an axis name is not set in a 2-path system, the subscription of an
axis name is automatically set to the path number. To hide the subscription of an axis
name, set the parameter of the subscription of an axis name to the ASCII code (32) of a
space.

3132 Axis name (absolute coordinate) for current position display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
These parameters set the axis name for current position display.
When G code system B or C is used, the axis name set in parameter No.3132 is used for
both absolute and relative coordinate axes.
The values set in these parameters are used only for display.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No. 1020 is used.

3133 Axis name (relative coordinate) for current position display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
These parameters set the axis name for current position display.
When G code system B or C is used, the axis name set in parameter No.3132 is used for
both absolute and relative coordinate axes.
The values set in these parameters are used only for display.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No. 1020 is used.
- 140 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Data display order of each axis on the workpiece coordinate system setting screen and workpiece
3134
coordinate system shift amount setting screen

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the data display order of each axis on the workpiece coordinate system setting screen
(M series/T series) and workpiece coordinate system shift amount setting screen (T
series).
No data is displayed for an axis with 0 set in this parameter.

3135 Number of decimal places in actual feedrate display

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Set the number of decimal places in actual feedrate display.
In the case of inch input, the number of decimal places is a set value plus 2.

Setting value
0 : Metric input Displayed without a decimal point
Inch input Displayed using the second decimal place
1 : Metric input Displayed using the first decimal place
Inch input Displayed using the third decimal place
2 : Metric input Displayed using the second decimal place
Inch input Displayed using the fourth decimal place
3 : Metric input Displayed using the third decimal place
Inch input Displayed using the fifth decimal place

3141 Path name (1st character)

3142 Path name (2nd character)

3143 Path name (3rd character)

3144 Path name (4th character)

3145 Path name (5th character)

3146 Path name (6th character)

3147 Path name (7th character)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series
name.

When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, the path name is displayed according to the
following table.

- 141 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Language to Language to
Path name Path name
display in CNC display in CNC
English HEAD1 (HEAD2) Portuguese CABEC.1 (CABEC.2))
Japanese 刃物台 1 (刃物台 2) Polish GLOWIC1 (GLOWIC2)
German KANAL1 (KANAL2) Hungarian FEJ1 (FEJ2)
French TETE1 (TETE2) Swedish HUVUD1 (HUVUD2)
Traditional HEAD1 (HEAD2) Czech KANAL1 (KANAL2)
Chinese
Simplified Chinese 路径 1 (路径 2) Russian ПУТЬ1 (ПУТЬ2)
Italian TEST1 (TEST2) Turkish HEAD1 (HEAD2)
Korean HEAD1 (HEAD2) Bulgarian ГЛВА1 (ГЛВА2)
Spanish CAB.1 (CAB.2) Romanian CAP1 (CAP2)
Dutch KAN.1 (KAN.2) Finnish ALKU1(ALKU2)
Danish HOVED1 (HOVED2)

NOTE
For characters and codes, see Appendix A, “CHARACTER CODE
LIST”.

3160 Setting of MDI unit type

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
Set the type of an MDI unit when the type of an MDI unit is not automatically identified.

Setting value Type

0 Depends on the system type and indicator type.
1 Standard MDI unit for the T series (lathe system)
2 Standard MDI unit for the M series (machining center system)
3 Small MDI unit for the T series (lathe system)
4 Small MDI unit for the M series (machining center system)

When 0 is set in this parameter, the type of a MDI unit is determined as follows:
Type of path control Type of indicator Type
Standard MDI unit for the T
Type of 12 horizontal soft keys
series (lathe system)
T series
Small MDI unit for the T series
Type of 7 horizontal soft keys
(lathe system)
Standard MDI unit for the M
Type of 12 horizontal soft keys
series (machining center system)
M series
Small MDI unit for the M series
Type of 7 horizontal soft keys
(machining center system)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FSS SSF
3191
FSS SSF WSI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 WSI On the workpiece zero point offset screen, the soft key [INPUT] is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

- 142 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#3 SSF On the setting screen, the soft key for confirming data input is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#5 FSS Feedrate per minute and feedrate per revolution are:

0: Switched depends on the operation state.
1: Not switched depending on the operation state and feedrate per revolution is always
used.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No. 3107 is
1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PLD TRA T2P
3192
TRA T2P

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 T2P When more than one point is pressed on the touch panel:
0: The position at the center of gravity is obtained.
1: The point pressed first is obtained.

NOTE
1 Even when bit parameter T2P is set to 1, the position at the center
of gravity is assumed to be pressed if two or more points are
pressed within a scan period (32 ms) of the touch panel.
2 If a C executer application or the like has a touch panel drag (move
in pressed state) function, set parameter T2P to 0.

#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is kept pressed for a time specified in parameter No. 3197 or
longer,
0: An alarm is not raised.
1: An alarm (SR5303), “TOUCH PANEL ERROR” is raised.

NOTE
If an C executer application or the like has a touch panel repeat
(continue pressing) function, set parameter TRA to 0.

#7 PLD On the screen of the 10.4” display unit where positional display is performed on the left
half, the function for displaying the servo axis load meter and spindle load meter is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Parameters No.13140 and 13141 can be used to display up to two characters for the name
of each spindle. If this parameter is not set (this parameter is 0), the following names
are used.
First spindle : S1
Second spindle : S2
Third spindle : S3

- 143 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DOP
3193

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle
interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information
is:
0: Displayed at the same time.
1: Not displayed at the same time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3195 EKE HDE HKE CPR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Common to the bit system

#2 CPR Displaying of the parameter setting support screen by function key [SYSTEM] is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#5 HKE A key operation history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.

#6 HDE A DI/DO history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.

#7 EKE The contents of operation history and alarm history

0: cannot be deleted.
1: can be deleted.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HAL HOM HMV HPM HWO HTO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 HTO A modification history of tool offset data is:

0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.

#1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset

data/workpiece shift (T series) is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.

#2 HPM A modification history of parameters is:

0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.

- 144 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#3 HMV A modification history of custom macro common variables is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.

#6 HOM The operation history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.

#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and
machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is:
0: Recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
1: Not recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
To record as many alarm history items as possible, rather than detailed alarm information,
set 1.

3197 Detection time of continuous pressing on touch panel

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Set a period of continuous pressing on the touch panel which causes alarm to be raised.
When 0 is set, it is equivalent to 20.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is
set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control

0: The new program is registered following the programs already registered.
1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that
programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted.

#1 RAL When programs are registered by external I/O device control:

0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.

#2 REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that
of an existing program
0: Warning is generated.
1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the
existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is
generated.

#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is
assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
- 145 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 PSR NE9 OSR NE8

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs

NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card

#3 OSR Pressing the [O SEARCH] soft key without entering a program number with keys in a
program number search:
0: Searches for the next program number (order of registration).
1: Disables the search.

#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs

NOTE
If this parameter is set, a protected program is also displayed.

- 146 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#6 PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3203 MCL MER MZE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#5 MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

#6 MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single block operation in the MDI
mode, the executed block is:
0: Not deleted
1: Deleted

NOTE
When MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if the end-of-record
mark (%) is read and executed. (The mark % is automatically
inserted at the end of a program.)

#7 MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset

0: Not deleted
1: Deleted

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3204 MKP PAR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, characters "[" and "]" are:
0: Used as "[" and "]".
1: Used as "(" and ")".

NOTE
When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

#6 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, the created MDI
program is:
0: Erased automatically.
1: Not erased automatically.

- 147 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
If the bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is 1, executing the last
block provides a choice of whether to automatically erase a created
program.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3205 OSC PNS TOK

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 TOK A WORD COPY or WORD MOVE on the program screen:

0: Is performed as usual.
1: Can also be performed on a record-by-record basis from a program to the key-in
buffer.

#3 PNS On the program screen, a search with the cursor keys is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 NS2 S2K PHS MIF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 MIF Editing of the maintenance information screen is:

0: Not prohibited.
1: Prohibited.

#4 PHS Operation history signal selection:

0: Does not interact with parameters.
Operation history signal selection is added or deleted on the operation history signal
selection screen.
Changing the settings of parameters Nos. 12801 to 12820, Nos. 12841 to 12860, or
Nos. 12881 to 12900 has no effect on operation history signal selection.
Changes to the signals of the addresses specified by parameters Nos. 12801 to 12820,
Nos. 12841 to 12860, or Nos. 12881 to 12900 are not recorded in the history.
1: Interacts with parameters.
Operation history signal selection can be performed either on the operation history
signal selection screen or by setting parameters.

NOTE
Setting this parameter to 1 reflects the current operation history
signal selection data on parameters Nos. 12801 to 12900.

#5 S2K In CNC screen dual display function,

0: Key control is selected by key control selection signal CNCKY <G0295.7>.
1: Key control is selected by pushing at left upper corner on the screen. (Touch panel
only)
- 148 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#7 NS2 CNC screen dual display function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 TPP VRN EXS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 EXS The machine menu function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable names of common variables #500 to
#549 are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#6 TPP When a virtual MDI key is pressed, touch panel check signal TPPRS<F0006.0> is
0: Not output.
1: Output

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PSC SKY
3208
SKY

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SKY The function key on the MDI panel is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:
0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.

3210 Program protection

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999. When a value
other than zero is set in this parameter and this value differs from the keyword set in
parameter No.3211, bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000
to 9999 is automatically set to 1.
This disables the editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Until the value set as the
password is set as a keyword, NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the password cannot be
modified.

- 149 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 The state where password ≠ 0 and password ≠ keyword is referred
to as the locked state. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed to indicate that the
password cannot be modified. When an attempt is made to modify
the password with G10 (programmable parameter input), alarm
(PS0231), “ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52” is issued.
2 When the value of the password is not 0, the parameter screen
does not display the password. Care must be taken in setting a
password.

3211 Program protection key

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
When the value set as the password (set in parameter No.3210) is set in this parameter,
the locked state is released and the user can now modify the password and the value set in
bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202.

NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power is
turned off, this parameter is set to 0.

3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set the increment for sequence numbers for automatic sequence number insertion (when
bit 5 (SEQ) of parameter No. 0000, is set to 1.)

3227 Selection of a block number of machine operation menu data

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 98
This parameter select a block number to use from the inside of the machine operation
menu definition file which was stored in the FROM in the machine operation menu
function. If "0", "the value except the data range" or either of "the block number not to be
defining" is set, the machine operation menu function is disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3233 RKB

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 RKB By the reset operation, the content of the key-in buffer is :

0: Deleted.
1: Not deleted.

- 150 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When RKB is 1, the content of the key-in buffer can be deleted at a
time by pushing the CAN key following the SHIFT key.

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3241
AI contour control II mode (the first character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3242
AI contour control II mode (the second character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3243
AI contour control II mode (the third character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3244
AI contour control II mode (the fourth character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3245
AI contour control II mode (the fifth character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3246
AI contour control II mode (the sixth character)

Character blinking in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I mode /

3247
AI contour control II mode (the seventh character)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0, 32 to 95
Set the first to seventh blinking characters in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour
control I /AI contour control II mode by using ASCII codes represented as decimal
numbers.
When all parameters are set to 0, "AI APC" blinks for AI advanced preview control or
"AICC 1" blinks for AI contour control I or "AICC 2" blinks for AI contour control II.
Code numbers 032 to 095 in the Appendix A, "CHARACTER CODE LIST" can be set.

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (first character)

3251

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (second character)

3252

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (third character)

3253

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (fourth character)

3254

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (fifth character)

3255

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (sixth character)

3256

Character blinking in the advanced preview control mode (seventh character)

3257

- 151 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0, 32 to 95
Set the first to seventh blinking characters in the advanced preview control mode by using
ASCII codes represented as decimal numbers.
When 0 is set in all of these parameters, "APC" blinks.
Code numbers 032 to 095 in the Appendix A, "CHARACTER CODE LIST" can be set.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3280 NLC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 NLC Dynamic display language switching is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
When dynamic display language switching is disabled, the language setting screen is not
displayed. In this case, change the setting of parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen
then turn on the power again to switch the display language.

3281 Display language

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 21
Select a display language from the following:
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Chinese(traditional characters)
5 : Italian
6 : Korean
7 : Spanish
8 : Dutch
9 : Danish
10 : Portuguese
11 : Polish
12 : Hungarian
13 : Swedish
14 : Czech
15 : Chinese(simplified characters)
16 : Russian
17 : Turkish
18 : Bulgarian
19 : Romanian
21 : Finnish
If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY MCM IWZ WZO GOF WOF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
- 152 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled. (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in
which updating the setting is to be disabled.)

NOTE
When tool offset memory A is selected with the M series, the tool
offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if geometric
compensation and wear compensation are not specified with the T
series.

#1 GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled. (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in
which updating the setting is to be disabled.)

#3 WZO Setting a workpiece zero point offset value and workpiece shift value (T series) by MDI
key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled.

#4 IWZ Setting a workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece shift value (T series) by MDI
key input in the automatic operation activation or halt state is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled.

#6 MCM Setting a custom macro variable by MDI key input is:

0: Enabled in any mode.
1: Enabled only in the MDI mode.

#7 KEY For memory protection keys:

0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1: Only the KEY1 signal is used.

NOTE
1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1.
When KEY = 0:
- KEY1: Enables a tool offset value, workpiece zero point offset
value, and workpiece shift value (T series) to be input.
- KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life
management value to be input.
- KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
- KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input.
When KEY = 1:
- KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables
PMC parameter input.
- KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
2 When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.

- 153 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3291 WPT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 WPT The input of the tool wear compensation amount is:

0: Enabled according to memory protection key signal KEY1.
1: Enabled, regardless of the memory protection key signal KEY1.

3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled

3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to Tool compensation count - 1
When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bit
0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290, parameter
Nos.3294 and 3295 are used to set the range where such modification is disabled. In
parameter No.3294, set the offset number of the start of tool offset values whose
modification is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of such values. In the
following cases, however, none of the tool offset values may be modified:
• When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.3294
• When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.3295
• When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter
No.3294
In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter
No.3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled:
When the value of parameter No.3294 added to the value of parameter No.3295
exceeds the maximum tool offset number
When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the
warning "WRITE PROTECT" appears.
[Example] When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool
geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to
60 are disabled:
• Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value
modification)
• Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value
modification)
• Parameter No.3294 = 51
• Parameter No.3295 = 10
If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 is set to 0 without modifying the other
parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled, and
tool wear offset value modification is enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3299 PKY

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

- 154 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#0 PKY "Parameter write enable" is:
0: Set on the setting screen (bit 0 (PWE) of setting parameter No.8900).
1: Set by the memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3301 HDC H16

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 H16 Bit map data of screen hard copies uses:

0: 256 colors.
1: 16 colors.

#7 HDC A screen hard copy function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

4.19 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (1 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SMX UVW
3400
SMX

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 UVW When G code system B or C is selected:

0: The U, V, W, and H commands are not the incremental commands of the X-, Y- , Z-,
and C-axes.
1: The U, V, W, and H commands are the incremental commands of the X-, Y- , Z-,
and C-axes.

NOTE
1 When U-, V-, and W-axes are present, the U, V, and W commands
are assumed to be the commands for these axes. That is, they
are not the incremental commands of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
2 If this parameter is set to 1, it is impossible to use U, V, or W as the
specified address (parameter No. 3460) of the second auxiliary
function for G code system B or C.
3 If this parameter is set to 1, the same operation as that of the
FS0i-TC is assumed.

#6 SMX An S code specified in a block that specifies G92 (G50 with G code system A of the T
series) is:
0: Regarded as a maximum spindle speed command.
1: Not regarded as a maximum spindle speed command (but regarded as a spindle
speed command).

- 155 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GSC GSB ABS MAB DPI
3401
ABS MAB DPI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)

#4 MAB Switching between the absolute and incremental commands in MDI operation
0: Performed by G90 or G91
1: Depending on the setting of bit 5 (ABS) of parameter No.3401

NOTE
When G code system A of the T series is used, this parameter is
invalid.

#5 ABS Program command in MDI operation

0: Assumed as an incremental command
1: Assumed as an absolute command

NOTE
ABS is valid when bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No.3401 is set to 1.
When G code system A of the T series is used, this parameter is
invalid.

#6 GSB The G code system is set.

#7 GSC
GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G23 CLR FPM G91 G19 G18 G01
3402
G23 CLR G70 G91 G19 G18 G01

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)

#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)

- 156 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 to 0.

G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode

0 0 G17 mode (X-Y plane)
0 1 G18 mode (Z-X plane)
1 0 G19 mode (Y-Z plane)

#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command)
1: G91 mode (incremental command)

#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state:

0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set.
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set.

#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are:
0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input).
1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input).

#6 CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and
emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

#7 G23 When the power is turned on

0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3403 ADB CIR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#5 CIR When neither the distance (I, J, K) from a start point to the center nor an arc radius (R) is
specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03) or helical interpolation (G02, G03):
0: The tool moves to an end point by linear interpolation.
1: An alarm PS0022 is issued.

#6 ADB When the same address two or more times are specified in one block:
0: The address specified last is valid.
1: It is treated as a program error and the alarm PS5074, "ADDRESS DUPLICATION
ERROR" is issued.

- 157 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 You can specify any number of G codes in the same block as long
as they belong to different groups. Specifying G codes belonging to
the same group causes the alarm PS5074. You can however
specify any number of G90 and G91 codes in the same block as
they cause no alarm.
2 When bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No.3404 is set to 1, up to three M
codes can be specified in the same block. Specifying more than
three results in the alarm PS5074.
3 When G code system A is used with the lathe system, specifying
an absolute programming and incremental programming for the
same axis causes the alarm PS5074.
4 The alarm is not caused by blocks which call a custom macro or
argument specification I/II of execution macro.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B M02 M30 SBP NOB

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NOB When a program is executed, a block consisting of an O, N, or EOB is:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.

#2 SBP In an external device subprogram call (M198), the address P format is based on:
0: File number specification
1: Program number specification

NOTE
In memory card operation, the program number specification
format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#4 M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:

0: M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)

#5 M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation

0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)

#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block

0: One
1: Up to three

- 158 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DDP CCR DWL AUX
3405
DWL AUX

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.

When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
Metric IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
input IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
system IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 times
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
Inch input
IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
system
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times

#1 DWL The dwell time (G04) is:

0: Always dwell per second.
1: Dwell per second in the feed per minute mode, or dwell per rotation in the feed per
rotation mode.

#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering

0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”.
In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with
comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".
1: Address is “C”.
Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A"
without comma.

NOTE
If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the
compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the
tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used.
If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis
name, the chamfer function cannot be used.

#5 DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming

0: Normal specification
1: A supplementary angle is given.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3406 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3407 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08

- 159 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3408 C23 C22 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3409 CFH C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C25 C24

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

C01 to C30 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is set to 1, set a group of G codes to be placed in the
cleared state when the CNC is reset by the key of the MDI unit, the external reset
signal, the reset & rewind signal, or the emergency stop signal.
The table below indicates the correspondence between bits and G code groups
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Places the G code group in the cleared state.
1: Does not place G code group in the cleared state.
Parameter G code group
C01 01
C02 02
C03 03
: :
C30 30

#7 CFH When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the key on the MDI unit, the
external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will,
0: Clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T codes
(for the T series).
1: Not clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T
codes (for the T series).

3410 Tolerance of arc radius

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
When a circular interpolation command is executed, the tolerance for the radius between
the start point and the end point is set.

NOTE
When the setting is 0, the difference between the arc radius values
is not checked.

3411 M code preventing buffering 1

3412 M code preventing buffering 2

:
3420 M code preventing buffering 10

[Input type] Parameter input

- 160 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.

3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

3423 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3424 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

3425 Range specification 3 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3426 Range specification 3 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

3427 Range specification 4 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3428 Range specification 4 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

3429 Range specification 5 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3430 Range specification 5 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

3431 Range specification 6 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)

3432 Range specification 6 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter Nos.3421 and 3422,
3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432,
buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is
completed.

NOTE
1 M00, M01, M02, and M30 are M codes that do not perform
buffering, regardless of parameter setting.
M98, M99, M codes for calling subprograms, and M codes for
calling custom macros are M codes that performs buffering,
regardless of parameter setting.
2 If the minimum value is greater than the maximum value, the
setting is invalid.
3 If there is only one data item, the minimum value must be equal to
the maximum value.

- 161 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3450 BDX AUP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 AUP The second auxiliary function specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format,
with a decimal point, or with a negative value is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
If the second auxiliary function is specified after setting this bit to 0, the following
operation results:
1. When a value is specified without a decimal point
A specified value is output onto the code signal without modification, regardless of
the setting of the calculator-type decimal point input format (with bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No. 3401).
2. When a value is specified with a decimal point
The alarm (PS0007)“ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
3. When a negative value is specified
The alarm (PS0006)“ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.

#7 BDX This parameter prevents the unit of the argument from depending on the setting of bit 2
(BCD) of parameter No. 8132 when a subprogram call by an ASCII code is performed
with the address (specified by parameter No. 3460) of the second auxiliary function.
0: When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is 1, the unit of the argument depends on
the setting of bit 2 (BCD) of parameter No. 3450.
1: The same unit of the argument is used. The unit when bit 2 (BCD) of parameter
No. 8132 is 1 is specified.
[Example]
A setting is made so that address B is used to call O9004, and the program O1 below
is executed with parameter No.3460 = 66.
O1 O9004
B2 #500 = #146
M30 M99
When the increment system is IS-B, and metric input is used, #500 assumes a value
indicated in the table below.

BDX=0
Parameter DPI Parameter AUP
Parameter Parameter BDX=1
(No.3401#0) (No.3450#0)
BCD(No.8132#2)=0 BCD(No.8132#2)=1
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
0
1 2.000 0.002 0.002
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
1
1 2.000 2.000 2.000

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3451
NBN

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 NBN If bit 0 (NOB) of parameter No.3404 is set to 1, a block including just N is:
0: Ignored.
1: Not ignored but handled as a single block.
- 162 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(For a block containing only N, bit 0 (NOB) of parameter No.3404 is ignored.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3452 EAP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#7 EAP When bit 0 (ADX) of parameter No.3455 is set to 1, calculator-type decimal point input
at a macro calling argument address is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401 is
set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRD
3453

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming
are both enabled,
0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
Specify which function is used when both the chamfering/corner R function and the
drawing dimension programming function are enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3454 G1B

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 G1B In programmable parameter input, specifying a change to a specific bit parameter is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (A bit number is specified with Q_.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3455 AXDx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,
the value is determined:
0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input)
1: In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)

- 163 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input
function for each axis.
For the same axis name, be sure to make the same setting.

3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 65to67, 85to87
Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address for specifying the
second auxiliary function. If an address used as an axis name is specified, the second
auxiliary function is disabled.
Name A B C U V W
Setting value 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.
However, the name U, V, or W can be used with the T series only when G code system B
or C is used. When a value from 85 to 87 is specified with G code system A, the
specification address for the second auxiliary function is B.

4.20 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3601
EPC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 EPC The pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs contour control on the slave spindle side
during simple synchronous spindle control (M series) is:
0: The same as that on the master spindle.
1: Just for the slave spindle.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3605 BDPx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 BDPx Both-direction pitch error compensation is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

- 164 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
The both-direction pitch error compensation option is required.

3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for
each axis.

3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative
position for each axis.

3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely positive position
for each axis.
This value must be larger than set value of parameter (No.3620).

3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used for the
compensation data.
- 165 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

If 0 is set, compensation is not performed.

3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real axis
[Unit of data]
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range]
See the description below.
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equal spacing. The space
between two adjacent positions is set for each axis. The minimum interval between pitch
error compensation positions is limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate/7500
Unit : Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions: mm, inch, deg
Maximum feedrate: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
[Example] When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error
compensation positions is 2 mm.

3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] See the description below.
If the pitch error compensation of rotation axis type is performed (bit 1 (ROSx) of
parameter No.1006 is set to 0 and bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1), set the
travel distance per revolution. The travel distance per revolution does not have to be 360
degrees, and a cycle of pitch error compensation of rotation axis type can be set.
However, the travel distance per revolution, compensation interval, and number of
compensation points must satisfy the following condition:
(Travel distance per revolution)
= (Compensation interval) × (Number of compensation points)
The compensation at each compensation point must be set so that the total compensation
per revolution equals 0.

NOTE
If 0 is set, the travel distance per revolution becomes 360 degrees.

- 166 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Number of the both-direction pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position (for
3626
movement in the negative direction)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023, 3000 to 4023
When using both-direction pitch error compensation, set the number of compensation
point at the farthest end in the negative direction for a movement in the negative
direction.

NOTE
1 For a movement in the positive direction, set the compensation point
number at the farthest end in the negative direction in parameter
No.3621.
2 A set of compensation data items for a single axis should not be set
to lie astride 1023 to 3000.

Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made
3627
from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
Set the absolute value of pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement
to the reference position is made from the negative direction if the direction of reference
position return (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No.1006) is positive or from the positive
direction if the direction of reference position return is negative.

3661 Number of a pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each slave axis when
independent pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of a pitch error compensation position for the reference position.

- 167 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during simple synchronous
spindle control (M series) is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No.3601 is set to 1).

3666 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis
when independent pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the compensation position number at the farthest end in the
negative direction.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during simple synchronous
spindle control (M series) is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No.3601 is set to 1).
2 When using the both-direction pitch error compensation function,
set a compensation position number for a movement in the positive
direction.

3671 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each slave axis
when independent pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the compensation position number at the farthest end in the positive direction.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during simple synchronous
spindle control (M series) is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No.3601 is set to 1).
2 When using the both-direction pitch error compensation function,
set a compensation position number for a movement in the positive
direction.

- 168 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3676 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis
when independent both-direction pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle
synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
When using both-direction pitch error compensation, set the compensation position
number at the farthest end in the negative direction for a movement in the negative
direction.

NOTE
This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during simple synchronous
spindle control (M series) is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No.3601 is set to 1).

Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movement is made to the reference
3681 position in the direction opposite to the reference position return direction for each slave axis in the
case where independent both-direction pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle
synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
By using an absolute value, set a pitch error compensation value at the reference position
when a movement is made in the negative direction if the reference position return
direction (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006) is positive or when a movement is made in
the positive direction if the reference position return direction (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter
No.1006) is negative.

NOTE
This parameter is valid if pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs
contour control on the salve side during simple synchronous
spindle control (M series) is carried out just for the slave axis (bit 1
(EPC) of parameter No. 3601 is set to 1).

4.21 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3700 NRF

[Input type] Parameter input

- 169 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Bit path

#1 NRF With the first move command (G00) after switching the serial spindle to Cs contour
control axis:
0: A reference position return operation is once performed then positioning is
performed.
1: A normal positioning operation is performed.

NOTE
1 When using the Cs axis establishment function, this parameter is
recommended to be set to 1.
2 The setting of this parameter is valid for G00. The first rapid
traverse of a canned cycle is normal positioning regardless of the
setting of this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS3 SS2 ISI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#1 ISI
#4 SS2
#5 SS3 Set the number of spindles in a path.

SS3 SS2 ISI Number of spindles in a path

0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 2
1 0 0 3

NOTE
This parameter is valid when spindle serial output is enabled (bit 5
(SSN) of parameter No. 8133 is 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EMS
3702

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 EMS The multi-spindle control function is:

0: Used.
1: Not used.

- 170 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
Make the setting on the side of the path in which multi-spindle
control is unnecessary in 2-path control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPR MPP 2P2
3703
MPP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 2P2 When a 2-path system is used, inter-path spindle control allows:

0: Configuration where the spindle that belongs to one path only is shared between
path 1 and path 2.
1: Configuration where the spindles that belong to path 1 and 2 are shared between the
two paths.

#3 MPP In multi-spindle control, a spindle selection using a programmed command instead of

using the spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS3<G027.0 to 2>) is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3781 at the same
time.

#4 SPR Rigid tapping with spindle of another path function is:

0: Not available.
1: Available.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CSS SSS
3704
CSS SSY SSS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#4 SSS Synchronous spindle control by each spindle is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The master axis and slave axis of synchronous spindle control can be selected from the
arbitrary spindles.
The target spindle of synchronous spindle control is specified in parameter No.4831.
In addition, the following signals affect the control.
In addition, the following signals affect the control.
- 171 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

• Synchronous spindle signals of each spindle SPSYCs <Gn288.0~Gn288.2>

• Signals of synchronous control of the spindle phase for each spindle
SPPHSs <Gn289.0~Gn289.2>

#5 SSY Simple synchronous spindle control (M series) by each spindle is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The master axis and slave axis of simple synchronous spindle control (M series) can be
selected from the arbitrary spindles.
The target spindle of simple synchronous spindle control (M series) is set in parameter
No.4821.
In addition, the following signals affect the control.
• Signals of simple synchronous control of each spindle
ESSYCs <Gn264.0, Gn264.1>
• Parking signals of simple synchronous control of each spindle
PKESEs <Gn265.0, Gn265.1>

#7 CSS On the each spindle, Cs contour control is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SFA EVS SGT SGB ESF
3705
SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ESF When constant surface speed control is selected (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1)
or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is 1:
0: S codes and SF are output for all S commands.
1: For the T series:
S codes and SF are not output for an S command in the constant surface speed
control (G96) mode and a command for maximum spindle speed clamping (G92S--
- ; (G50 for G code system A)).
For the M series:
S codes and SF are not output for an S command in the constant surface speed
control (G96) mode.

NOTE
The operation of this parameter varies between the T series and M
series.
For the T series: This parameter is valid when bit 4 (EVS) of
parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series: For an S command for maximum spindle speed
clamping (G92S-- - ;), SF is not output, regardless of the setting of
this parameter.

#1 GST The SOR signal is used for:

0: Spindle orientation
1: Gear shift

- 172 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 SGB Gear switching method
0: Method A (Parameters 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each gear are
used for gear selection.)
1: Method B (Parameters 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the gear switching
point are used for gear selection.)

#3 SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0: Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1: Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the spindle speed
set in parameters 3761 and 3762).

#4 EVS S codes and SF are:

0: Not output for an S command.
1: Output for an S command.
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant surface speed control mode
(G96), or for an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S---;)
depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No.3705.

#5 NSF For the M series, if T type gear is selected (bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is 1 or
constant surface speed control is enabled (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1)), when
an S code is specified:
0: SF is output.
1: SF is not output.

NOTE
This parameter does not affect S code output. For an S command
for maximum spindle speed clamping (G92S-- - ;), SF is not output,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#6 SFA The SF signal is output:

0: When gears are switched.
1: Irrespective of whether gears are switched.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TCW CWM ORM PCS MPA
3706
TCW CWM ORM GTT MPA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 MPA If a spindle is to be selected using a P command (with bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703
set to 1) in multi-spindle control, and a P command is not specified together with an S
command:
0: The alarm PS5305, “ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER” is issued.
1: The last P specified by S_ P_; (by S_ P_; specified for the path in case of a 2-path
system) is used. If P is not specified even once after power-up, the value of
parameter No. 3775 is used.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 is set to 1.

- 173 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 PCS When multi-spindle control is enabled in each path of 2-path system, position coder
selection signal (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>) is:
0: The signal on the side of the path selected by the inter-path spindle feedback signal
is used.
1: The signal on the side of the local path is used.

#4 GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method

0: Type M.
1: Type T.

NOTE
1 This parameter is effected for M system.
2 M type
The gear selection signal is not input. The CNC selects a gear
based on the speed range of each gear set by a parameter
beforehand according to S codes, and the selected gear is posted
by outputting the gear selection signal. Moreover, the spindle
speed matching the gear selected by the output gear selection
signal is output.
T type
The gear selection signal is input. The spindle speed matching the
gear selected by this signal is output.
3 When constant surface speed control is selected (bit 0 (SSC) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1), the T type is assumed regardless of the
setting of this parameter.
4 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the following
parameters have no effect:
No.3705#2(SGB), No.3751, No.3752,
No.3705#1(GST), No.3705#3(SGT), No.3761, No.3762,
No.3705#6(SFA), No.3735, No.3736
On the other hand, parameter No. 3744 becomes usable.
5 When multi spindle control is used, select to T type.

#5 ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation

0: Positive
1: Negative

#6 CWM
#7 TCW Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output

TCW CWM Voltage polarity

0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TSO SOC SAT SAR
3708
TSO SOC SAR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 174 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#0 SAR The spindle speed arrival signal SAR <Gn029.4> is:
0: Not checked
1: Checked

#1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR) at the start of executing the thread cutting
block
0: The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 of parameter 3708, is set.
1: The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set.

NOTE
When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle speed
arrival signal is not checked for the second and subsequent thread
cutting blocks.

#5 SOC During constant surface speed control (G96 mode), the speed clamp by the maximum
spindle speed clamp command (M series: G92 S_; T series: G50 S_;) is carried out:
0: Before spindle speed override.
1: After spindle speed override.
If this parameter is set to 0, the spindle speed may exceed the maximum spindle speed
(numeric value following S in G92 S_; (M series) or G50 S_; (T series)).
If this parameter is set to 1, the spindle speed is limited to the maximum spindle speed.
The spindle speed is limited to the upper limit of spindle speed specified in parameter No.
3772, irrespective of the setting of this parameter.

#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:

0: Disabled (tied to 100%).
1: Enabled.

NOTE
During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MRS MSI RSC SAM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed

0: 4 (Normally, set to 0.)
1: 1

#1 RSC In the constant surface speed control mode, the surface speed of a rapid traverse block is
calculated:
0: In accordance with the coordinates of the end point.
1: In accordance with the current value, as in cutting feed.

#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the select the spindle motor speed command signal SIND is
valid
0: Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd, 3rd spindle becomes
ineffective) (TYPE-A)
1: For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected (Each spindle has its
own SIND signal). (TYPE-B)

- 175 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 MRS When the actual spindle speed signals and S 12-bit code signals are output in
multi-spindle control:
0: The signals common to the first spindle and second spindle are used, and the signals
for the spindle selected by the spindle selection signal are output.
1: The signals for the first spindle and the signals for the second spindle are output
separately.

NOTE
This parameter requires multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MSP) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1) and spindle serial output (bit 5 (SSN) of
parameter No. 8133 is 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3712 GMB CSF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 CSF In the Cs contour control mode, the function for setting machine coordinates and absolute
coordinates based on the machine position of the spindle if the reference position is
already set up is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#6 GMB With type-M gear switching method B, the speed of each gear is clamped to:
0 : The maximum rotation speed (No. 3741 to No. 3743) of each gear or the maximum
clamping speed (No. 3736) of the spindle motor.
1 : The spindle motor speed which is different every gear.
Gear1 : The spindle motor speed (No. 3751) at the gear switching point between
gear 1 and gear 2
Gear2 : The spindle motor speed (No. 3752) at the gear switching point between
gear 2 and gear 3
Gear3 : The maximum clamping speed (No. 3736) of the spindle motor

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3713 MPC EOV MSC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#3 MSC Multi-spindle control TYPE-C is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
If parameter MSC and MSI (bit 2 of parameter No. 3709 for
multi-spindle control TYPE-B ) are set to 1 at the same time,
multi-spindle control TYPE-C is enabled.

- 176 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#4 EOV Each spindle speed override is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
Multi-spindle control TYPE-C (bit 3 (MSC) of parameter No.
3713=1) is necessary to use this function.

#6 MPC When a spindle is selected with address P in a program during multi-spindle control (bit 3
(MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1), position coder feedback used for thread cutting,
feed per revolution, and so forth is:
0: Not changed automatically according to the selected spindle.
1: Changed automatically according to the selected spindle.

NOTE
Setting this parameter produces the same effects as when position
coder select signals PC2SLC<Gn028.7>, inter-path spindle
feedback signals SLPCA<Gn064.2>, and SLPCB<Gn064.3> are
set. At this time, even when an attempt to set these signals is made
by a PMC ladder, these signal operations are ignored.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3715 NSAx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 NSAx When a move command is executed for an axis, the spindle speed arrival signal SAR
<Gn029.4> is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
Set an axis for which the spindle speed arrival signal SAR need not be checked when a
move command is executed for the axis. When a move command is specified only for an
axis with this parameter set to 1, the spindle speed arrival signal SAR is not checked.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3716 FBP A/Ss

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 A/Ss Spindle motor type is :

0: Analog spindle.
1: Serial spindle.

- 177 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 To use a serial spindle, set bit 5 (SSN) of parameter No. 8133 to 0.
2 A maximum of one analog spindle can be controlled.
3 When using an analog spindle, set it at the end of the spindle
configuration.

#7 FBP The number of position coder pulses of the spindle is:

0: Not changed.
1: Changed.

3717 Motor number to each spindle

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes
Set a spindle amplifier number to be assigned to each spindle.
0: No spindle amplifier is connected.
1: Spindle motor connected to amplifier number 1 is used.
2: Spindle motor connected to amplifier number 2 is used.
3: Spindle motor connected to amplifier number 3 is used.

NOTE
When using an analog spindle, set it at the end of the spindle
configuration.
(Example)
When there are three spindles in an entire system (two serial
spindles and one analog spindle), set the spindle amplifier number
(this parameter) of the analog spindle to 3.

3718 Subscript for display of a serial spindle or analog spindle

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 122
Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen such as the position
display screen.

3720 Number of position coder pulses

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Number of pulses
[Valid data range] Serial spindle
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: 4096×2^14
- 178 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Spindle control with servo motor
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: 4096×2^14
Analog spindle
: 0, 4096 When bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1: from 0 to 400000

Set the number of position coder pulses.

In analog spindle, 4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0
or less.
In serial spindle or spindle control with servo motor, the setting method is changed by
setting of the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716.
- When the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 0:
4096 is set to parameter automatically if parameter No.3720 is set to 0 or less.
- When the bit 7 (FBP) of parameter No.3716 is set to 1:
4096×2^14 is set to parameter automatically.

3721 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side in speed control (such as feed per
revolution).

3722 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side in speed control (such as feed per
revolution).

CAUTION
Parameter No.3721 and No.3722 can not be used for thread cuttig.
If thread cutting was done by setting the any value on these
parameters, the correct screw can't be cut.
In the machine to do thread cutting, mechanically connected to
between the spindle and position coder by the gear ratio=1:1. And
these parameters set the No.3721=0, No.3722=0.
(It is the setting for the gear ratio 1:1.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3729 CSCs NCSs CSNs FPRs ORTs

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

#0 ORTs When a serial spindle is used, the spindle orientation function of stop position external
setting type based on the position coder is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#1 FPR Feed per revolution (without a position coder) is:

0: Not used for a spindle.
1: Used for a spindle.
- 179 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

In a machine that does not use a position coder, when bit 1 (FPR) of parameter No. 3729
is set to 1 for each axis, feed per revolution can be performed with a spindle command. A
feed per revolution is specified with G95 (G99 for T series) in the same way as for
normal operation.
When multispindle control is performed, the target spindle for feed per revolution is
selected with a position coder select signal (PC2SLC<Gn028.7>).

NOTE
Enable constant surface speed control (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter
No. 8133 is 1).

#2 CSNs When the Cs contour control mode is turned off, an in-position check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, the same operation as in FS0i-C is
assumed.

#3 NCSs When the Cs contour control mode is set:

0: Switching to Cs contour control is completed when the spindle activating current is
on (the spindle amplifier is ready for operation in the Cs contour control mode).
1: Switching to Cs contour control is completed even when the spindle activating
current is off (the spindle amplifier is not ready for operation in the Cs contour
control mode).

If this parameter is set to 1, the Cs contour control switch end signal is output without
waiting for the spindle to decelerate to a stop.

#7 CSCs The increment system of the Cs contour control axis is:

0: IS-B.
1: IS-C.

3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed

[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Word spindle
[Unit of data]
0.1%
[Valid data range]
700 to 1250
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
[Adjustment method]
<1> Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.
<2> Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the
maximum voltage (10 V).
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.3730.
Setting value = (10 (V) / Measured data (V)) × 1000
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the output voltage is 10V.

NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.

- 180 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed analog output

[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Word spindle
[Unit of data]
Velo
[Valid data range]
-1024 to 1024
Set a compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed analog output.
Setting = -8191 × offset voltage (V)/12.5
[Adjustment method]
<1> Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
<2> Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is 0.
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.3731.
Setting value = (-8191 × Offset voltage (V)) / 12.5
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V.

NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.

3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 20000
Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during gear
shift.
When bit 1 (GST) of parameter No.3705 is set to 0, set the spindle speed during spindle
orientation in min-1.
When bit 1 (GST) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1, set the spindle motor speed during
spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula.

For a serial spindle

Setting value =
(Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 16383

For an analog spindle

Setting value =
(Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 4095

3735
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Setting value =
(Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 4095

3736
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor

[Input type] Parameter input

- 181 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Word path

[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Setting value =
(Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 4095

NOTE
When constant surface speed control (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No.
8133 is 1) or bit 4 of parameter No. 3706 is set, this parameter is
invalid. In this case, the maximum clamp speed of the spindle
motor can be set, but the maximum spindle motor speed can be set
by parameter No. 3772.

Spindle motor speed

Max. speed (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed

(Parameter No.3736)

Spindle motor minimum clamp speed

(Parameter No.3735)
Spindle speed
(S command)

3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the checking of the
spindle speed arrival signal.

3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1

3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2

3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3

Maximum spindle speed for gear 4

3744
(Note)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1

- 182 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.

Spindle motor speed

Max. speed (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed

(Parameter No.3736)

Spindle motor minimum clamp speed

(Parameter No.3735)
Spindle speed command
(S command)
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed
(Parameter (Parameter (Parameter
No.3741) No.3742) No.3743)

NOTE
If a type-T gear shift scheme is selected for the M series (with the
constant surface speed control option installed or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 = 1), parameter No. 3744 is usable also in the
M series.
Note, however, that, even in this case, only up to three main gear
stages are usable for rigid tapping.

3751
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2

3752
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched.
Setting value =
(Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched / Maximum spindle motor speed) ×
4095

- 183 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Spindle motor speed

Max. speed (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.3736

Speed at gear 2-3 change point Parameter No.3752

Speed at gear 1-2 change point Parameter No.3751

Spindle motor minimum clamp speed Parameter No.3735

Spindle speed
Gear 3 command
Gear 1 Gear 2
max speed (S command)
max. speed max. speed
parameter parameter parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743

Gear 1-2 Gear 2-3

change change
point point

3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping

3762
Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
When method B is selected as the gear change method in the tapping cycle (when bit 3
(SGT) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1), set the spindle speed at a change point of each
gear.

- 184 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Spindle motor speed

Max. speed (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed

(Parameter No.3736)

Spindle motor minimum clamp speed

(Parameter No.3735)

Spindle speed
Gear 3 command
Gear 1 Gear 2
Max. speed (S command)
Max. speed Max. speed
Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743

Gear 1-2 Gear 2-3

change point change point
parameter parameter
No.3761 No.3762

3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control.

NOTE
If 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always applied to the
X-axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96 block has no effect on
the constant surface speed control.

3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96).
The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the speed given by
parameter 3771.

- 185 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

3772 Maximum spindle speed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is
specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle
speed override function, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the
parameter.

CAUTION
1 If 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not
clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC,
this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped.

NOTE
1 For the M series, this parameter is valid when constant surface
speed control is selected (bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No. 8133 is 1).
2 When the constant surface speed control is selected, the spindle
speed is clamped at the maximum speed, regardless of whether
the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified.

3773 Internal relay address (R) to specify the maximum spindle speed

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Ｗord spindle
[Valid data range] 4 to maximum internal relay address (R) (multiple of 4: 4, 8, ...)
Set the start address of the internal relay address (R) to specify the maximum spindle
speed for each spindle. Four bytes of the internal relay address (R) from the start address
are used.
The spindle speed is clamped at the value that is specified with the internal relay address
(R).

NOTE
1 If 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not clamped
with an internal relay address (R).
2 Set a value that is a multiple of 4 (4, 8, etc.).

- 186 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
3 The range of the R address differs depending on the PMC kind and
the memory size. Check the specifications of the PMC, and set a
value within the valid range.
• PMC: R0 to R7999 (8000)
• PMC/L: R0 to R1499 (1500)
(Example: R addresses in the range from R0 to R1499 if PMC/L is
used. Thus, values which can be set are 4, 8, 12, 16, …1492,
1496)
4 If an illegal value is set in this parameter, the alarm PW5390,
"R-ADDRESS SETTING IS ILLEGAL" occurs.

3775 Default P command value for spindle selection in multi-spindle control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1 and bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No.
3706 is set to 1 in multi-spindle control, set a default P command value applicable if S_P_
is not specified even once after power-up.

3781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle
under multi-spindle control. Specify the P code in a block containing the S command.

[Example] If the P code value for selecting the second spindle is set to 2,
S1000 P2;
causes the second spindle to rotate at S1000.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set
to 1.
2 If this parameter is set to 0, the corresponding spindle cannot be
selected by a P code.
3 Under 2-path control, the P code specified here is valid for each
path.
For instance, if the P code to select the first spindle of path 2 is set
to 21, specifying S1000 P21; in path 1 causes the first spindle of
path 2 to be rotated at S1000.
4 Identical P code values cannot be used for different spindles.
(Identical P code values cannot be used even if the paths are
different.)

- 187 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
5 When this parameter is used (when bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No.
3703 is set to 1), the spindle command selection signal is invalid.
6 To use this parameter, enable multi-spindle control (bit 3 (MSP) of
parameter No. 8133 is 1).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 ALM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ALM The spindle alarm (SP****) for all spindles is:

0: Enabled.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the spindle-related alarms are ignored. So, be sure to set
this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as maintenance.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3799 SSHs SVPs ASDs NDPs NALs

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

#0 NALs An alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ALM) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 0.)
When this parameter is set to 1, an alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is ignored.
So, be sure to set this parameter to 0 at all times except for special cases such as
maintenance.

#1 NDPs When an analog spindle is used, a position coder disconnection check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
(This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NAL) of parameter No. 3799 is set to 0.)
When no position coder is used with an analog spindle, set this parameter to 1.

#2 ASDs When a serial spindle is used, a spindle speed is calculated based on:
0: Feedback pulses from the position coder.
1: Speed monitor.

#3 SVPs As synchronization errors displayed on the spindle screen:

0: Monitor values are displayed.
1: Peak-hold values are displayed,
Spindle synchronization errors are displayed on the side of the spindle that functions as a
slave axis in spindle synchronization control.

#5 SSHs Displaying of total spindle speed data on the diagnosis screen is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 188 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Parameters for Control of Serial Interface Spindle Cs Contouring Control Axis
Number Data format Description
Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the
3900 Byte path
set values of parameters 3901 to 3904 when the Cs contouring axis is
controlled
3901 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 1 selection
3902 Word path
First group Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 2 selection
3903 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 3 selection
3904 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 4 selection
Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the
3910 Byte path
set values of parameters 3911 to 3914 when the Cs contouring axis is
controlled
3911 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 1 selection
3912 Word path Second
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
group
spindle gear 2 selection
3913 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 3 selection
3914 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 4 selection
Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the
3920 Byte path
set values of parameters 3921 to 3924 when the Cs contouring axis is
controlled
3921 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 1 selection
3922 Word path
Third group Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 2 selection
3923 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 3 selection
3924 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 4 selection
Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the
3930 Byte path
set values of parameters 3931 to 3934 when the Cs contouring axis is
controlled
3931 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 1 selection
3932 Word path
Fourth group Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 2 selection
3933 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 3 selection
3934 Word path
Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for
spindle gear 4 selection

<Setting method>
First, select servo axes which perform interpolation with the Cs contouring axis. (Up to
four axes can be selected.)
When there is no servo axis for interpolation with the Cs contouring axis, set the
parameters 3900, 3910, 3920, and 3930 to 0 to terminate parameter setting.
When there are servo axes for interpolation with the Cs contouring axis, the parameters
must be set according to the procedure below for each axis.
(1) Set the number of a servo axis (1 to maximum number of controlled axes) for
interpolation with the Cs contouring axis in parameters 39n0 (n = 0, 1, 2, and 3).

- 189 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

(2) Set loop gain values of the servo axis specified in (1) above which is used when the
Cs contouring axis is controlled in parameters 39n1, 39n2, 39n3, and 39n4. (There
are four stages for main gears used.)
(3) When the number of specified servo axes is less than 4, set the remaining parameters
(39n0) to 0 to terminate parameter setting.
When the number of a Cs contouring axis is set to parameter 39n0, the parameter is
assumed to be set to 0.

NOTE
1 In general, it is difficult to set a high loop gain for a spindle motor
axis when compared with a servo axis. These parameters are
provided so that, by changing the loop gain of a servo axis that
requires interpolation with the Cs contour axis, interpolation control
can be exercised correctly between the Cs axis and servo axis
while the spindle exercises Cs contour control.
2 The loop gain of the servo axis is changed using the parameter
settings made for a spindle gear selected at the time of conversion
from the spindle mode to the Cs contour control mode.
In normal use, it is unlikely that the gear of the spindle is switched
during Cs contour control. However, note that if the gear of the
spindle is changed during Cs contour control, the loop gain of the
servo axis is not changed.
3 Even when multiple Cs axes are used with one path (bit 7 (CSS) of
parameter No. 3704 = 1), these parameters are shared.

Parameters for Serial interface spindle or spindle

Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799 below are basically used with the serial spindle amplifier.
For details of these parameters, refer to either of the following manuals and other related
documents, depending on the spindle that is actually connected.
• FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series Parameter Manual (B-65280EN)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000
to To
4015 (No user setting allowed = Note 1)
to To
4019 (Note 2)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4020
to To
4133
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

4134

4135
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word spindle

- 190 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4136
to To
4175
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4352

4353
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4354
to To
4371 (No user setting allowed = Note 1)

4372
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4373

4374
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4375
to To
4393
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4394
to To
4403
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4404
to To
4466
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4467
to To
4476
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

- 191 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4477
to To
4539
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4540
to To
4549
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4550
to To
4669
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4670
to To
4679
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle

4680
to To
4799
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle

NOTE
1 Among the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial
interface, parameters No. 4015 cannot be changed by the users.
These parameters require to assign optional software to the CNC
and are automatically set depending on the type of the software.
The setting of parameter No. 4371 is also unchangeable by the
user.
2 To set the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial
interface automatically, set bit 7 of parameter No.4019 to 1, assign
the model code of the motor to be used to parameter No.4133, turn
off the power of the CNC and spindle amplifier, and restart the
CNC and spindle amplifier.
3 Parameters No.4000 to No.4799 are used in the processing on the
spindle amplifier. For details of these parameters, refer to either of
the following manuals, depending on the serial spindle that is
actually used.
- FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series Parameter Manual
(B-65280EN)
4 The CNC can control up to three spindle amplifiers with the serial
interface.

- 192 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
5 The CNC stores the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the
serial interface. The CNC sends them to the spindle amplifier at the
system power on and they are used in the unit.
These parameters are sent from the CNC to the spindle amplifier in
a batch when:
- The CNC is switched on.
If these parameters are rewritten, they are sent from the CNC to
the spindle amplifier sequentially when:
- The parameters have been entered from the MDI.
- The parameters have been entered as programmable (G10).
- The parameters have been entered via the reader/punch
interface.
To set parameters automatically, upload parameters corresponding
to the motor model from the spindle amplifier to the CNC prior to
the procedure specified above.
The parameters of the spindle amplifier with serial interface can be
changed after the system starts. Changing the parameters
(No.4000 to No.4799 "S1" to "S3") in the CNC sends them to the
spindle amplifier at an appropriate time and the parameters in the
unit are updated.
(Be careful not to change parameters incorrectly.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SCB SYM
4800
EPZ SCB SYM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#4 SYM As the maximum spindle speed in spindle synchronization control:

0: The maximum spindle speed of the master spindle is used.
1: The maximum spindle speed of the master spindle or slave spindle, whichever lower,
is used.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for T type gear selection method.

- 193 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#5 SCB The combination of a master spindle and slave spindle for spindle synchronization
depends on:
0: Setting of bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704.
When bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set to 0
The first spindle and second spindle of each path can be selected as the master
spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
When bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set to 1
A combination of arbitrary spindles of each path can be selected for spindle
synchronization.
Set a master spindle for each slave spindle in parameter No. 4831. Set a spindle
number of each path.
By setting a spindle number common to the system in parameter No. 4832, an
arbitrary spindle that belongs to a different path can be selected as a master spindle
for spindle synchronization. Set a spindle number common to the system. Set
parameter No. 4831 to 0. Spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles must
be enabled for the path to which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a
master spindle belongs.
1: 0i-TTC system compatible specifications.
The first spindle of path 1 and the first spindle of path 2 can be selected as the
master spindle and slave spindle, respectively, for spindle synchronization.
As control signals, the signal interface of the 0i-TTC system compatible
specifications can be used.

#6 EPZ When the parking signal is switched in the reference position established state during Cs
contour control exercised using simple spindle synchronous control (M series):
0: Reference position established state is continued.
1: Reference position established state is canceled.
If this parameter is set, the same reference position return operation as manual reference
position return is performed with the G28 command immediately after the parking signal
is switched.
The G00 command performs a positioning operation including reference position return
(when bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700 is set to 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4801 SNDs

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 SNDs During spindle synchronization control, the rotation direction of each spindle motor is:
0: Same as the specified sign.
1: Opposite to the specified sign.

Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the spindle synchronization control
4810
mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 255

- 194 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Set an allowable error pulse value between two spindles at phase synchronization time in
the spindle synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check the completion of phase synchronization performed in the
spindle synchronization control mode and to check the phase difference during spindle
synchronization control.
When the error pulse value between two spindles become equal to or less than the value
set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization control completion signals
FSPPH<F044.3> and FSPPH1, 2<F289.0, 1> are set to “1”.

Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the spindle synchronization control
4811
mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the spindle
synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to check a spindle synchronization error phase difference.
When a spindle synchronization error equal to or greater than the value set in this
parameter is detected, the phase error monitor signals SYCAL<F044.4> and SYCAL1,
2<F043.0, 1> are set to “1”.

4821
Master axis of each slave spindle under simple synchronous spindle control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes
When a spindle is set as a slave spindle in simple spindle synchronous control (M series)
on each spindle, set which spindle (master spindle) the slave spindle is to be synchronized
with.

Examples of parameter setting)

- If the master spindle is the first spindle and the slave spindle is the second spindle:
No.4821(1)=0
No.4821(2)=1

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No. 3704 is set
to 1.
2 Be sure to set 0 for a spindle that is to function as a master spindle.

4826 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the simple synchronization spindle
control mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
- 195 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the simple
synchronization spindle control (M series) mode.
This parameter is used to check a spindle synchronization error phase difference.
When a spindle synchronization error equal to or greater than the value set in this
parameter is detected, the spindle phase error monitor signals SYCAL<Fn044.4> and
SYCALs are set to “1”.

NOTE
1 The detection unit per pulse depends on the spindle control mode
(Cs contour control or rigid tapping).
2 Set this parameter for a spindle that is to function as a slave
spindle. Set 0 for the master spindle.
3 In the spindle rotation control mode, synchronization error detection
is not performed.

4831 Master axis of each slave spindle under spindle synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes (within a path)
When a spindle is set as a slave spindle in spindle synchronization control on each
spindle, set which spindle (master spindle) the slave spindle is to be synchronized with.
Examples of parameter setting)
- When spindle synchronization control is exercised with the first spindle selected as a
master spindle and the second spindle selected as a slave spindle
No.4831(1)=0
No.4831(2)=1

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set
to 1.
2 The setting of a slave spindle as a master spindle is invalid. Be
sure to set 0 for a spindle that is to function as a master spindle.
3 In this parameter, set a spindle number within the same path.
When a spindle not belonging to the local path is to be selected as
a master spindle for spindle synchronization, set a spindle number
common to the system in parameter No. 4832. In such a case, set
0 in this parameter.

Master spindle of each slave spindle under spindle synchronization control (spindle number common
4832
to the system)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

- 196 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled spindle axes (common to the system)
When a spindle is set as a slave spindle in spindle synchronization control on each
spindle, set which spindle (master spindle) the slave spindle is to be synchronized with.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid if bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set
to 1.
Bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 must be set to 1 (to enable
spindle synchronization based on arbitrary spindles) for the path to
which a slave spindle belongs and for the path to which a master
spindle belongs.
2 The setting of a slave spindle as a master spindle is invalid. Be
sure to set 0 for a spindle that is to function as a master spindle.
3 In this parameter, set a spindle number common to the system.
4 When this parameter is used, parameter No. 4831 is set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FLRs
4900

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

#0 FLRs When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function (T series) is used, the unit of an
allowable ratio (q) and fluctuation ratio (r) set by parameter No. 4911 and No. 4912 is:
0: 1%
1: 0.1%

Allowable speed ratio (q) used to assume that the spindle has reached a specified speed
4911

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] 1%, 0.1%
[Valid data range] 1 to 100, 1 to 1000
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set an allowable speed
ratio (q) used to assume that the spindle has reached a specified speed.

NOTE
The unit of data is determined by bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No.
4900.

Spindle variation ratio (r) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm
4912

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] 1%, 0.1%
[Valid data range] 1 to 100, 1 to 1000
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set a spindle fluctuation
ratio (r) for not issuing an alarm.

- 197 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
The unit of data is determined by bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No.
4900.

Spindle speed fluctuation width (i) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm
4913

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set an allowable
fluctuation width (i) for not issuing an alarm.

Time (p) from the change of a specified speed until spindle speed fluctuation detection is started
4914

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set a time (p) from the
change of a specified speed until spindle speed fluctuation detection is started. In other
words, spindle speed fluctuation detection is not performed until a set time has elapsed
after a specified speed is changed. However, when the actual spindle speed is assumed to
have reached a specified value within a set time (p), spindle speed fluctuation detection is
started.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
IMBs ESIs TRVs ISZs IDMs IORs
4950

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

#0 IORs Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode

0: Does not release the mode.
1: Releases the mode.

#1 IDMs The direction of spindle positioning (half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes) is:
0: Plus direction.
1: Minus direction.

#2 ISZs When an M code for spindle orientation is specified in spindle positioning:

0: The spindle is switched to the spindle positioning mode, and spindle orientation
operation is performed.
1: Only the switching of the spindle to the spindle positioning mode is performed.
(Spindle orientation operation is not performed.)

#5 TRVs The rotation direction for spindle positioning is:

0: Same as the specified sign.
1: Opposite to the specified sign.

- 198 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When a serial spindle is used, this parameter is invalid for the
specification of a rotation direction for the orientation command.

#6 ESIs The unit of rapid traverse rate on the spindle positioning axis is:
0: Not increased by a factor of 10.
1: Increased by a factor of 10.

#7 IMBs When the spindle positioning function is used, half-fixed angle positioning based on M
codes uses:
0: Specification A.
1: Specification B.
In the case of half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes, three types of spindle
positioning operations can occur:
(1) The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle
positioning mode. (After switching to the spindle positioning mode, spindle
orientation operation is also performed.)
(2) Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle positioning mode.
(3) The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle
rotation mode.
• In the case of specification A:
Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M codes.
(1) Specified using an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode.
(See parameter No.4960)
(2) Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle.
(See parameter No.4962)
(3) Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning operation.
(See parameter No.4961.)
• In the case of specification B:
When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are specified, operations
(1) to (3) are performed successively. (See parameter No.4962.) (However, spindle
orientation operation of (1) is not performed.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DMDx
4959

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 DMDx A machine coordinate on the spindle positioning axis is displayed in:

0: Degrees.
1: Pulses.

M code specifying the spindle orientation

4960

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Valid data range] 6 to 97
- 199 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Set an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode.

NOTE
1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for
spindle positioning.
2 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05,
30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms).

M code releasing the spindle positioning mode

4961

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Valid data range] 6 to 97
Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode on the spindle positioning axis.

NOTE
1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for
spindle positioning.
2 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05,
30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms).

M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle

4962

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Valid data range] 6 to 9999999
Two methods are available for specifying spindle positioning. One method uses axis
address for arbitrary-angle positioning. The other use an M code for half-fixed angle
positioning. This parameter sets an M code for the latter method.
In this parameter, set an M code to be used for half-fixed angle positioning based on M
codes.
Six M code from Mα to M(α+5) are used for half-fixed angle positioning, when α is the
value of this parameter.
• When the number of M codes is set in parameter No. 4964, let α be the value set in
parameter No. 4962, and let β be the value set in parameter No. 4964. Then, β M
codes from Mα to M(α+β-1) are used as M codes for half-fixed angle positioning
based on M codes.
The table below indicates the relationship between the M codes and positioning angles.
Example: Positioning
M code Positioning angle
angle when θ = 30°
Mα θ 30°
M(α+1) 2θ 60°
M(α+2) 3θ 90°
M(α+3) 4θ 120°
M(α+4) 5θ 150°
M(α+5) 6θ 180°
: : :
M(α+β-1) β×θ β×30°

β represents the number of M codes set in parameter No. 4964.

(When parameter No. 4964 is set to 0, β = 6.)
θ represents the basic angular displacement set in parameter No.4963.
- 200 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for
spindle positioning.
2 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05,
30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms).

Basic angle for half-fixed angle positioning

4963

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real spindle
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 60
This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half-fixed angle positioning
using M codes.

Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle

4964

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half-fixed angle positioning using M
codes.
As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with the M code
specified in parameter No.4962, are used to specify half-fixed angle positioning.
Let α be the value of parameter No.4962, and let β be the value of parameter No.4964.
That is, M codes from Mα to M(α+β-1) are used for half-fixed angle positioning.
Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6. That is, M code from Mα to
M(α+5) are used for half-fixed angle positioning.

NOTE
1 Make sure that M codes from Mα to M (α+β-1) do not duplicate
other M codes.
2 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for
spindle positioning.
3 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05,
30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms).

Position gain
4970

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] 0.01/sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Set the position gain of the analog spindle in the spindle positioning mode.

- 201 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Position gain multiplier (first stage)

4971

Position gain multiplier (second stage)

4972

Position gain multiplier (third stage)

4973

Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)

4974

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
Set a position gain multiplier for an analog spindle in spindle positioning.
Position gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:
2048000 × 360 × PC × E
GC =
PLS × SP × L
PLS Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)
SP Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
PC Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
E Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000 min-1
L Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindle motor rotation
Example: For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC is calculated as follows:
PLS = 4096 pulse/rev
SP =1
PC =1
E = 2.2 V
L = 360 deg
2048000 × 360 × 1× 2.2
GC = = 1100
4096 × 1× 360

NOTE
On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500 min-1
at 10 V, 2.2 V is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000 min-1

4.22 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (1 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SBK
5000
MOF SBK

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SBK With a block created internally for cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation.

- 202 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 MOF When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 is set to
1) is used, if the tool length compensation amount is changed(NOTE 2) in the tool length
compensation mode when look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 1):
0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation amount as the
movement type.
1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length compensation
command (offset number) and an absolute command for the compensation axis are
specified.

NOTE
1 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows:
• The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool nose radius
compensation) of group 07 is other than G40.
One look-ahead block during automatic operation and multiple
look-ahead blocks in the AI advanced preview control/AI contour
control I /AI contour control II mode are not included in the state
"when look-ahead blocks are present".
2 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as follows:
• When the tool length compensation number is changed by H
code
• When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of tool
length compensation
• When the tool length compensation amount is changed using
the offset screen, G10 command, system variable, PMC window,
and so forth during automatic operation if bit 1 (EVO) of
parameter No. 5001 is set to 1.
• When a tool length compensation vector canceled temporarily
during tool length compensation by G53, G28, or G30 is
recovered

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5001
EVO TPH EVR TAL TLB TLC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TLC
#1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type TLB TLC
Tool length compensation A 0 0
Tool length compensation B 1 0
Tool length compensation C - 1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described
below.
Tool length compensation A :
Z-axis at all times
Tool length compensation B :
Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C :
Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44

- 203 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset.
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset.

#4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation mode:

0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified.
1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed.

#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation
number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is
0.

#6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool
length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44):
0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified
next.
1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is performed next.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WNP LWM LGC LGT LWT LGN
5002

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number.
1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by:

0: Moving the tool.
1: Shifting the coordinate system.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation

0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system.
1: Compensated by the tool movement.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
- 204 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation is based on coordinate shifting, the tool geometry
offset is:
0: Not canceled by a command with offset number 0.
1: Canceled by a command with offset number 0.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed:

0: In a block where a T code is specified.
1: Together with a command for movement along an axis.

#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the
geometry/wear compensation function is equipped (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136
is 0), is the number specified by:
0: Geometry offset number.
1: Wear offset number.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TGC SUV SUP
5003
LVK SUV SUP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SUP
#1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation.
SUV SUP Type Operation
0 0 Type A A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or
the block preceding the cancellation block is output.
Tool nose radius center path /
G41 Tool center path

Programmed path
N2

N1
0 1 Type B A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block
and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point Tool nose radius center path /
Tool center path

G41 Programmed path

N2

N1

- 205 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

SUV SUP Type Operation

1 0 Type C When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement
1 operation, the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction
perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation
block.
Intersection point
Tool nose radius center path /
G41 Tool center path
Shift
Programmed path
N3

N2

When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the
SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.

NOTE
When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of
FS0i-TC is performed.

#6 LVK Tool length compensation vector

0: Cleared by reset.
1: Not cleared, but held by reset.

#7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is:

0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TS1 ORC
5004
ODI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as:

0: Diameter value
1: Radius value

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter
specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a
radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#2 ODI The setting of a cutter compensation value is corrected as:

0: Radius value
1: Diameter value

- 206 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#3 TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for direct input of offset value
measured B (T series):
0: Four-contact input is used.
1: One-contact input is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TLE QNI PRC CNI
5005
QNI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CNI On the offset screen, Y-axis offset screen, and macro screen, the [INP.C] soft key is:
0: Used.
1: Not used. (The [INP.C] soft key is not displayed.)

#2 PRC For direct input of a tool offset value or workpiece coordinate system shift amount:
0: The position record signal PRC <Gn040.6> is not used.
1: The position record signal PRC <Gn040.6> is used.

#5 QNI With the tool length measurement function (M series) or the function for direct input of
offset value measured B (T series), a tool compensation number is selected by:
0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection based on cursor
operation).
1: Signal input from the PMC.

#6 TLE The "direct input of offset value measured B" function updates the offset value in offset
write mode:
0: Constantly.
1: During axis movement.
Axis movement assumes a positional deviation other than 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LVC TGC
5006
TOS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 TGC If a T code is specified in a block where G50, G04, or G10 is specified:

0: No alarm is issued.
1: The alarm PS0245, “T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK” is issued.

#3 LVC A tool offset (geometry/wear) based on a tool movement and wear offset based on a
coordinate shift are:
0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.

#6 TOS Set a tool length compensation operation.

0: Tool length compensation is performed by an axis movement.
1: Tool length compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate system.

- 207 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5007
3OF 3OC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#6 3OC If tool length compensation is not cancelled before 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
is specified, an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS0049, “ILLEGAL COMMAND(G68,G69)”)

#7 3OF If 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is not nested with a command for tool length
compensation, or if 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is specified during tool length
compensation and another command for tool length compensation is specified:
0: No alarm is issued.
1: The alarm PS0049, “ILLEGAL COMMAND(G68,G69)” is issued.

Example 1) An alarm is raised in the following cases:

1) G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G43 H1 ;
:
G69 ; ← PS0049 raised
:
G49 ;
2) G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G49(G43H2,H2 etc.) ; ← PS0049 raised
:
G69 ;
Example 2) No alarm is raised in the following cases:
3) G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G43 H1 ;
:
G49 ;
:
G69 ;
4) G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G69 ;
:
G49 ;

- 208 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
A command to cancel tool length compensation (G28, etc.) will not
cause an alarm to be raised. If a command like this is specified in
the G68 mode, program as indicated in 3) above.
G43 H1 ;
:
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ;
:
G28 X_ Y_ Z_ ; ← Offset is cancelled.
: No alarm is raised.
G69 ;

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5008 MCR CNV CNC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 CNC
#3 CNV These bits are used to select an interference check method in the cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation mode.
CNV CNC Operation
0 0 Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an arc are checked.
0 1 Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked.
1 - Interference check is disabled.
For the operation taken when the interference check shows the occurrence of an reference
(overcutting) , see the description of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607.

NOTE
Checking of only the direction cannot be set.

#4 MCR If G41/G42 (cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the
MDI mode, an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS5257, “G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE”)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TSD GSC
5009

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value measured B (T series) is used, an offset
write input signal is input from:
0: Machine side
1: PMC side

- 209 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When the interlock function for each axis direction is enabled (when bit 3 (DIT) of
parameter No. 3003 is set to 0), switching can also be made between input from the
machine side and input from PMC side for the interlock function for each axis direction.

#4 TSD In the function for direct input of offset value measured B (T series), the movement
direction determination specifications:
0: Do not apply.
1: Apply.
This parameter is valid when four-contact input is used (bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.
5004 is set to 0).

5010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter or tool nose radius compensation

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool nose radius
compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from
compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering caused by the
small travel amount generated at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the
interruption.

If ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY≤ ΔVlimit, ΔVx

this vector is ignored.

ΔVY
S
r
Even if ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and
ΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit, vector to
r single-block stop point
Tool center path
remains.
N1

Programmed path
N2

ΔVlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.

5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit)
[Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed.
[Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.

For metric input

OFC OFA Valid data range
0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm

- 210 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
For inch input
OFC OFA Valid data range
0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
1 0 0 to 999.99999inch

This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt
is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the
value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:
Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits
Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.
When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.

[Example] When 30.000 is set

As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.

5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit)
[Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed.
[Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.

For metric input

OFC OFA Valid data range
0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm
For inch input
OFC OFA Valid data range
0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
1 0 0 to 999.99999inch

Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an
incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value,
the following alarm or warning message is output:
Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits
Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.
When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.

Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P)

5015

Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M)

5016

Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P)

5017

Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1M)

5018

- 211 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999.)
This parameter is related to the function for direct input of offset value measured B (T
series).
Set the distance (signed) from a measurement reference position to each contact surface
of a sensor. For a diameter specification axis, set a diameter value.
When arbitrary angular axis control is performed, set the distance in the Cartesian
coordinate system.

○Measurement
reference
position
X1m X-axis - contact surface
↓

X1p

←Z-axis + contact surface

Z-axis - contact surface

+X Z1m
↑
X-axis + contact surface

Z1p
+Z

Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B
5020

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
Set a tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B
(T series) (when a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set). (Set the tool offset
number corresponding to a tool under measurement beforehand.) This parameter is valid
when automatic tool offset number selection is not performed (when bit 5 (QNI) of
parameter No. 5005 is set to 0).

Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to touch the touch sensor
5021

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
When a touch sensor of one-point input is used with the function for direct input of offset
value measured B (T series), set the number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until
the manually operated tool is about to touch the touch sensor. When 0 is set, the
specification of the maximum value 8 is assumed.

- 212 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set
to 1.

5024 Number of tool compensation values

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path.
Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths
is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system.
If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds
the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter
No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value
obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by
the number of paths.
Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each
path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of
compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued.
For example, 100 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1
and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.

Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command

5028

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number
(wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used).
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation
values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit
When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower 2 digits
When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 200: Lower 3 digits
[Example] When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in
parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
xxxxxx : Tool selection
yy : Tool offset number

NOTE
A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.

- 213 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

5029 Number of tool compensation value memories common to paths

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
When using memories common to paths, set the number of common tool compensation
values in this parameter.
Ensure that the setting of this parameter does not exceed the number of tool compensation
values set for each path (parameter No. 5024).
[Example 1] When parameter No. 5029 = 10, parameter No. 5024 (path 1) = 15, and parameter No.
5024 (path 2) = 30 in a 2-path system, tool compensation numbers 1 to 10 of all paths are
made common.
[Example 2] When parameter No. 5029 = 20 and the other conditions are the same as for Example 1,
tool compensation numbers 1 to 15 are made common.

NOTE
1 Ensure that the setting of parameter No. 5029 does not exceed the
number of tool compensation values for each path (parameter No.
5024). If the setting of parameter No. 5029 exceeds the number of
compensation values of a path, the least of the numbers of
compensation values in all paths is made common.
2 When 0 or a negative value is set, memories common to paths are
not used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OWD
5040

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1),
0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear compensation are
specified by radius.
1: Tool offset value of geometry compensation is specified by radius and tool offset
value of wear compensation is specified by diameter, for an axis of diameter
programming.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFC OFA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 214 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 OFA
#1 OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.

For metric input

OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm

For inch input

OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch

Axis number for which Y-axis offset is used

5043

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the number of an axis for which the tool offset is corrected.
If 0 or a value beyond the valid data range is set, the Y-axis offset is applied to the Y-axis
of the basic three axes. If setting is made for the X- or Z-axis of the basic three axes, the
standard tool offset for the X- or Z-axis is not used, and only the Y-axis offset is used.

4.23 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES

4.23.1 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Drilling (1 of 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTR EXC FXY
5101
M5B EXC FXY

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle
is:
0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle:
Z-axis at all times.
In case of the Grinding canned cycle:
• For the T series
Z-axis at all times.
• For the M series
G75,G77 command :Y-axis
G78,G79 command :Z-axis
1: Axis selected by the program
- 215 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format.
2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane
selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series
10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify
G17/G19.

#1 EXC G81
0: Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1: Specifies an external operation command

#2 RTR G83 and G87

0: Specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle
1: Specify a peck drilling cycle

#7 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:

0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RDI RAB F0C QSR
5102

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) (T series) is started, a check to see
if the program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
When 1 is set in this parameter and the sequence number specified in address Q is not
found, the alarm (PS0063) is issued and the canned cycle is not executed.

#3 F0C When the Series 10/11 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a
canned drilling cycle is specified using :
0: Series 10/11 format
1: Series 0 format. However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.

#6 RAB When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
specifies:
0: Increment command.
1: Absolute command with G code system A. With G code system B or C, G90 and
G91 are followed.

#7 RDI When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
is based on:
0: Radius specification.
1: Diameter/radius specification of the drilling axis.

- 216 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TCZ PNA DCY
5103
TCZ DCY SIJ

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SIJ When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001
set to 1), a tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by:
0: Address Q. Set a tool retraction direction in parameter No. 5148.
1: Address I, J, or K.

#2 DCY When an axis (to be used as a drilling axis) perpendicular to the positioning plane is
specified in a drilling canned cycle:
0: The specified axis is used as a drilling axis.
1: The axis specified in the block where the G code for the drilling canned cycle is
specified is used as a drilling axis. The specified axis is used as a positioning axis.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is
set to 1.

#3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 10/11 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter
No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no
axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode:
0: An alarm is issued.
1: No alarm is issued.

#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), an accumulated zero check in the tapping
step (forward, backward) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

Execute a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping) with the servo feed forward (bit 1
(FEED) of parameter No. 2005). If an impact is detected, set this parameter to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PCT FCK
5104
PCT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) (T series), the machining profile is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
The target figure specified by G71 or G72 is checked for the following before machining
operation:

• If the start point of the canned cycle is less than the maximum value of the
machining profile even when the plus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the
alarm (PS0322) is issued.

- 217 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

• If the start point of the canned cycle is greater than the minimum value of the
machining profile even when the minus sign is specified for a finishing allowance,
the alarm (PS0322) is issued.
• If an unmonotonous command of type I is specified for the axis in the cutting
direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.
• If an unmonotonous command is specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the
alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.
• If the program does not include a block that has a sequence number specified by
address Q, the alarm (PS0063) is issued. This check is made, regardless of bit 2
(QSR) of parameter No. 5102.
• If a command (G41/G42) on the blank side in tool nose radius compensation is
inadequate, the alarm (PS0328) is issued.

#6 PCT A Q command in a tapping cycle is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. ((High-speed) peck tapping cycle is assumed.)

When this parameter is set and the depth of cut for each time is specified with address Q
in a tapping cycle command, a peck tapping cycle is assumed.
In a peck tapping cycle, either a high-speed peck tapping cycle or a peck tapping cycle
can be selected by bit 5 (PCP) of parameter No. 5200.
Even when this parameter is set to 1, if Q is not specified or Q0 is specified, normal
tapping is performed.

NOTE
1 Set also parameter No. 5213.
2 In rigid tapping, the Q command is valid regardless of the setting of
this parameter.
3 For the M series, if this parameter is set to 1, the specification
equivalent to the FS0i-C is assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K0D M5T RF2 RF1 SBC
5105
M5T SBC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SBC In each of a drilling canned cycle, chamfering/corner rounding cycle, and optional-angle
chamfering/corner rounding (T series) cycle:
0: A single block stop is not carried out.
1: A single block stop is carried out.

#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) (T series) of type I, roughing is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
setting of this parameter.

- 218 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) (T series) of type II, roughing is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
setting of this parameter.

#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G88 with the
T series, or G84/G74 with the M series):
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03.

NOTE
1 This parameter is equivalent to bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101
of the FS0i-C.
2 For the T series, the logical level (0/1) is opposite to that of the
FS0i-C.

#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89):

0: Drilling operation is not performed, but drilling data only is stored.
1: One drilling operation is performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DTP
5108

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
#1 DTP In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) (T series) of type I, after rough cutting as
finishing,
0: the tool returns to the cycle start point via a point offset by the finishing allowance.
1: the tool returns directly to the cycle start point.

M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle

5110

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999998
This parameter sets an M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle.

Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle

5111

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
10 1 0.1 msec

- 219 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

(The increment system does not depend on whether inch input or metric input is used.)
This parameter sets the dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in a drilling
canned cycle.

Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

5112

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the spindle forward-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE
M03 is output when "0" is set.

Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

5113

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the spindle reverse-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.

NOTE
M04 is output when "0" is set.

5114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle.
G73 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 0)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d

q
d

Z point

5115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
- 220 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.
G83 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 1)

q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d

q
d

Z point

4.23.2 Parameters of Thread Cutting Cycle (T Series)

Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76
5130

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] 0.1
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the thread cutting cycle (G76)
of a multiple repetitive canned cycle (T series) and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of a
canned cycle.
Let L be a lead. Then, a cutting value range from 0.1L to 12.7L is allowed.
To specify a cutting value of 10.0L, for example, specify 100 in this parameter.

Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76

5131

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 1 to 89
This parameter sets the cutting angle in the thread cutting cycle (G76) of a multiple
repetitive canned cycle (T series) and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of a canned cycle.
When 0 is set, an angle of 45 degrees is specified.

4.23.3 Parameters of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle (T Series)

Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5132

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
- 221 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 (T
series).
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5133

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 (T
series).

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Clearance value in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5134

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a clearance value up to the cutting feed start point in multiple
repetitive canned cycles (G71/G72) (T series).

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (second axis on the plane)
5135

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)

- 222 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets a retraction distance along the second axis on the plane in the
multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (T series). This parameter is not used with the Series
10/11 program format.

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (first axis on the plane)
5136

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a retraction distance along the first axis on the plane in the multiple
repetitive canned cycle G73 (T series). This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11
program format.

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

5137

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Cycle
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
(T series).
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

Return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75

5139

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75 (T
series).

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

- 223 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5140

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
(T series) so that the depth of cut does not become too small when the depth of cut is
constant.

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5141

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T
series).

NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.

Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5142

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Cycle
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the number of final finishing cycle repeats in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76 (T series).
When 0 is set, only one final finishing cycle is executed.

Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5143

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 (T series).
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.

- 224 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5145

[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real path
[Unit of data]
mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range]
0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
If a monotonous command of type I or II is not specified for the axis in the roughing
direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created
automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned
allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can
be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure.
[Example] Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is minus
and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when
an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the plus direction along the Z-axis
is specified in a target figure program, roughing can be performed according to the
programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.

NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool
nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation
is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a
check is made before G71or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not
a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path
is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.

Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5146

[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real path
[Unit of data]
mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range]
0 to cut of depth
If a monotonous command of type I is not specified for the axis in the cutting direction,
the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very
small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such
an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a
program including an unmonotonous figure.
The allowable value is clamped to the depth of cut specified by a multiple repetitive
canned cycle.
[Example] Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is minus
and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case, when
an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the minus direction along the
X-axis is specified in a target figure program for moving from the bottom of cutting to the
end point, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an
alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.

- 225 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool
nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation
is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a
check is made before G71 or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not
a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path
is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.

4.23.4 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Drilling (2 of 2)

5148
Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] -5 to 5
This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spindle orientation in a
fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For each boring axis, an axis and direction for tool
retraction after orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number. To use a fine boring
cycle or back boring cycle in the tilted working plane indexing, set the retract direction
when the absolute coordinate value of the rotation axis is 0.

[Example] Suppose that:

When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -Y.
When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is +Z.
When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -X.
Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes are the X-axis,
Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively):
Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.)
Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.)
Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction is -X.)
Set 0 for other axes.

5149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85/G89)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 2000
This parameter sets an override value for the feedrate of retraction in a boring cycle. The
cutting feedrate override signal is valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter. The
setting of this parameter is valid even when the override cancel signal is set to 1.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the following operation is performed:
For the T series
Operation performed when 200 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is two
times greater than the cutting feedrate.)
For the M series
Operation performed when 100 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is the
cutting feedrate.)

- 226 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CYM
5160
TSG CYM NOL OLS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.

#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque detection signal
is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.

#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block specifying other commands in the canned
cycle mode:
0: No alarm is issued. (When a command of address P is specified, the command is
handled as both a command specifying a dwell time and a command specifying a
subprogram number in a canned cycle.)
1: An alarm is issued.

#4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series)
on the parameter setting of the skip function:
0: Exists.
1: Does not exist.

NOTE
When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is
disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque
detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0)
of parameter No. 6200 is valid.

5163
M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small
diameter.

5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload
torque detection signal is received

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255

- 227 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted because the overload torque detection signal is
received.
S2 = S1 × d1 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d1 as a percentage.

NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.

5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing when no overload
torque detection signal is received

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted without the overload torque detection signal
received.
S2 = S1 × d2 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d2 as a percentage.

NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.

5166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque
detection signal is received

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances because the overload torque detection
signal is received.
F2 = F1 × b1 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b1 as a percentage.

NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.

5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting when no overload
torque detection signal is received

[Input type] Parameter input

- 228 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances without the overload torque detection
signal received.
F2 = F1 × b2 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b2 as a percentage.

NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.

5168
Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed
repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F × b3 ÷ 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
Set b3 as a percentage.

5170
Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions during cutting

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting. The total number cannot be
output to common variables #500 to #599.

5171 Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions because of the
reception of an overload torque detection signal

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted after the overload torque detection signal is
received during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to
#599.

5172
Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified

[Input type] Parameter input

- 229 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Real path

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified.

5173
Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is specified

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a
previously machined hole when no address I is specified.

5174
Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.

4.23.5 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Grinding (for Grinding

Machine)
Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71)
5176
Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, alarm PS0456 is also is
issued.

- 230 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72)
5177
Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle
(G77).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, alarm PS0456 is also
issued.

Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73)

5178
Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, alarm PS0456 is also
issued.

Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74)

5179
Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding
Cycle(G74).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).

- 231 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, alarm PS0456 is also
issued.

5180
Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.

5181
Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding
cycle(G75).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.

5182
Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).

- 232 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.

5183
Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).

NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.

4.24 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SRS FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84
5200
FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping:

0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the
G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.5210).
1: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84 cannot be used as a
G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used for the reverse tapping cycle.)

#2 CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01 group G code,
reset, etc.) :
0: Canceled after rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to "0".
1: Canceled before rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to "0".

#3 SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SINDs is:
0: Not permitted.
1: Permitted.

#4 DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated (The override value is set in parameter No.5211. However, set an override
value for rigid tapping return in parameter No.5381.)
- 233 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#5 PCP Address Q is specified in a tapping cycle/rigid tapping:

0: A high-speed peck tapping cycle is assumed.
1: A peck tapping cycle is assumed.

NOTE
In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 is 1. When bit 6 (PCT) of parameter No.
5104 is 0, a (high-speed) peck tapping cycle is not assumed.

#6 FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated

#7 SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi-spindle control:

0: The spindle selection signals SWS1 and SWS2 are used. (These signals are used
also for multi-spindle control.)
1: The rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1 and RGTSP2 are used. (These
signals are provided expressly for rigid tapping.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5201 OV3 OVU TDR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping:

0: Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos. 5261 through
5264)
1: Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting
Parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction

#3 OVU The increment unit of the override parameter No. 5211 for tool rigid tapping extraction
and No. 5381 for tool rigid tapping return is:
0: 1%
1: 10%

#4 OV3 A spindle speed for extraction is programmed, so override for extraction operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5202 OVE IRR RG3 ORI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

- 234 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#0 ORI When rigid tapping is started:
0: Spindle orientation is not performed.
1: Spindle orientation is performed.
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
This spindle orientation performs reference position return in the serial spindle/servo
mode. The stop position can be changed using the serial spindle parameter No.4073.

#1 RG3 A rigid tapping return operation is specified:

0: With Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT <G062.6>.
1: With one-shot G code G30.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is 1, retraction for rigid tapping using the rigid
tapping retraction start signal RTNT <Gn062.6> cannot be
performed.
2 When this parameter is 1, use the method to use the M code of
rigid tapping mode. (Parameter G84(bit 0 of No.5200)=0)

#4 IRR As the in-position width at point R after movement from point I to point R in rigid
tapping:
0: The in-position widths dedicated to rigid tapping (parameters Nos. 5300 and 5302)
are selected.
1: The normal in-position width (parameter No.1826) is selected.

#6 OVE The specification range of extraction override command (address J) by rigid tapping
program specification is:
0: 100% to 200%.
1: 100% to 2000%.

NOTE
1 To enable the extraction override command (address J) by
program specification, set bit 4 (OV3) of parameter No.5201 to 1.
2 When this parameter is set to 1, the operation equivalent to that of
the FS0i-C is assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OVS RFF HRM HRG
5203
RBL OVS RFF HRM HRG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction during rigid tapping controlled by
the manual handle, the direction in which the spindle rotates is determined as follows:
0: In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. In G74 mode, the spindle
rotates in reverse.
1: In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in a
normal direction.

- 235 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 RFF In rigid tapping, feed forward is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (Recommended)

As the standard setting, set 1.

At the same time, set the parameter for the advanced preview feed forward coefficient for
the tapping axis and the parameter for the advanced preview feed forward coefficient for
the spindle so that these values match.
• Advanced preview feed forward coefficient for the tapping axis: Parameter No.2092
(or parameter No.2144 if the cutting/rapid traverse feed forward function is enabled
(bit 4 of parameter No.2214 is set to 1))
• Advanced preview feed forward coefficient for the spindle: Parameter No.4344

NOTE
This parameter is valid when a serial spindle is used.

#4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select signal and cancellation of
override by the override cancel signal is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When feedrate override is enabled, extraction override is disabled.
The spindle override is clamped to 100% during rigid tapping, regardless of the setting of
this parameter.

#5 RBL As acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping cutting feed:

0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.

NOTE
The rigid tapping bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is
required.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RIP RTX
5209
RIP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RTX In rigid tapping in a T series, the tapping axis is:

0: Selected by selecting a plane.
1: Always assumed to be the Z-axis for G84 or the X-axis for G88.

NOTE
This parameter becomes invalid when bit 1 (FCV) of parameter
No.0001 is set to 1, and rigid tapping is specified using the
Series10/11 format.

#1 RIP When a movement from the initial point to point R is made, the in-position check is:
0: Dependent on the setting of bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601.
1: Performed.

- 236 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No.1601 is
set to 1 and bit 4 (IRR) of parameter No.5202 is set to 0.
If bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No.1601 is set to 0, the in-position check
is performed regardless of the setting of this parameter.

5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when 0 is set.

5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] 1% or 10%
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.

NOTE
The override value is valid when bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No.5200 is
set to 1. When bit 3 (OVU) of parameter No.5201 is set to 1, the unit
of set data is 10%. An override of up to 2000% can be applied to
extraction.

5213 Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the escape value of a high-speed peck tapping cycle or the clearance
value of a peck tapping cycle.

- 237 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200) is When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200)
set to 0. is set to 1.

q : Depth of cut q : Depth of cut

d : Return value d : Clearance value

R point R point
q q
d d

q q
d d

q q

Z point Z point

NOTE
1 In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 is 1.
2 For the diameter axis, set this parameter using the diameter value.

5214 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization error range

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets an allowable synchronization error range in rigid tapping.
If a synchronous error range exceeding the setting of this parameter is detected, the alarm
(SP0741) is issued. When 0 is set in this parameter, no synchronization error check is
made.

5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (first gear)

5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (second gear)

5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (third gear)

Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5224

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
Each of these parameters is used to set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for
each gear in rigid tapping.

NOTE
When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value
for all of parameters No.5221 through No.5224.

5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (first gear)

- 238 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (second gear)

5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (third gear)

Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5234

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
Each of these parameters is used to set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side
for each gear in rigid tapping.

NOTE
When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value
for all of parameters No.5231 through No.5234.

5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first gear)

5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second gear)

5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third gear)

Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth gear)

5244

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Spindle position coder gear ratio
1 : 1 0 to 7400
1 : 2 0 to 9999
1 : 4 0 to 9999
1 : 8 0 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for each gear in rigid
tapping.
Set the same value for both parameter No.5241 and parameter No.5243 for a one-stage
gear system. For a two-stage gear system, set the same value as set in parameter No. 5242
in parameter No. 5243. Otherwise, alarm PS0200 will be issued. This applies to the M
series.

5261 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (first gear)

5262 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (second gear)

5263 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (third gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping for each gear (fourth gear)
5264

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
- 239 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 0 to 4000

Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/ deceleration time constant
for the spindle of each gear and the tapping axis in rigid tapping.
Set the period required to reach each maximum spindle speed (parameters No.5241 to
No.5244).
The set time constant, multiplied by the ratio of a specified S value to a maximum spindle
speed, is actually used as a time constant.
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set a time constant for a linear portion.

5271 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first gear)

5272 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (second gear)

5273 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (third gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (fourth gear)

5274

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/ deceleration time constant
for the spindle of each gear and tapping axis in extraction operation during rigid tapping.
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, set a time constant for a linear portion.

NOTE
These parameters are enabled when the parameter TDR (bit 2 of
parameter No.5201) is set to 1.

5280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to gears)

Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5281
(first gear)

Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5282
(second gear)

Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5283
(third gear)

Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5284 (fourth gear)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] 0.01/sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for the spindle and
tapping axis in rigid tapping. These parameters significantly affect the precision of
threading. Conduct cutting tests, and make adjustments to obtain an optimum value.
When performing threading with an analog spindle, also adjust the loop gain multipliers
(parameter Nos. 5291 to 5294).

- 240 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
To use a varied loop gain on a gear-by-gear basis, set parameter
No.5280 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gear in parameters
No.5281 to No.5284. The specification of a loop gain on a
gear-by-gear basis is disabled if parameter No.5280 is set to a
value other than 0. In such a case, the value set in parameter
No.5280 is used as a loop gain that is common to all the gears.

5291 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (first gear)

5292 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (second gear)

5293 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (third gear)

Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
5294

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
Each of these parameters is used to set a loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid
tapping each gear.
These parameters significantly affect the precision of threading. Optimize these
parameters as well as the loop gains by conducting a cutting test.
Loop gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:
2048000 × 360 × PC × E
GC =
PLS × SP × L
PLS Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)
SP Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
PC Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
E Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000 min-1
L Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindle motor rotation
[Example] For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC is calculated as follows:
2048000 × 360 × 1× 2.2
GC = = 1100
4096 × 1× 360
PLS = 4096 pulse/rev
SP = 1
PC = 1
E = 2.2 V
L = 360 deg
(Note) On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500 min-1 at 10 V, 2.2 V
is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000 min-1.

NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.

5300 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (first spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

- 241 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets a tapping axis in-position width when rigid tapping is performed
using the first spindle.

NOTE
Set the following parameter for each spindle:
First spindle No.5300
Second spindle No.5302

5301 Spindle in-position width in rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
These parameters are used to set spindle in-position widths in rigid tapping.

NOTE
If an excessively large value is specified, the threading precision
will deteriorate.

5302 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (second spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets a tapping axis in-position width when rigid tapping is performed
using the second spindle.

5310 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (first spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in
rigid tapping using the first spindle.

NOTE
Set the following parameter for each spindle:
First spindle No.5310
Second spindle No.5350

5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation during movement in
rigid tapping.
Find a value to be set from the following expression:

- 242 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
S × PLS × 100 × SP × C
Setting value =
60 × G × PC
S Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (min-1)
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater)
PLS Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)
SP Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
PC Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
G Loop gain in the rigid tapping (0.01sec-1)
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5281 and greater)
C Coefficient 1.5
(Calculation example)

SPINDLE
MOTOR
Position
Spindle coder

10 : 10 : 20

S = 3600
PLS = 4096
SP = 10
PC = 20
G = 3000
C = 1.5
3600 × 4096 × 100 × 10 × 1.5
Setting value = = 6144
60 × 3000 × 20

5312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (first spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped
in rigid tapping using the first spindle.

NOTE
Set the following parameter for each spindle:
First spindle No.5312
Second spindle No.5352

5313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
- 243 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is
stopped in rigid tapping.

5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first-stage gear)

5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second-stage gear)

5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third-stage gear)

Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (fourth-stage gear)

5324

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a spindle backlash in rigid tapping.

5350 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping (second spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in
rigid tapping using the second spindle.

5352 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (second spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is
stopped in rigid tapping using the second spindle.

5365
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (first-stage gear)

5366
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (second-stage gear)

5367
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (third-stage gear)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
Each of these parameters is used to set a time constant for a curved portion when
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is selected in rigid tapping. When 0 is set in this
parameter, linear acceleration/ deceleration is performed.

- 244 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter RBL (bit 5 of
parameter No.5203) is set to 1.

5381 Override value during rigid tapping return

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] % or 10% (The unit of this parameter depends on the parameters OVU (bit 3 of parameter
No.5201))
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
This parameter is used to set the override value during rigid tapping return.
If the setting is 0, no override is applied.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 for
enabling override at normal extraction time is set to 1.
2 When the parameter OVU (bit 3 of No.5201) is set to 1, the data
unit of this parameter is 10%.
3 If the setting value is less than or equal to 0, it is treated as 100%.
Also, if the setting value is greater than 200, it is treated as 2000%
or 200%.

5382 Amount of return for rigid tapping return

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter is used to set an extra amount of rigid tapping return. The tool is retracted
additionally near point R by the distance set in this parameter. If the tool has already been
retracted from rigid tapping, it will be retracted further only by the distance specified in
this parameter.

NOTE
If a negative value is set in this parameter, it is treated as a positive
value.

4.25 PARAMETERS OF SCALING (M SERIES) /COORDINATE

ROTATION (M SERIES)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LV3 D3R
5400
SCR XSC LV3 D3R RIN

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 245 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R) :

0: Specified by an absolute method
1: Specified by an absolute method (G90) or incremental method (G91)

#2 D3R When Reset is done by reset operation or reset signal from PMC, 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode or tilted working plane indexing mode is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.

#5 LV3 When system variables #100101 to #100132 (current position coordinates) and #100151
to #100182 (skip coordinates) are read in the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
mode or tilted working plane indexing mode:
0: Coordinates of the workpiece coordinate system can be read.
1: Coordinates of the program coordinate system after 3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion or tilted working plane indexing can be read.
This parameter applies also to system variables #5041 to #5047 (current position
coordinates) and #5061 to #5067 (skip coordinates).

#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit:

0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5401
SCLx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5402 DMK

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 DMK The manual handle interruption screen is displayed:

0: Using the program coordinate system (post-conversion coordinate system).
1: Using the workpiece coordinate system (pre-conversion coordinate system).
This parameter is valid only in 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.

5410
Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] 0.001 degree
[Valid data range] -360000 to 360000
- 246 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. When the
angular displacement for coordinate system rotation is not specified with address R in the
block where G68 is specified, the setting of this parameter is used as the angular
displacement for coordinate system rotation.

5411
Scaling (G51) magnification

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No.5400)
[Valid data range] 1to999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with
bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in
the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.

NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400 is set to 1, the valid data
range is 1 to 9999999.

5412 Rapid traverse rate for canned cycle for drilling in 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for canned cycle for drilling in the 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode or the tilted working plane indexing mode.

5421
Scaling magnification for each axis

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No.5400)
[Valid data range] -999999999 to –1, 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is
enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first axis to the third
axis (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification if
scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.

NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400 is set to 1, the valid data
ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.

- 247 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.26 PARAMETERS OF SINGLE DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING

(M SERIES)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5431
PDI MDL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 MDL The G60 code (one-direction positioning) is:

0: One-shot G code (group 00).
1: Modal G code (group 01).

#1 PDI In the G60 mode, an in-position check at a stop position is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

5440
Positioning direction and overrun distance in single directional positioning

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the positioning direction and overrun distance in single directional
positioning (G60) for each axis. The positioning direction is specified using a setting data
sign, and the overrun distance using a value set here.
Overrun distance>0: The positioning direction is positive (+).
Overrun distance<0: The positioning direction is negative (-).
Overrun distance=0: Single directional positioning is not performed.

4.27 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE

INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PLS PDI
5450

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PDI When the second axis on the plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode is based on
radius specification:
0: Radius specification is used.
1: Diameter specification is used.
- 248 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#2 PLS The polar coordinate interpolation shift function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
This enables machining using the workpiece coordinate system with a desired point
which is not the center of the rotation axis set as the origin of the coordinate system in
polar coordinate interpolation.

Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation

5460

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets control axis numbers of linear axis to execute polar interpolation.

Axis (rotation axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation

5461

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets control axis numbers of rotation axis to execute polar interpolation.

Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate interpolation

5463

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Typical setting: 90% (treated as 90% when set to 0)
Set the tolerance ratio of the fastest cutting feedrate to the speed of the rotation axis
during automatic override of polar coordinate interpolation.

Compensation for error on hypothetical axis of polar coordinate interpolation

5464

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter is used to set the error if the center of the rotation axis on which polar
coordinate interpolation is performed is not on the X-axis.
If the setting of the parameter is 0, regular polar coordinate interpolation is performed.

- 249 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.28 PARAMETERS OF NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M

SERIES)

5480
Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum controlled axis number
This parameter sets the controlled axis number of the axis for controlling the normal
direction.

5481
Feedrate of rotation of the normal direction controlled axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] deg/min
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal direction controlled
axis that is inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.

5482 Limit value used to determine whether to ignore the rotation insertion of the normal direction
controlled axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The rotation block of the normal direction controlled axis is not inserted when the
rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control does not exceed this
setting.
The ignored rotation angle is added to the next rotation insertion angle, and the block
insertion is then judged.

NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted only
when the circular interpolation setting is 180 or more degrees.

5483
Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a preceding block

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

- 250 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (B)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
N2
Tool center path
For straight line
When the travel distance of N2 in the figure on
N3 the left does not exceed the setting, block N2 is
N1 machined with the tool being normal to block N1.
Travel distance

Programmed path

N2
Tool center path
Programmed path
For arc
N3 When the arc diameter of N2 in the figure on
the left does not exceed the setting, arc N2 is
machined with the tool being normal to block
N1 N1. A normal direction axis is not controlled to
move in the normal direction according to the
Diameter arc movement.

4.29 PARAMETERS OF INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5500
IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DDP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command for the index table indexing
axis:
0: The conventional method is used. (Example IS-B: B1; = 0.001 deg)
1: The pocket calculator method is used. (Example IS-B: B1; = 1.000 deg)

#1 REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.

#2 ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.

- 251 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
Be sure to set this parameter to 1.
If an absolute programming is commanded to the index table
indexing axis when this parameter is set to 0, the position display of
the absolute coordinate system may be not corresponding to the
absolute programming value like the following example.

Example) When indexing by rotating in a positive direction :

N10 G90 B20.;
N20 B10.; ← It rotates in a positive direction by 350 degree.
At this time, 370.0 is displayed to the position
display of the absolute coordinate system.

#3 INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction (parameter No.5511) is
not set, rotation in the G90 mode is:
0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference.
1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference. (Set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter
No.5500, to 1.)

#4 G90 A command for the index table indexing axis is:

0: Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command according to the mode.
1: Always assumed to be an absolute command.

#6 SIM When the same block includes a command for the index table indexing axis and a
command for another controlled axis:
0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No.5502 is followed.
1: The commands are executed.

NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) ”INDEX
TABLE AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME” is issued if the block is
neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).

#7 IDX Operation sequence of the index table indexing axis:

0: Type A
1: Type B

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5501
ISP ITI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ITI The index table indexing function is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

- 252 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
To enable the index table indexing function, set bit 3 (IXC) of
parameter No. 8132 to 1 in addition to this parameter. The index
table indexing function is enabled only when both ITI and IXC are
enabled.

#1 ISP Servo-off for an index axis at the completion of clamping is:

0: Processed by the CNC.
1: Not processed by the CNC. (The CNC follows the status of the servo-off signal
SVFx <G0126> input from the PMC.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5502
IXSx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 IXSx When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for the index table
indexing axis:
0 : An alarm (PS1564) “INDEX TABLE AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME” is
issued.
1 : The command is executed.

If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No.5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous operation with all axes
except the index table indexing axis can be performed regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set SIM to 0, and set this
parameter.

NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued
if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).

5510
Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the number of a controlled axis to be used as the index table indexing
axis.
When the setting value is 0, it is assumed that the fourth axis is the index table indexing
axis if the number of control axes is four or more,
and is assumed that the final axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control
axes is three or less.

- 253 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

5511
M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table indexing

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is determined according to
the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500 and a command.
1 to 99999999:
The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always performed in the positive
direction. Rotation in the negative direction is performed only when the M code
set in this parameter is specified together with a movement command.

NOTE
Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500 to 1.

5512
Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance) for the index table
indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the positioning command must always be
an integer multiple of this setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked.
The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command, but also for the
coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.

NOTE
When the setting is 0, specification can be performed regardless of
the minimum angle.

4.30 PARAMETERS OF FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION

CONTROL (1 OF 2)
5660 Master axis number (group A)

5661 Slave axis number (group A)

5662 Master axis number (group B)

5663 Slave axis number (group B)

5664 Master axis number (group C)

5665 Slave axis number (group C)

5666 Master axis number (group D)

5667 Slave axis number (group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

- 254 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data Input type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes or m × 100+n
(m: 1 to Number of paths, n: 1 to Number of controlled axes)
Specify both master and slave axis numbers.
[Example of setting]
1 to 24: Controlled axes on own path (for single-path systems only)
101 to 124: Controlled axes on path 1
201 to 224: Controlled axes on path 2

In inter-path flexible synchronization control, an axis of a path can be specified as the

master axis of another path.

NOTE
In inter-path flexible synchronization control, an axis of any path
cannot be specified as the slave axis of another path.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5668 ACD ACC ACB ACA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data Input type] Bit axis

#0 ACA Update of the machine coordinates of flexible synchronization control group A is:
0 : Executed.
1 : Not executed.

#1 ACB Update of the machine coordinates of flexible synchronization control group B is:
0 : Executed.
1 : Not executed.

#2 ACC Update of the machine coordinates of flexible synchronization control group C is:
0 : Executed.
1 : Not executed.

#3 ACD Update of the machine coordinates of flexible synchronization control group D is:
0 : Executed.
1 : Not executed.

NOTE
The machine coordinates update is not done though the slave axis
operates on the motor.
In this case, if an automatic reference position return to origin is
done after the synchronization mode is canceled, the alarm of
DS0405, “ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF” is issued.
Use a manual reference position return to origin to do the return to
origin.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5669 PHD PHC PHB PHA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data Input type] Bit path

- 255 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 PHA The automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control of group A is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 PHB The automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control of group B is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#2 PHC The automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control of group C is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#3 PHD The automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control of group D is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
When this parameter is set, acceleration/deceleration upon a
synchronization start or synchronization cancellation is enabled.
For automatic positioning, set the automatic phase synchronization
signal for each group to "1".

5670 M code number for turning on the flexible synchronization control mode(group A)

5671 M code number for turning off the flexible synchronization control mode(group A)

5672 M code number for turning on the flexible synchronization control mode(group B)

5673 M code number for turning off the flexible synchronization control mode(group B)

5674 M code number for turning on the flexible synchronization control mode(group C)

5675 M code number for turning off the flexible synchronization control mode(group C)

5676 M code number for turning on the flexible synchronization control mode(group D)

5677 M code number for turning off the flexible synchronization control mode(group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data Input type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
Specify an M code for turning on or off the flexible synchronization control mode for an
automatic operation.

5680 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group A)

5681 Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group A)

5682 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group B)

5683 Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group B)

5684 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group C)

5685 Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group C)

5686 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group D)

- 256 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
5687 Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization(group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data Input type] 2 word path
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
Specify a gear ratio between the master and slave axes.

5690 Index to gear ratio denominator for flexible synchronization(group A)

5691 Index to gear ratio denominator for flexible synchronization(group B)

5692 Index to gear ratio denominator for flexible synchronization(group C)

5693 Index to gear ratio denominator for flexible synchronization(group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data Input type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
Specify an index to the denominator of a gear ratio between the master and slave axes.
Let p, q, and k be, respectively, a denominator determining gear ratio for flexible
synchronization, numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization, and index
to the gear ratio denominator for flexible synchronization:
q
The gear ratio is
p × 10 k

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5694 HOB

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 HOB The command of G80 and G81 or G80.4 and G81.4 is:
0: Used with "Electronic gear box".
1: Used with "Hob command by flexible synchronization control".

NOTE
It is selected whether to use G80 and G81 or G80.4 and G81.4 by
bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No.7731.

Group number to which feed per revolution can be performed based on the rotation compensated with
5695
a synchronization coefficient of a slave axis of flexible synchronization control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
The group number of flexible synchronization control which slave axis used with feed per
revolution belongs is set.
Feed per revolution can be performed based on the rotation compensated with a
synchronization coefficient of a slave axis of flexible synchronization control .
Set the group number of flexible synchronization control as follows.

- 257 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Group A = 1, Group B = 2, Group C = 3, Group D = 4

If this parameter is set to 0, feed per revolution is performed based on the feedback pulse.

4.31 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE STRAIGHTNESS

COMPENSATION (M SERIES)

5711
Simple straightness compensation : Axis number of moving axis 1

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of a moving axis in simple straight compensation.
When 0 is set, compensation is not performed.

5721 Simple straightness compensation :

Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of a compensation axis in simple straight compensation.
When 0 is set, compensation is not performed.

5731
Simple straightness compensation : Compensation point number a of moving axis 1

5732
Simple straightness compensation : Compensation point number b of moving axis 1

5733
Simple straightness compensation : Compensation point number c of moving axis 1

5734
Simple straightness compensation : Compensation point number d of moving axis 1

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] Detection unit

- 258 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
These parameters set compensation point numbers in stored pitch error compensation.
Set four compensation points for each moving axis.

5761
Compensation corresponding compensation point number a of moving axis 1

5762
Compensation corresponding compensation point number b of moving axis 1

5763
Compensation corresponding compensation point number c of moving axis 1

5764
Compensation corresponding compensation point number d of moving axis 1

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -32767 to 32767
Each of these parameters sets a compensation value for each moving axis compensation
point.

4.32 PARAMETERS OF INCLINATION COMPENSATION

5861 Inclination compensation : Compensation point number a for each axis

5862 Inclination compensation : Compensation point number b for each axis

5863 Inclination compensation : Compensation point number c for each axis

5864 Inclination compensation : Compensation point number d for each axis

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
These parameters set the compensation points for inclination compensation. The points
are set for the compensation point numbers for stored pitch error compensation.

5871 Inclination compensation : Compensation α at compensation point number a for each axis

5872 Inclination compensation : Compensation β at compensation point number b for each axis

5873 Inclination compensation : Compensation γ at compensation point number c for each axis

- 259 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

5874 Inclination compensation : Compensation δ at compensation point number d for each axis

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -32767 to 32767
Each of these parameters sets a compensation value for each axis compensation point.

- 260 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.33 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SBV SBM HGO MGO G67
6000
SBV SBM HGO V10 MGO G67

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call
mode (G66) is not set:
0: Alarm PS0122 is issued.
1: The specification of G67 is ignored.

#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the
executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.

#3 V10 As system variable numbers for tool offset:

0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 0 are used.
1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 10/11 are used.
The tables below indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 400. The
values for tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system
variables in parentheses.
(1) Tool offset memory A
System variable number
V10 = 0 V10 = 1
#10001 to #10400 #10001 to #10400
Wear offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2001 to #2200)
(2) Tool offset memory C
System variable number
V10 = 0 V10 = 1
#11001 to #11400 #10001 to #10400
Wear offset value
Tool length (#2201 to #2400) (#2001 to #2200)
offset #10001 to #10400 #11001 to #11400
Geometry offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2201 to #2400)
Tool radius Wear offset value #13001 to #13400 #12001 to #12400
offset Geometry offset value #12001 to #12400 #13001 to #13400

#4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed
branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.

#5 SBM Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable
#3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom
macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single
blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of
parameter No. 6000.

- 261 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 SBV Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003
Parameter SBM (No.6000#5)
0 1
0 Disables single block stop. Enables single block stop. (With
Parameter SBV variable #3003, single block stop
Enables single block stop. (With
(No.6000#7) cannot be enabled/disabled. Single
1 variable #3003, single block stop
block stop is enabled at all times.)
can be enabled/disabled.)

NOTE
1 In the cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, the block
look-ahead operation is performed even in single-block operation to
calculate a path intersection after offsetting. So, a macro statement
is also executed when read in advance. Therefore, turn off the
cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, when the single
block operation is enabled for custom macro statements by SBM=1
or SBV=1.
2 When the single block operation is enabled for custom macro
statements by SBM=1 or SBV=1, a custom macro statement block
is assumed to be an NC statement block that does not involve
movement. Therefore, the motion may differ between the normal
operation and the single block operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:

0: Standard specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.)
1: Extended specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are
used.)

#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command

0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data

#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:

0: #500 to #999 are output.
1: #100 to #199 and #500 to 999 are output.

#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command

0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output
1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output

#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram)

0: Not called using a T code
1: Called using a T code
- 262 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #199 cleared by power-off are:

0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MUS MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#1 MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt

0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)

#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt

0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)

#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT

0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method

#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)

#5 MSB Interrupt program

0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)

#7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macro

0: Not used
1: Used

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
VHD NAT
6004
D10 NAT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are
specified as follows:
0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.
1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.

- 263 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5127:

0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is
read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation
memories are available (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0)).
1: An interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt is read.

#5 D10 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for
up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401
through #2800, as Series 10/11 are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
When bit 3 (V10) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
D code
Compensation Geometry Wear
number Variable number Variable name Variable number Variable name
1 #2401 [#_OFSDG[1]] #2601 [#_OFSDW[1]]
2 #2402 [#_OFSDG[2]] #2602 [#_OFSDW[2]]
3 #2403 [#_OFSDG[3]] #2603 [#_OFSDW[3]]
: : : : :
199 #2599 [#_OFSDG[199]] #2799 [#_OFSDW[199]]
200 #2600 [#_OFSDG[200]] #2800 [#_OFSDW[200]]

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6005 SQC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SQC In the subprogram call function, a subprogram sequence number call is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6007 CVA MGE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 MGE Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or for each block.
0: Make a call for each block.
1: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66).

NOTE
When a negative value is set in the parameter (No.6038) or the
parameter (No.6050 to No.6059), this custom macro call by G code
becomes a modal call.
It is necessary to set this parameter to make a modal call an after
movement call which corresponds to G66.

#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:

0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.

- 264 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Example)
When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling
program is set as follows:
Command CVA=0 CVA=1
#24 0.01 0.01
ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01

NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 IJK GMP ADD ISO KOP MCA F0C

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 F0C The precision of operation is based on:

0: New specification.
1: FS0i-C compatible specification.

NOTE
For details, refer to the custom macro chapter in the OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (B-64304EN).

#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows:
0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and
the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to
variable #3000.)
1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A
value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)
(Example)
Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0:
The alarm screen displays "MC 3001 ALARM MESSAGE".
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1:
The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".

#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made open by POPEN:
0: Communication continues, and the line is left open.
1: Communication stops, and the line is closed.

#4 ISO
0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *,
=, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,
*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.

#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the format specification [a,b] of the
DPRNT statement is less than the number of digits in the integer part of an output
variable value:
0: The specified number of digits only are output, with the unspecified digits discarded.
1: An alarm for excessive digits is issued.

- 265 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#6 GMP The calling of M, T, or a particular code during the calling of a G code, and the calling of
a G code during the calling of M, T, or particular code are:
0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, T, and NC address.)
1: Allowed.

#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments:

0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined.
1: Argument specification I is always used.

Example
When K_J_I_ is specified:
• When this parameter is set to 0:
Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10
are specified.
• When this parameter is set to1:
Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are
specified regardless of the specification order.
(Argument specification II cannot be used.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.

=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.
]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.

- 266 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DPD MCO
6019
MSV MCO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MCO When data is output, the decimal number value of the macro variable data is
0: Not output as a comment.
1: Output at the same time as a comment.

After the number, data, and the variable name of the macro variable are output when data
output operation is performed the variable number and the value of the macro variable
data in decimal number are output as a comment.

NOTE
1 Output data by this parameter is "Comment", and this is ignored at
the time of reading.
2 Accuracy of the output data of the comment is up to 15 digits. The
range of output data are nine digits above decimal point and eight
digits below decimal point. "± OVER FLOW" is output instead of a
value when the total digits number is more than 16 and the digit
number above the decimal point is ten or more. When the number
of digits below the decimal point becomes nine digits or more, the
ninth place of the decimal point is rounded off and output.
Moreover, the seventh place or the eighth place of the decimal
point is rounded off and output when the total digits number is more
than 16 and the digit number above decimal point is nine or eight.
3 The output becomes "EMPTY" when displayed, the macro variable
data is "DATA EMPTY".

#2 DPD When no decimal point is specified for argument D of a macro call, the number of
decimal places is:
0: 0.
Example) If G65 P_ D1 is specified, #7 = 1.000 is passed as an argument.
1: Determined by the set unit of reference axis.
Example) When the reference axis is IS-B, if G65 P_ D1 is specified, #7 = 0.001 is
passed as an argument.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, the operation equivalent to that of
the FS0i-TC is assumed.

#4 MSV When Tool length compensation shift type is used, Tool offset value is :
#5041 - #5047 (Current position)
#5061 - #5067 (Skip position):
0: included in above-mentioned system value.
1: not included in above-mentioned system value.

6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
- 267 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.

6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 500 to 999
Among the common variables (#500 to #999), the range of common variables specified
by this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write
attempt (on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.

NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect
common variables.

6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt

6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters can be used when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No.6003, is 1. M96 is used
as a valid M code and M97 is used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of
the state of this parameter.

Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199)
6036

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example
When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #199: Used by each path independently

NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.

- 268 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)
6037

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 500
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.

Example
When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037
#500 to #549: Shared by all paths
#550 to #999: Used by each path independently

NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.

6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999

6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999

6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in
parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered. It is
necessary to set 1 in bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.6007 to make a modal call correspond
to G66.
[Example] When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No. 6040 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099

- 269 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.

NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No.6039 + value of parameter No.6040 - 1)
> 9999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameter No.6050 to No.6059, the calls specified by
parameter No.6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.

6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999

6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999

6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling.

[Example] When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter No.
6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099

- 270 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6045 + value of parameter No. 6046 -
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by
parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.

6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999

6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999

6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling.
[Example] When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No.
6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099

- 271 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6048 + value of parameter No. 6049 -
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls
specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made
preferentially.

6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011

6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012

6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013

6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014

6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015

6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016

6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017

6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018

6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11. It is
necessary to set 1 in bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.6007 to make a modal call correspond
to G66.

6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001

6072 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9002

6073 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9003

6074 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9004

6075 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9005

6076 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9006

- 272 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
6077 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9007

6078 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9008

6079 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9009

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to
9009.

NOTE
If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No.
6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist,
O9001 is called when M100 is specified.

6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020

6081 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9021

6082 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9022

6083 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9023

6084 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9024

6085 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9025

6086 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9026

6087 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9027

6088 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9028

6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The
simple call mode is set.

- 273 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No.
6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 6071 to No. 6079)
used to call subprograms and in a parameter (No. 6080 to No.
6089) used to call custom macros, a custom macro is called
preferentially. For example, if 300 is set in parameter No. 6071 and
No. 6081, and programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is
called when M300 is specified.

6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004

6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
The settable addresses are indicated below.

Address Parameter setting value T series M series

A 65 O O
B 66 O O
D 68 X O
F 70 O O
H 72 O O
I 73 O O
J 74 O O
K 75 O O
L 76 O O
M 77 O O
P 80 O O
Q 81 O O
R 82 O O
S 83 O O
T 84 O O
V 86 X O
X 88 X O
Y 89 X O
Z 90 X O

NOTE
1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified.
2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.

6095 Number of programs used by the one-touch macro call function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 16
This parameter registers the number of programs used by the one-touch macro call
function.
For example, when this parameter is set to 3, macro call start signals MCST1, MCST2,
and MCST3 are enabled.
- 274 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
When this parameter is set to 0, the one-touch macro call function is disabled.

6096 Number of the first program in the program group used by the one-touch macro call function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter registers the number of the first program in the program group used by the
one-touch macro call function.
For example, when this parameter is set to 9000, macro call start signals MCSTx and the
programs started by the signals are given below.
MCST1 signal: Starts O9000. (when parameter No.6095 is 1 or more)
MCST2 signal: Starts O9001. (when parameter No.6095 is 2 or more)
:::
MCST15 signal: Starts O9014. (when parameter No.6095 is 15 or more)
MCST16 signal: Starts O9015. (when parameter No.6095 is 16 or more)

4.34 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT

6101 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 1 is selected

6102 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 2 is selected

6103 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 3 is selected

6104 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 4 is selected

6105 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 5 is selected

6106 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 6 is selected

6107 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 7 is selected

6108 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 8 is selected

6109 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 9 is selected

6110 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 10 is selected

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0,100 to 199,500 to 999
Set the macro variable number to be selected first when a pattern menu is selected on the
custom macro screen.
If 0 is specified, 500 is assumed.
If a value beyond the above range is entered, 100 is assumed.

4.35 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SRE SLS HSS SK0 GSK

[Input type] Parameter input

- 275 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Bit path

#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP<Gn006.6> is:

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.

#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP<X0004.7> and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8<X0004.2> to
<X0004.1>.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.

#4 HSS
0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.

#5 SLS
0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals
are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are
input.

NOTE
The skip signals SKIP<X0004.7> and SKIP2 to SKIP8<X0004.2>
to <X0004.1> are valid regardless of the setting of this parameter.
They can also be disabled using bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201.
If you want to use high-speed skip signals when the multi-step skip
function option is used, set this parameter to 1.

#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:

0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).

#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

CAUTION
1 When bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 0, feedrate
override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are
disabled in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate
which is specified as a feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
2 Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 1 (SFP)
of parameter No.6207 is set to 1. When the multi-step skip is used
and bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are similarly disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE CSE IGX TSE SEB

[Input type] Parameter input

- 276 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Bit path

#1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function,
or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T
series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to
acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to
obtain the position at which the signal is input.

#2 TSE In a skip by the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99):

0: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is considered (system variables #5061
to #5065 store positions corrected in consideration of the servo system delay
amount).
1: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is not considered (system variables
#5061 to #5065 store positions corrected without consideration of the servo system
delay amount).
Position during skip operation

Current position of CNC

Machine position Error amount

Origin of the coordinate system Stop point

Position in consideration of delay

Position without consideration of delay

#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP<X0004.7>, SKIPP<Gn006.6>, and
SKIP2 to SKIP8<X0004.2> to <X0004.1> are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.

#5 CSE For EGB axis skip function and Skip function for flexible synchronization control,
high-speed skip signals are:
0: Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of bit 6 (SRE) of
SRE parameter No.6200)
1: Effective at both the rising and falling edges.

#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

- 277 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled

IGX GSK SPE Skip Skip Multistage skip
Parameter (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 signal signal signals
#4) #0) #7) SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled

Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

1S1 to 1S8 These parameters specify whether to enable or disable each high-speed skip signal when
the G31 skip command is issued.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The settings of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.

Parameter High-speed skip signals

1S1 HDI0
1S2 HDI1
1S3 HDI2
1S4 HDI3

NOTE
Do not specify the same signal simultaneously for different paths.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 278 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8
Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4)
and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip
function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.

Multi-step skip function

Command G31
Input G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G04
signal G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4
SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2
SKIP3/HDI2 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 DS3
SKIP4/HDI3 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 DS4
SKIP5 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 DS5
SKIP6 1S6 2S6 3S6 4S6 DS6
SKIP7 1S7 2S7 3S7 4S7 DS7
SKIP8 1S8 2S8 3S8 4S8 DS8

NOTE
HDI0 to HDI3 are high-speed skip signals. Do not specify the same
signal simultaneously for different paths.
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1, commands to be skipped can be
selected by setting the following parameter:

Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006.6>

Parameter Command skipped
When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G31P1,G04Q1
When bit 0 (2S1) of parameter No. 6203 is set to 1 G31P2,G04Q2
When bit 0 (3S1) of parameter No. 6204 is set to 1 G31P3,G04Q3
When bit 0 (4S1) of parameter No. 6205 is set to 1 G31P4,G04Q4
When bit 0 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04,G04Q1,G04Q2,G04Q3,G04Q4

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 RHB SFN SFP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.

NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.

- 279 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.

#5 RHB The high-Speed skip status signals HDO is:

0: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed.
1: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.

NOTE
The high-speed skip signal HDI does not change by setting this
parameter. When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open,
the signal HDI is set to "0" and the signal is not assumed to be
input regardless of the setting of this parameter. To assume that
the high-speed skip signal is input when the contact of the signal is
open, set SRE (bit 6 of parameter No.6200) to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6208 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

9S1 to 9S4 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled for EGB axis skip and Skip function for
flexible synchronization control command G31.8.
The settings of each bit have the following meaning:
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
The bits correspond to signals as follows:
Parameter High-speed skip signal
9S1 HDI0
9S2 HDI1
9S3 HDI2
9S4 HDI3

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 MDC ASB ASL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 280 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#3 ASL
#4 ASB
The ASB and ASL bits set the type and time constant of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in the skip function as follows:

ASB ASL Type of acceleration/ deceleration Parameter No. for time constant
0 1 Linear type
Parameter No. 6280
1 - Bell-shaped
0 0 This function is disabled(NOTE).

When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is specified, T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 are obtained

as with normal acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, where T is the
time constant. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration type includes no linear part. To
specify bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, the option for bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is required.

NOTE
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration type is set in bits 0 and 1
(CTL, CTB) of parameter No. 1610, and the time constant is set in
parameter No. 1622.

#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic
tool compensation (T series) is:
0: Added to the current offset.
1: Subtracted from the current offset.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6215 CSTx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 CSTx On a Cs contour control axis, torque limit skip operation is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Torque limit skip operation is performed using the torque limit command signal TLMH
and the load detection signal LDT1 of the serial spindle.

NOTE
When setting this parameter to carry out a torque limit skip on a Cs
contour control axis, keep the following in mind.
1 Set bit 4 of the serial spindle parameter of the Cs contour control
axis (spindle) that uses the torque limit skip function to 1 so that
the load detection signal is output during
acceleration/deceleration.
2 If the load detection state is entered (LDT1 = "1") when the
torque limit command is executed (TLMH1 = "1") in the Cs
mode, the alarm detection level in the stop state is not checked
on the axis.
3 If the load detection state is entered (LDT1 = "1") in the Cs
mode, an in-position check is not performed on the axis.

- 281 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Period during which skip signal input is ignored for EGB axis skip function and Skip function for
6220
flexible synchronization control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] 8msec
[Valid data range] 3 to 127(× 8msec)
This parameter specifies the period from when a skip signal is input to when the next skip
signal can be input for EGB axis skip function and Skip function for flexible
synchronization control.
This parameter is used to ignore chattering in skip signals.
If a value that falls outside the valid range is specified, the setting is assumed to be 24
msec.
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)

Skip signal
This signal is ignored.
When high-speed skip signals are used and bit 5 (CSE) of parameter No. 6201 is set to 1,
signals are handled as follows:
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)

High-speed skip
These signals
signals
are ignored.

6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 2msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time.
If G31P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
If G31P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of
time set in this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6240 IGA AE0

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
- 282 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the measuring position reached signals
XAE1, XAE2, GAE1<Gn517.0>, GAE2<Gn517.1> (T series) or the measuring position
reached signals XAE1, XAE2, XAE3, GAE1<Gn517.0>, GAE2<Gn517.1> and
GAE3<Gn517.2> (M series) are:
0: 1.
1: 0.

NOTE
When 1 is set in this parameter, the state of the signal of GAE1,
GAE2, or GAE3(only M system) must be matched to the state of
the signal of XAE1, XAE2, or XAE3(only M system). If the other
measuring position reached signals are not input, the CNC issues
the PS0080 alarm, “G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED
SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT” to the movement to the
position of the distance γ.

#7 IGA Automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series)
is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1
signals)
6241
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and
GAE1 signals)

Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2
signals)
6242
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and
GAE2 signals)

6243 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and
GAE3 signals)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of automatic tool
compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE
When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is 0, the setting of
parameter No. 6241 is used.

γ value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6251
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals)

- 283 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

γ value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6252
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2 signals)

6253
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and GAE3 signals)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the relevant γ value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is diameter
specification, specify the diameter value.
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is radius
specification, specify the radius value.

6254 ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals)

6255 ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2 signals)

6256
ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and GAE3 signals)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the relevant ε value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).

NOTE
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is diameter
specification, specify the diameter value.
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is radius
specification, specify the radius value.

6280 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
This parameter sets a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the
skip function for each axis.
- 284 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 or bit 4 (ASL) of
parameter No. 6210 is set to 1.

6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)

6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)

6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)

6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6286 TQOx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 TQOx The torque limit override function is:

0: Disabled. (Override of 100%)
1: Enabled.

NOTE
Before the torque limit skip function can be used, this parameter
must be set to 1.

6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
- 285 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 0 to 327670

This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit
skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation
limit, the alarm (SV0004) is issued and an immediate stop takes place.

4.36 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 EEX ESR ESC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 ESC When a reset is input between the input of the external data input read signal ESTB and
the execution of a search, the external program number search function:
0: Performs a search.
1: Does not perform a search.

#4 ESR The external program number search function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 EEX PMC EXIN function

0: Conventional specifications
1: Extended specifications
If you want to use external machine coordinate system shift which handles ±10.000 or
more shift unavailable with the PMC/EXIN command in the conventional specifications,
set 1.
When this function is used for a 2-path system, the setting for path 1 is used.
For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC manuals.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6301 EED NNO EXM EXA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit machine group

#0 EXA This bit selects an external alarm message specification.

0: A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. When displaying an alarm number,
the CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to the alarm number obtained by adding
1000 to the message number.
1: A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC prefixes the character
string "EX" to a alarm number for display.

#1 EXM This bit selects an external operator message specification.

0: A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The message of a message number
from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC adds 2000 to a number
for distinction. A message number from 100 to 999 is not displayed on the screen,
but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.
1: A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message of a message number
from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC prefixes the character
string "EX" to a message number for display. A message number from 100 to 4095
is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on
the screen.
- 286 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#2 NNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a new line operation between one
message set with a number and another message set with a different number is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#3 EED To specify data for external tool compensation and external workpiece coordinate system
shift, use:
0: Signals ED15 to ED0.
(The value which can be specified for tool compensation and workpiece coordinate
system shift is from 0 to ±7999.)
1: Signals ED31 to ED0.
(The value which can be specified for tool compensation and workpiece coordinate
system shift is from 0 to ±79999999.)

6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word machine group
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
This parameter sets the number of messages to which message numbers are to be prefixed
in external operator message display.
When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed.

[Example] When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of message numbers 0 to 499 are
displayed together with their numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is
not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the
screen.

4.37 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MG4 MGO RVN HMP MC8 MC5 FWD RPO
6400
MG4 MGO RVN MC8 MC5 FWD RPO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RPO With the manual handle retrace function, the rapid traverse rate is clamped, assuming
that:
0: An override of 10% is used.
1: An override of 100% is used.

#1 FWD With the manual handle retrace function, program execution can be performed:
0: In both forward and backward directions.
1: In the forward direction only. Execution in the backward direction is not permitted.

- 287 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 MC5
#3 MC8
These parameters set the number of M code groups and the number of M codes per group.
(See explanations of parameters Nos. 6411 to 6490.)

MC5 MC8 M code group setting

0 0 Standard (20 groups of four)
1 0 16 groups of five
0 1 10 groups of eight

When 16 groups of five are used, the meanings of parameters are changed as follows:
Group A No.6411(1) to No.6415(5)
Group B No.6416(1) to No.6420(5)
:
Group P No.6486(1) to No.6490(5)
When 10 groups of eight are used, they are changed as follows:
Group A No.6411(1) to No.6418(8)
Group B No.6419(1) to No.6426(8)
:
Group J No.6483(1) to No.6490(8)

#4 HMP When inversion or backward movement is inhibited in other paths:

0: Inversion or backward movement is not inhibited for the currently executed path.
1: Inversion or backward movement is inhibited also for the currently executed path.

#5 RVN When the manual handle retrace function is used, M codes other than grouped M codes:
0: Do not disable backward movement.
1: Disable backward movement.

When this parameter is set to 1, M codes other than grouped M codes disable backward
movement in general. Exceptionally, however, the following M codes allow backward
movement:
1. Subprogram call based on M98/M99
2. Subprogram call based on an M code
3. Macro call based on an M code
4. Waiting M code
5. M0

#6 MGO When the manual handle retrace function is used, handle pulses during execution of a G
code related to measurement are:
0: Valid.
1: Invalid. A speed with an override of 100% is used for execution at all times.

#7 MG4 In the manual handle retrace function, for blocks for which multi-step skip G04 is enabled
(when the multi-step skip software option is used, and the settings of parameter Nos.
6202 to 6206 are valid):
0: Backward movement is not prohibited.
1: Backward movement is prohibited.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6401 STO HST CHS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 288 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#2 CHS In manual handle retrace:

0: The status is displayed if the following conditions are all satisfied:
(1) Bit 6 (HST) of parameter No. 6401, which specifies whether to enable or
disable status display, is set to 1.
(2) Check mode output signal MMMOD<Fn091.3> is set to 1.
1: The status is displayed if the following conditions are all satisfied:
(1) Bit 6 (HST) of parameter No. 6401, which specifies whether to enable or
disable status display, is set to 1.
(2) Cycle start lamp signal STL<Fn000.5> is set to 1.
(3) Check mode input signal MMOD<Gn067.2> is set to 1.
(4) Handle input signal MCHK<Gn067.3> is set to 1 in the check mode.

#6 HST When the manual handle retrace function is used, the time display field on the status
display line of the CNC screen:
0: Does not display status.
1: Displays status.

#7 STO In the manual handle retrace function, the timing for outputting an S code and T code
during backward movement is:
0: Different from the timing during forward movement:
1: The same as during forward movement.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6402 MWR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#5 MWR When the manual handle retrace function is used, for a handle operation placed in the
wait state by a wait M code during backward movement:
0: Inversion is prohibited.
1: Inversion is permitted.

Override value (equivalence) for clamping the rapid traverse rate used with the manual handle retrace
6405
function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets an override value (equivalence) for clamping the rapid traverse rate
used with the manual handle retrace function. If a value greater than 100 is set in
parameter (No.6405), the rapid traverse rate is clamped to an override of 100%. This
function is invalid if 0 is set in parameter (No.6405). In this case, the setting of bit 0
(RPO) of parameter No. 6400 is used.

6410 Travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator in terms of
the override value.
- 289 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

The distance traveled by the machine when the manual handle is actually turned can be
found by the following expression:
[Specified speed] × [Handle magnification] × ([Setting of this parameter]/100) ×
(8/60000) (mm or inch)
[Example] When a specified feedrate is 30mm/min, the manual handle magnification is 100, and
parameter No. 6410 is set to 1, the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual
pulse generator is calculated as follows:
[Travel distance per pulse]=30[mm/min] × 100 × (1/100) × (8/60000)[min]= 0.004mm
When this parameter is set to 0, the amount of the movement becomes 0. Moreover, it is
equivalent to 100 in case of 100 or more.

6411 M code of group A in manual handle retrace (1)

To
6414 M code of group A in manual handle retrace (4)

6415 M code of group B in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6418 M code of group B in manual handle retrace (4)

6419 M code of group C in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6422 M code of group C in manual handle retrace (4)

6423 M code of group D in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6426 M code of group D in manual handle retrace (4)

6427 M code of group E in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6430 M code of group E in manual handle retrace (4)

6431 M code of group F in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6434 M code of group F in manual handle retrace (4)

6435 M code of group G in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6438 M code of group G in manual handle retrace (4)

6439 M code of group H in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6442 M code of group H in manual handle retrace (4)

6443 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6446 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (4)

6447 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6450 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (4)

6451 M code of group K in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6454 M code of group K in manual handle retrace (4)

- 290 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
6455 M code of group L in manual handle retrace (1)
to
6458 M code of group L in manual handle retrace (4)

6459 M code of group M in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6462 M code of group M in manual handle retrace (4)

6463 M code of group N in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6466 M code of group N in manual handle retrace (4)

6467 M code of group O in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6470 M code of group O in manual handle retrace (4)

6471 M code of group P in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6474 M code of group P in manual handle retrace (4)

6475 M code of group O in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6478 M code of group Q in manual handle retrace (4)

6479 M code of group R in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6482 M code of group R in manual handle retrace (4)

6483 M code of group S in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6486 M code of group S in manual handle retrace (4)

6487 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (1)

to
6490 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (4)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set a group of M codes output during backward movement.
For backward movement for an M code, the modal M code in the same group set by the
parameter is output.
The first M code in each group is set as the default.
When the number of M codes in a group is 3 or less, set the parameter corresponding to
an unused M code to 0.
For backward movement for "M0", "M0" is output regardless of which M code is set for
the parameter. "0" set in the parameter is ignored.
For an M code which is not set in any group by any of the above parameters, the M code
for forward movement is output.
With these parameters, an M code in the same group can be output in backward
movement only when the M code is the first M code in each block. When a block
contains two or more M codes, the same M codes as output in forward movement are
output as a second M code and up.

- 291 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
The above explanation of M code groups applies to the standard
settings. The number of M codes in each group and the number of
M code groups vary depending on the settings of bit 2 (MC5) and
bit 3 (MC8) of parameter No. 6400.

4.38 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (1 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DPA SPC
6500

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 SPC Graphic display in 2-path control includes:

0: Two spindles and two tool posts.
1: One spindle and two tool posts.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when two paths are displayed at the same
time.

#3 DPA The current position display on the graphic display screen displays:
0: The actual position with tool-nose radius compensation considered.
1: The programmed position.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CSR
6501
CSR 3PL ORG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ORG When the coordinate system is changed during tool path drawing by the dynamic graphic
display function, drawing is performed:
0: With the same coordinate system.
1: With the current drawing point assumed to be the current position set in the new
coordinate system.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No. 11329
is 0.

#2 3PL In animated simulation of the dynamic graphic display function, triplane drawing is
drawn:
0: In third angle projection.
1: In first angle projection.

- 292 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#5 CSR On the PATH GRAPHIC (CURRENT POSITION) screen, the shape of the cursor
indicating the tool position is:
0: A square (■).
1: An x (×).

Drawing coordinate system for one-spindle graphic (2-path control)

6509

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 9, 10 to 19 (however, a setting of 0 to 9 is the same as that of 10 to 19, respectively.)
This parameter sets the drawing coordinate system for one-spindle graphic (bit 1 (SPC) of
parameter No. 6500 is 1) in 2-path control.
The drawing coordinate system is set as shown below.

Setting ＝0 or 10 Setting ＝1 or 11 Setting ＝2 or 12

Z X1 X2

Z Z

X2 X1 X2 X1

Setting ＝3 or 13 Setting ＝4 or 14 Setting ＝5 or 15

Z X1 X2

X2 X1
Z Z

X2 X1

Setting ＝6 or 16 Setting ＝7 or 17 Setting ＝8 or 18

Z Z

X1 X2

X2 X1 X1 X2
Z

Setting ＝9 or 19

X1 X2
Z

- 293 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

6510 Drawing coordinate system

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
This parameter sets the drawing coordinate system for the graphic display function.
The drawing coordinate system is set as shown below.

For T series:
Setting ＝1 Setting ＝1 Setting ＝2 Setting ＝3
Z X Z

Z X

X Z

Setting ＝4 Setting ＝5 Setting ＝6 Setting ＝7

X

Z X Z
X Z X
Setting ＝8

For M series:
Setting = 0 (XY) Setting = 1 (YZ) Setting = 2 (ZY)

Y Z Y

X Y Z

Setting = 3 (XZ) Setting = 4 (XYZ) Setting = 5 (ZXY)

Z Z Y

X X Y Z X

- 294 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

6515
Change in the cross-sectional position in a triplane drawing in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] Dot
[Valid data range] 0 to 10
This parameter sets changes in the cross-sectional position in a triplane drawing in
dynamic graphic display, which are made when the soft key is pressed and held.
A setting of 0 is assumed to be 1.

Rapid traverse rate for each axis in dynamic graphic display (T series)
6516

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in dynamic graphic display (T series).

NOTE
When the setting is 0, the setting of parameter No.1420 is used.

Cutting feedrate for each axis in dynamic graphic display (T series)

6517

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the cutting feedrate for each axis in dynamic graphic display (T series).

NOTE
When the setting is 0, the setting of parameter No.1430 is used.

4.39 PARAMETERS OF SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (1 OF 2)

6581 RGB value of color palette 1

6582 RGB value of color palette 2

6583 RGB value of color palette 3

6584 RGB value of color palette 4

6585 RGB value of color palette 5

6586 RGB value of color palette 6

- 295 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

6587 RGB value of color palette 7

6588 RGB value of color palette 8

6589 RGB value of color palette 9

6590 RGB value of color palette 10

6591 RGB value of color palette 11

6592 RGB value of color palette 12

6593 RGB value of color palette 13

6594 RGB value of color palette 14

6595 RGB value of color palette 15

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 to 151515
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette by specifying a 6-digit
number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.

4.40 PARAMETERS OF RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT

DISPLAY
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PRT PCM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No.6710

#1 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal (PRTSF) is:
0: Set to "0".
1: Not set to "0".

6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1)
when the M code set is executed.

- 296 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with
M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even
when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed,
ignoring the M code.)

6711 Number of machined parts

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of
machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No.6710 is
executed.

NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.

6712 Total number of machined parts

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.

NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.

6713 Number of required parts

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of
machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as
infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.

6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.

- 297 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.

6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither
stop nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameter No. 6751 and
parameter No. 6752.

6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6754.

6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting
feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameter No. 6753 and
parameter No. 6754.

6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6756.

6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal TMRON
<G0053.0> from PMC is on.
The actual integrated time is the sum of this parameter No. 6755 and parameter No. 6756.
- 298 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6758.

6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold
state included). The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of this parameter
No. 6757 and parameter No. 6758. The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during
the power-on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.

4.41 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (1

OF 3)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6801 LVF

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether the tool
management function or tool life management function is used.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 LVF When the life of a tool is counted in terms of time with the tool management function, the
tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1> are:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.

6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 127 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is set, this parameter is ignored.
- For tool management function
When an M code for tool life count restart is specified, the counting of the life of the tool
attached at the spindle position is started.
When the type for counting the number of use times is selected, the target of life counting
is switched to the tool attached at the spindle position, and the life count is incremented
by 1.
When the type for counting time is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the
tool attached at the spindle position, with no other operations performed.

- 299 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

If the tool attached at the spindle position is not a tool under tool life management, no
operation is performed.

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether the tool
management function or tool life management function is used.

4.42 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6800 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 GS1
#1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be
registered per group. The combination of the number of registrable groups and the
number of tools per group can be changed by setting GS1 and GS2.

GS2 GS1 Number of groups Number of tools

0 0 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/8 1 to 16
0 1 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/4 1 to 8
1 0 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/2 1 to 4
1 1 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813) 1 to 2

NOTE
After changing these parameters, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#2 LTM The tool life count is specified by:

0: Count.
1: Duration.

NOTE
After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signals TL01 to TL256 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.0>, the group
number is:
0: Not input by the tool group number selection signals.
1: Input by the tool group number selection signals.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, a tool of the currently used group is
skipped.

- 300 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#4 GRS When the tool change reset signal TLRST<Gn048.7> is input:
0: If the life of the group specified by the tool group number selection signals TL01 to
TL256 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.0> has expired, the execution data of the group is
cleared.
1: The execution data of all registered groups is cleared.
If this parameter is set to 1, the execution data of all registered groups is cleared also
when the clear operation to clear execution data is performed on the tool life management
list screen.

#5 SNG When the tool skip signal TLSKP<Gn048.5> is input while a tool not controlled by the
tool life management is being used:
0: A tool of the most recently used group or a specified group (bit 3 (SIG) of parameter
No. 6800) is skipped.
1: The tool skip signal is ignored.

#6 IGI Tool back numbers are:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.

#7 M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is:

0: Assumed to be a back number.
1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
M6E EMD LVF TSM
6801
M6E EMD LVF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 TSM In the tool life management, life counting is performed as follows when more than one
offset is specified:
0: Counting is performed for each tool number.
1: Counting is performed for each tool.

#2 LVF When the life value is counted by duration in the tool life management, tool life count
override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <G049.0 to G050.1> are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

#3 EMD In the tool life management, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is displayed
when:
0: The next tool is used.
1: The life has just expired.

- 301 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicating that the tool is
in use) is kept displayed unless the next tool whose life has not
expired is used. If this parameter is set to 1, marks are displayed in
different ways depending on the life count type.
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the "*" mark
(indicating that the life has expired) appears when the life has
expired. If the life count type is the count specification type, one
count is not assumed until the end of the program (M02, M30, and so
on). Therefore, even when the life value and the tool life counter
value match, the "*" mark (life has expired) does not appear. The "*"
mark (life has expired) appears when the tool is used again by a tool
group command (T code) or tool change command (M06) issued
after the CNC is reset.

#7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06:

0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next.
Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No.
6800.
1: Life counting for the tool group starts immediately.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RMT TSK ARL GRP E17 TCO T99
6802
RMT TSK TGN ARL GRP E17 TCO T99

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool
group:
0: The tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is not output.
1: The tool change signal is output, and the automatic operation becomes a stopped
state..

If the life count is specified by use count and this parameter 1, TLCH is output and the
automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has
expired when the M99 command is specified.
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the automatic operation becomes a
stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is
specified.
M
If the life count is specified by use count, after the M99 command is specified, a tool
group command (T code) selects, from a specified group, a tool whose life has not
expired, and the next tool change command (M06) increments the tool life counter by
one.

T
If the life count is specified by use count, ｗhen a tool group command (T code) is
specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is
selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one.

- 302 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 TCO
#2 E17
Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool
information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation
(the automatic operation signal OP <Fn000.7> is set to "1").

Bit 1 (TCO) of
parameter No. 6802
1
Condition Bit 2 (E17) of
0 parameter No.
6802
1 0
During Group being used or to be Tool being used × △ ○
automatic used next Tool not being used × ○ ○
operation Group neither being used nor to be used next ○ ○ ○
Not during automatic operation ○ ○ ○
○: Tool information can be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
×: Tool information cannot be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
When an attempt is made to write tool information from PMC window, completion
code 13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned.
△: Tool information cannot be cleared.

NOTE
When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the
group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most
recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the
group being used nor the group to be used next is cleared, the life
counter is reset to 0.
It is possible to modify tool information of a tool in the group to be
used next. However, because tool selection is already completed,
the selected tool does not change even when the tool information is
modified.
This parameter has no influence on modifications to tool information
by edit operations from the tool life management screen.

#3 GRP Management data of tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> is:
0: Managed using the remaining life value set in parameter No. 6844 and 6845.
1: Managed using the remaining life value set in tool life management data.

NOTE
When the tool life arrival notice signal function is used, bit 4 (LFB) of
parameter No. 6805 must be set to 1 to enable the tool life
management B.

#4 ARL Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> of tool life management is:
0: Output for each tool.
1: Output for the last tool of a group.
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is set to 1.

#5 TGN In the tool life management, the optional group number function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 303 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When the optional group number function is used, bit 4 (LFB) of
parameter No. 6805 must be set to 1 to enable the tool life
management B.

#6 TSK If the count type in tool life management is the duration type, then when the last tool of a
group is skipped by a signal:
0: The count value for the last tool equals the life value.
1: The count value for the last tool remains unchanged.

#7 RMT Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> is turned on and off as follows:
0: The signal is turned on if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is smaller than or equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is
turned off if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is
greater than the remaining life setting.
1: The signal is turned on if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned off if the
remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is not equal to the
remaining life setting.

NOTE
When using the life count override feature, set bit 7 (RMT) of
parameter No. 6802 to 0. When the life count is specified by duration,
the unit used for determining the result of comparison between the
remaining life and the remaining life setting varies depending on the
life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the life is
counted every second, the comparison is made in units of 1 minute; if
the life is counted every 0.1 second, the comparison is made in units
of 0.1 minute.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6804 LFI ETE TCI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 TCI During automatic operation (the automatic operation signal OP<Fn000.7> is "1"), editing
of tool life data is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even
during automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"). If the target group
for editing is the group being used or the group to be used next,
however, only presetting of the life counter is permitted, and other
data cannot be modified.

- 304 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 ETE In the tool life management screen, the mark of the tool at the life was expired of the final
tool in the group :
0: depends on setting parameter EMD (No.6801#3).
1: is "*" mark.
If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is set to 1, when the life counter of the final tool in
the group becomes equal to the life value, display mark "*" in the final tool of the tool life
management screen.
When tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0> is "1", the state of the life was expired of the
tool can be read by reading tool information on the final tool in FOCAS2 or the PMC
window.

#6 LFI In tool life management, counting of the life of a selected tool is:
0: Enabled.
1: Enabled or disabled according to the status of tool life counting disable signal
LFCIV<G048.2>.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6805 TAD TRU TRS LFB FGL FCO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows:
0: Every second.
1: Every 0.1 second.
According to the setting of this parameter, the increment system of life values and tool
life counter values displayed on the tool life management screen is set as follows:

Parameter FCO 0 1
Increment system for display and setting of life values and 1-minute 0.1-minute
life counter values increments increments

NOTE
After changing the setting of this parameter, set data again by using
G10L3;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).

#1 FGL If the life count type is the duration specification type, life data registered by G10 is:
0: In one-minute increments.
1: In 0.1-second increments.

#4 LFB The tool life management B function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the tool life management B function is enabled, the following functions can be
used:
<1> Tool life value extension (count specification: 99999999 times, duration
specification: 100000 minutes)
<2> Optional group number function (M series)
<3> Tool life arrival notice function

- 305 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7> is valid when reset signal RST <Fn001.1> is
not "1" and:
0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP <Fn000.7> is "0") is observed.
1: The reset state (OP is "0"), automatic operation stop state (cycle start lamp signal
STL <Fn000.5> and feed hold lamp signal SPL <Fn000.4> signals are "0" and OP is
"1"), or the automatic operation pause state (STL is "0" and SPL is "1") is observed.
The TLRST signal, however, is invalid when the automatic operation stop state,
automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start state (STL is "1") is
observed during execution of a data setting command (G10L3).

#6 TRU When the life count type is the duration specification type, and the life is counted every
second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 0):
0: Cutting time less than one second is discarded and is not counted.
1: Cutting time less than one second is rounded up and is counted as one second.

NOTE
If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.
6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded
up and is counted as 0.1 second.

#7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is set to 1), when a block
specifying M06 contains no T command:
0: An alarm PS0153, “T-CODE NOT FOUND” is issued.
1: No alarm is issued.

6810 Tool life management ignore number

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the tool life management ignore number.
When the value specified in a T code exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value
obtained by subtracting the parameter-set value from the T code value is assumed to be
the tool group number for tool life management.

6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is specified, it is ignored.
- For tool life management
When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0> is output if
the life of at least one tool group has expired when the tool life count restart M code is
issued.
The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the tool life count
restart M code selects a tool whose life has not expired from a specified group, and the
next M06 command increments the tool life counter by one.
When the life is specified by duration, specifying the tool life count restart M code causes
nothing. When 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life count restart M code is invalid.
When the data of M code exceeds 127 values, set 0 in parameter No.6811, and set the
value of M code in parameter No.13221. The data range of parameter No.13221 is from 0
to 255.

- 306 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] Group
[Valid data range] 0, 8, 16 to 128
This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the
maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When this parameter is 0, 128
groups are set. Up to 128 groups can be set for each path.

NOTE
If the power is turned on after this parameter is changed, all data in
the tool life management file is initialized. Therefore, the life
management data of all paths that use the tool life management
function must be set.

6844 Remaining tool life (use count)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] This range is the same as the tool life range.
This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life notice
signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> when the tool life is specified by use count. If a value greater
than the tool life value or 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life notice signal is not output.

6845 Remaining tool life (use duration)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] Not greater than the tool life value
This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration) used to output the tool life
notice TLCHB <Fn064.3> signal when the tool life is specified by use duration. If a value
greater than the tool life value or 0 is specified in this parameter, the tool life notice signal
is not output.

NOTE
When the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter
No. 6805 = 1), the parameter value is in 0.1-minute increments.

6846
Number of remaining group tools

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
This parameter sets the number of remaining group tools.

- 307 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

If the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to
or less than the setting of this parameter, the remaining tool number notice signal TLAL
<Fn154.0> is output. When this parameter is set to 0, the remaining tool number notice
signal is not output.

4.43 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6901 PSA EPW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 EPW The maximum number of points of the position switch is:

0: 10.
1: 16.

#2 PSA In determination of a position switch function operation range, a servo delay amount
(positional deviation) and a delay amount in acceleration/deceleration control are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

6910 Controlled axis for which the 1st position switch function is performed
to to
6925 Controlled axis for which the 16-th position switch function is performed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the controlled axis number corresponding to one of the first to sixteenth position
switch functions. When the machine coordinate of the corresponding axis is within a
parameter-set range, the corresponding position switch signal is output to the PMC.

NOTE
The setting of 0 means that the position switch function is not used.

6930 Maximum value of the operating range of the 1st position switch
to to
6945 Maximum value of the operating range of the 16-th position switch

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the maximum value of the operating range of the first to sixteenth position switches.

NOTE
1 For a diameter-specified axis, use diameter values to specify the
parameters used to set the maximum and minimum values of an
operating range.

- 308 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
2 The position switch function is enabled upon completion of
reference position return.
3 The parameter No.6940 to No.6945 is effective when bit 1 (EPW)
of parameter No.6901 is set to 1.

6950 Minimum value of the operating range of the 1st position switch
to to
6965 Minimum value of the operating range of the 16-th position switch

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the minimum value of the operating range of the first to sixteenth position switches.

NOTE
1 For a diameter-specified axis, use diameter values to specify the
parameters used to set the maximum and minimum values of an
operating range.
2 The position switch function is enabled upon completion of
reference position return.
3 The parameter No.6960 to No.6965 is effective when bit 1 (EPW)
of parameter No.6901 is set to 1.

4.44 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL OPERATION AND

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7001 ABS MIT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MIT The manual intervention/recovery function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 ABS For the move command after manual intervention in the manual absolute on state:
0: Different paths are used in the absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) modes.
1: The same path (path in the absolute mode) is used in the absolute (G90) and
incremental (G91) modes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7055 BCG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 309 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 BCG The pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function

in AI contour control I or AI contour control II mode is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the time constant change function of bell-shaped
7066
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the acceleration/deceleration reference speed of the time constant
change function of the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in AI
contour control I or AI contour control II.

4.45 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE

INTERRUPTION AND HANDLE FEED IN TOOL AXIAL
DIRECTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 MPX HCL THD JHD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode or incremental feed in the manual handle feed
0: Invalid
1: Valid

When JHD:=0 When JHD:=1

JOG feed Manual handle JOG feed Manual handle
mode feed mode mode feed mode
JOG feed ○ × ○ ×
Manual handle feed × ○ ○ ○
Incremental feed × × × ○

#1 THD In the TEACH IN JOG mode, the manual pulse generator is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#3 HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [INTRPT CANCEL]
operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 310 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#5 MPX In Manual handle feed mode, manual handle feed amount selection signal is
0 : same for all manual pulse generator, and it is set by signals MP1 and
MP2<Gn019.4,.5>.
1 : differ to each other manual pulse generator, and it’s setting signal as follow:
1st. Manual Pulse Generator : MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,.5>
2nd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP21,MP22<Gn087.0,.1>
3rd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP31,MP32<Gn087.3,.4>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNAx HNGx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction

#1 HNAx When manual handle feed direction inversion signal HDN<Gn0347.1> is set to “1”, the
direction of movement is set for each axis with respect to the rotation direction of the
manual pulse generator.
0: The axis movement direction is the same as the direction in which the manual pulse
generator rotates.
1: The axis movement direction is opposite to the direction in which the manual pulse
generator rotates.
When the rotation direction is reversed by manual handle feed direction inversion signal
HDN<Gn0347.1>, the rotation axis direction obtained by the setting of bit 0 (HNGx) of
parameter No. 7102 is reversed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7103 HIT HNT RTH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 RTH By a reset or emergency stop, the amount of manual handle interruption is:
0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.

#2 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals) (MP1, MP2), the travel
distance magnification for incremental feed/manual handle feed is:
0: Same.
1: 10 times greater.

#3 HIT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals (MP1, MP2), the travel
distance magnification for manual handle interrupt is:
0: Same.
1: 10 times greater.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7105 LBH HDX

[Input type] Parameter input

- 311 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#1 HDX Manual handle for I/O Link connection is:

0: Automatically set.
1: Manually set.

NOTE
In manual setting, parameters Nos.12300 to 12302 must be set by
manual to connect Manual Pulse Generator with I/O Link.

#5 LBH Manual handle feed for the I/O Link βi using the I/O link manual pulse generator is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7107 FJH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 FJH When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No.7100 is 1, jog feed and manual handle feed in jog feed
mode, or incremental feed and manual handle feed in manual handle feed are
0: superimposed. Acceleration type of manual handle feed is the type of feed (jog feed
or manual rapid traverse) that operates immediately before.
1: not superimposed. Priority can be placed on jog feed or incremental feed if they and
manual handle feed are executed at the same time. Manual handle feed is invalid to
all axes in the path while jog feed or incremental feed is being executed.
Acceleration type of manual handle feed is the type of jog feed.

NOTE
This parameter is effective for bit 1 (THD) of parameter No.7100.

7113 Manual handle feed magnification m

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 2000
This parameter sets the magnification m when manual handle feed movement selection
signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 0 and 1.

7114 Manual handle feed magnification n

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 2000
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection
signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 1.

- 312 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Pulse
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of pulses from the manual pulse generator that exceed the
rapid traverse rate and can be accumulated without being discarded if manual handle feed
faster than the rapid traverse rate is specified.

The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And
amount of pulses B will be exported as pulses C.

A：amount of pulses corresponds to value of Rapid Traverse Rate.

B：amount of pulses accumulated in CNC.

B
C：amount of pulses the same as B.

Rapid Traverse Rate

A C
t

Amount of pulses exported by CNC in Manual Handle Feed

Amount of pulses B is calculated in 2 cases as following:

In case of
1) Parameter No.7117 = 0
The feedrate is clamped at the Rapid Traverse Rate and generated pulses exceeding
the Rapid Traverse Rate are ignored (B=0)

In case of
2) Parameter No.7117 > 0
The feedrate is clamped as the Rapid Traverse Rate, but the pulses exceeding the
Rapid Traverse Rate is not ignored. Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC is
calculated as following. (Although stopping the rotation of manual pulse generator,
if there is pulses accumulated in CNC, it will be exported and the tool will move as
long as amount of it.)

Magnification set by MP1，MP2<Gn019.4,.5> is m, value of parameter No.7117 is

n.

n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117.

n ≥ m: Amount A+B, showed in figure, which’s value is multiple of m and small
than n. As a result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected
magnification.

- 313 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

n A: amount of pulses the same as Rapid Traverse Rate.

A
B: amount of pulses saved in CNC.
B k : integer number

m
A+B=k⋅m
pulses over (k⋅m) will be ignored

Amount of pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse Rate (n ≥ m)

NOTE
Due to change of mode, clamping can be performed not as an
integral multiple of the selected magnification.
The distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the
manual pulse generator.

7131 Manual handle feed magnification m2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator

7132 Manual handle feed magnification n2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator

7133 Manual handle feed magnification m3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator

7134 Manual handle feed magnification n3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 2000
The ‘mx’ is selected when MPx1 = 0, MPx2 = 1.
The ‘nx’ is selected when MPx1 =1, MPx2 = 1.

4.46 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION WITH

MECHANICAL STOPPER
7181 First withdrawal distance in reference position setting with mechanical stopper

7182 Second withdrawal distance in butt-type reference position setting with mechanical stopper

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a distance an axis in each cycle operation, along which withdrawal is
performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper to the
withdrawal point).

NOTE
Set the same direction as that set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. Cycle operation cannot be started if the opposite direction is
set.
- 314 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

7183 First butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper

7184 Second butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper

Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) in reference position setting
7185
with mechanical stopper

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a feedrate used to butt against the stopper along an axis in each cycle.
This parameter also sets a feedrate at which an axis is retracted when the axis makes
contact with the machine stopper in each cycle.

7186 Torque limit value in butt-type reference position setting with mechanical stopper

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets a torque limit value. A value from 0 to 100 corresponds to 0% to 39%.
The torque limit value is obtained by multiplying the setting by 1/255. If more than 39%
is to be set, use parameter No. 7187.

NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed.

7187 Torque limit value in butt-type reference position setting with mechanical stopper

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets a torque limit value. A value from 0 to 255 corresponds to 0% to
100%.
When this parameter is set in butt-type reference position setting, parameter No. 7186 is
ignored.

NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed
2 A converted setting must not exceed the rated torque.

4.47 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 315 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select
on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed

#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7201 GPS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 GPS The maximum number of switches of the general-purpose switch function on the software
operator's panel is:
0: 8.
1: 16.

7210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”

7211 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”

7212 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”

7213 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”

- 316 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

7214 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

7215 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

7216 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

7217 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI
panel when jog feed is performed.
Arrow keys on MDI panel
Setting value Feed axis and direction
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction 7 8 9
2 First axis, negative direction
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction 4 5 6
5 Third axis, positive direction
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction
1 2 3
8 Fourth axis, negative direction

[Example] Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction
specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8↑] to the positive
direction of the Z axis, [2↓] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6→] to the positive
direction of the X axis [4←] to the negative direction of the X axis, [1 ] to the positive
direction of the Y axis, [9 ] to the negative direction of the Y axis

Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)

Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)

7220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first character)

to to
7283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

7284 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's panel (first character)

to to
7299 Name of general-purpose switch 10 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

7352 Name of general-purpose switch 11 on software operator's panel (first character)

to to
7399 Name of general-purpose switch 16 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

[Input type] Parameter input

- 317 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Byte path

[Valid data range] -128 to 127
Each of these parameters sets the name of a general-purpose switch on the software
operator's panel with character codes indicated in the character-code correspondence table.
A switch name consists of up to eight characters.

Parameter Nos. 7220 to 7227 : Name of general-purpose switch 1

Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235 : Name of general-purpose switch 2
Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243 : Name of general-purpose switch 3
Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251 : Name of general-purpose switch 4
Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259 : Name of general-purpose switch 5
Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267 : Name of general-purpose switch 6
Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275 : Name of general-purpose switch 7
Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283 : Name of general-purpose switch 8
Parameter Nos. 7284 to 7291 : Name of general-purpose switch 9
Parameter Nos. 7292 to 7299 : Name of general-purpose switch 10
Parameter Nos. 7352 to 7359 : Name of general-purpose switch 11
Parameter Nos. 7360 to 7367 : Name of general-purpose switch 12
Parameter Nos. 7368 to 7375 : Name of general-purpose switch 13
Parameter Nos. 7376 to 7383 : Name of general-purpose switch 14
Parameter Nos. 7384 to 7391 : Name of general-purpose switch 15
Parameter Nos. 7392 to 7399 : Name of general-purpose switch 16

Character code list

Character Code Character Code Character Code
A 65 Q 81 6 54
B 66 R 82 7 55
C 67 S 83 8 56
D 68 T 84 9 57
E 69 U 85 32
F 70 V 86 ! 33
G 71 W 87 “ 34
H 72 X 88 # 35
I 73 Y 89 $ 36
J 74 Z 90 % 37
K 75 0 48 & 38
L 76 1 49 ‘ 39
M 77 2 50 ( 40
N 78 3 51 ) 41
O 79 4 52 * 42
P 80 5 53 + 43

4.48 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAM RESTART

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7300 MOU MOA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#6 MOA In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point:

0: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output.
1: All M codes and the last S, T, and B codes are output.
This parameter is enabled when the MOU parameter is set to 1.
- 318 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#7 MOU In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point after restart
block search:
0: The M, S, T, and B codes are not output.
1: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7301 3DD ROF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ROF When the coordinates for restarting are displayed on the program restart screen:
0: Tool length compensation (M series), tool position compensation (T series), cutter
compensation (M series), and tool-nose radius compensation (T series) are
considered.
1: Whether these compensation values are considered depends on the settings of bit 6
(DAL) of parameter No. 3104, bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104, and bit 1 (DAP)
of parameter No. 3129 (parameters for specifying whether to consider each
compensation value).

#1 3DD In program restart operation, when the restart block is in 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion mode G68 (machining center system) or G68.1 (lathe system), the tool moves
to the restart point along each axis:
0: According to the program coordinate system in dry run.
1: According to the workpiece coordinate system in dry run.
The restart coordinates and restart travel distance are also displayed in the coordinate
system set in this parameter.

NOTE
The change made to this parameter in program restart operation is
ignored.

7310 Ordinal number of an axis along which a movement is made in dry run after program restart

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the ordinal number of an axis along which a movement is made in dry
run after the program is restarted.

4.49 PARAMETERS OF POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PLZ
7600

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 319 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 PLZ Reference position return based on a G28 command on the tool rotation axis for polygon
turning is:
0: Performed in the same sequence as manual reference position return.
1: Performed by positioning using the rapid traverse rate.
The synchronous axis returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the
manual reference position return when no return-to-reference position is performed after
the power is turned on.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
COF HST HSL HDR SNG MNG
7602

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MNG The rotational direction of the master axis in the spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is:
0: Not reversed.
1: Reversed.

#1 SNG The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis in the spindle-spindle
polygon turning mode is:
0: Not reversed.
1: Reversed.

#2 HDR When phase control is exercised in spindle-spindle polygon turning mode (bit 5 (COF) of
parameter No. 7602 is set to 0), the phase shift direction is:
0: Not reversed for phase synchronization.
1: Reversed for phase synchronization.

NOTE
The rotation directions and phase shift directions of the master axis
and polygon synchronization axis in the spindle-spindle polygon
turning mode can be reversed with a programmed command. MNG,
SNG, and HDR are used to reverse an actual direction relative to the
programmed command.

#3 HSL When phase control is exercised in spindle-spindle polygon turning mode (bit 5 (COF) of
parameter No. 7602 is set to 0), this parameter selects the spindle that is subject to a phase
shift operation for phase synchronization:
0: The polygon synchronization axis is selected.
1: The master axis is selected.

NOTE
1 Select an axis to which a phase shift command is applied.
2 Spindle operation for phase synchronization is performed with both
spindles.

#4 HST When phase control is applied in spindle-spindle polygon turning mode (bit 5 (COF) of
parameter No. 7602 is set to 0), and spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is specified:
0: Spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is entered with the current spindle speed
maintained.
1: Spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is entered after the spindle is stopped.

- 320 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter can be used, for example, when single-rotation
signal detection cannot be guaranteed at an arbitrary feedrate
because a separate detector is installed to detect the spindle
single-rotation signal, as when a built-in spindle is used. (When bit
7 (RFCHK3) of parameter No.4016 for the serial spindle is set to 1,
together with this parameter, a single-rotation signal detection
position in spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is guaranteed.)

#5 COF In spindle-spindle polygon turning mode, phase control is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

NOTE
When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady state is
reached in a shorter time because phase synchronization control is
not applied. Once steady rotation is achieved, however, polygon
turning must be completed without changing the steady state. (If a
spindle speed change including a spindle stop is made, a phase
shift occurs, so that polygon turning is not performed normally.)
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an R command (phase
position command) in a block containing G51.2 is ignored ; no
alarm is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PST RDG PLR SBR QDR RPL
7603

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RPL Upon reset, spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is:

0: Released.
1: Not released.

#1 QDR The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis:

0: Depends on the sign (+/-) of a specified value for Q.
1: Depends on the rotational direction of the first spindle.
If a negative value is specified for Q when QDR = 1, the alarm (PS0218) "NOT FOUND
P/Q COMMAND" is issued.

#2 SBR For spindle synchronization, speed ratio control is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 This parameter sets the speed of the slave spindle to an integral
multiple of the speed of the master spindle in the spindle
synchronization control function.
2 There is no relation with the polygon machining function.
3 Spindle synchronization control needs to be enabled.
4 Parameters No.7635 and No.7636 need to be set.
- 321 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 PLR The machine coordinates of a tool rotation axis for polygon turning are:
0: Rounded by the setting in parameter No.7620.
1: Rounded by 360° (or the setting in parameter No. 1260 when bit 0 (ROA) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 1).

#5 RDG On the diagnosis screen No.476, for spindle-spindle polygon phase command value (R),
displays:
0: The specified value (in the increment system for the rotation axis).
1: The actual number of shift pulses.

NOTE
A phase command is specified in address R, in units of degrees.
For control, the actual shift amount is converted to a number of
pulses according to the conversion formula: 360 degrees = 4096
pulses. This parameter switches the display of a specified value to
that of a converted value.

#7 PST The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST <Gn038.0>is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning

7610

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the control axis number of a rotation tool axis used for polygon
turning.
However, when a G51.2 command is executed by setting 0 in this parameter, operation
stops with the alarm (PS0314) "ILLEGAL SETTING OF POLYGONAL AXIS".

Movement of tool rotation axis per revolution for polygon turning

7620

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the movement of a tool rotation axis per revolution.

- 322 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis for polygon turning
7621

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable speed of the tool rotation axis.

NOTE
If the speed of a tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
exceeds the set upper limit during polygon machining, clamping is
performed at the upper limit. When clamping is performed at the
upper limit, the synchronization between the spindle and the tool
rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) deviates. If clamping
is performed, the alarm (PS5018) "POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED
ERROR" occurs.

Allowable spindle speed deviation level in spindle-spindle polygon turning

7631

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the allowable level of deviation between the actual speed and
specified speed of each spindle in spindle-spindle polygon turning. The value set with this
parameter is used for both the master axis and polygon synchronization axis.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 8 [min-1] is assumed.

Steady state confirmation time duration in spindle polygon turning

7632

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the duration required to confirm that both spindles have reached their
specified speeds in spindle-spindle polygon turning.
If the state where the speed of each spindle is within the range set with parameter
No.7631, and has lasted at least for the duration specified with parameter No.7632, the
spindle polygon speed arrival signal PSAR <Fn063.2> is set to "1".
When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 64 [msec] is assumed.

Ratio of slave spindle speed in spindle synchronization control

7635

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 9
This parameter sets the ratio of master spindle speed:slave spindle speed (1:n) in spindle
synchronization control.
- 323 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
1 This parameter sets the speed of the slave spindle to an integral
multiple of the speed of the master spindle in the spindle
synchronization control function.
2 There is no relation with the polygon machining function.
3 Spindle synchronization control needs to be enabled.
4 Bit 2 of parameter No.7603 and parameter No.7636 need to be set.

Maximum allowable slave spindle speed in spindle synchronization control

7636

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 19999
The speed of the slave spindle under speed ratio control in spindle synchronization
control is clamped so that the speed does not exceed the value set in this parameter.

NOTE
1 This parameter sets the speed of the slave spindle to an integral
multiple of the speed of the master spindle in the spindle
synchronization control function.
2 There is no relation with the polygon machining function.
3 Spindle synchronization control needs to be enabled.
4 Bit 2 of parameter No.7603 and parameter No.7635 need to be set.
5 When speed ratio control in spindle synchronization control is used,
be sure to set this parameter.
6 When 0 is set, the speed is clamped to 0, disabling rotation under
spindle synchronization.

Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning

7640

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path)
This parameter sets the master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning.

NOTE
1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles.
2 When any one of parameters No. 7642 and 7643 is set to 0 and
any one of parameter No. 7640 and No. 7641 is set to 0, polygon
turning is performed using the first spindle (master axis) and the
second spindle (polygon synchronous axis) in the path to which the
parameter belongs.
3 When an axis other than the first serial spindle is selected as the
master axis, multi-spindle control is required to execute an S
command for the master axis.

- 324 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to
rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block
specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the
PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the block
immediately before G51.2, specify the rewriting of this parameter
by using an M code (parameter No. 3411 and up) without buffering.
5 When this parameter is used, set the parameters No.7642 and
No.7643 to 0.

Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning

7641

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path)
This parameter sets the polygon synchronous (slave) axis in spindle-spindle polygon
turning.

NOTE
1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles.
2 When any one of parameters No. 7642 and 7643 is set to 0 and
any one of parameter No. 7640 and No. 7641 is set to 0, polygon
turning is performed using the first spindle (master axis) and the
second spindle (polygon synchronous axis) in the path to which the
parameter belongs.
3 When an axis other than the first serial spindle is selected as the
master axis, multi-spindle control is required to execute an S
command for the master axis.
4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to
rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block
specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the
PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the block
immediately before G51.2, specify the rewriting of this parameter
by using an M code (parameter No. 3411 and up) without buffering.
5 When this parameter is used, set the parameters No.7642 and
No.7643 to 0.

Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning (spindle number common to the system)
7642

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system)
This parameter sets the master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning.

NOTE
1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles.
2 This parameter is invalid if either parameter No. 7642 or No.7643 is
set to 0. In this case, the settings of parameter No. 7640 and
No.7641 are valid.
- 325 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
3 When an axis other than the first serial spindle is selected as the
master axis, multi-spindle control is required to execute an S
command for the master axis.
4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to
rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block
specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the
PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the block
immediately before G51.2, specify the rewriting of this parameter
by using an M code (parameter No. 3411 and up) without buffering.
5 A spindle number common to the system is to be set in this
parameter. When using this parameter, set 0 in parameter No.
7640 and No. 7641.

Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning (spindle number common to the system)
7643

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system)
This parameter sets the polygon synchronous (slave) axis in spindle-spindle polygon
turning.

NOTE
1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles.
2 This parameter is invalid if either parameter No. 7642 or No.7643 is
set to 0. In this case, the settings of parameter No. 7640 and
No.7641 are valid.
3 When an axis other than the first serial spindle is selected as the
master axis, multi-spindle control is required to execute an S
command for the master axis.
4 When the PMC window function or G10 command is used to
rewrite this parameter, rewrite this parameter before the block
specifying the spindle-spindle polygon command G51.2. When the
PMC window function is used to rewrite this parameter in the block
immediately before G51.2, specify the rewriting of this parameter
by using an M code (parameter No. 3411 and up) without buffering.
5 A spindle number common to the system is to be set in this
parameter. When using this parameter, set 0 in parameter No.
7640 and No. 7641.

4.50 PARAMETERS OF THE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (EGB)

(M SERIES) / GENERAL-PURPOSE RETRACTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7700
HDR HBR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 326 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#0 HBR When the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used, performing a reset:
0: Cancels the synchronous mode (G81).
1: Does not cancel the synchronous mode. The mode is canceled only by the G80
command.

#2 HDR Direction of helical gear compensation (usually, set 1.)

(Example) To cut a left-twisted helical gear when the direction of rotation about the
C-axis is the negative (-) direction:
0: Set a negative (-) value in P.
1: Set a positive (+) value in P.

When HDR = 1

(a) (b) (c) (d)

+Z +C +C +C +C

C : +, Z : +, P : + C : +, Z : +, P : - C : +, Z : -, P : + C : +, Z : -, P : -
Compensation direction:+ Compensation direction:- Compensation direction:- Compensation direction:+
-Z

(e) (f) (g) (h)

+Z -C -C -C -C

C : -, Z : +, P : + C : -, Z : +, P : - C : -, Z : -, P : + C : -, Z : -, P : -
C : Compensation direction:- Compensation direction:+ Compensation direction:+ Compensation direction:-
-Z

When HDR = 0 ((a), (b), (c), and (d) are the same as when HDR = 1)

(e) (f) (g) (h)

+Z
-C -C -C -C

C : -, Z : +, P : + C : -, Z : +, P : - C : -, Z : -, P : + C : -, Z : -, P : -
-Z Compensation direction:+ Compensation direction:- Compensation direction:- Compensation direction:+

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7701
LZR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 LZR When L (number of hob threads) = 0 is specified at the start of EGB synchronization
(G81) or flexible synchronization control (G81):
0: Synchronization is started, assuming that L = 1 is specified.
1: Synchronization is not started, assuming that L = 0 is specified. However, helical
gear compensation is performed.

- 327 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7702
PHD PHS ART TDP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TDP The specifiable number of teeth, T, of the electronic gear box (G81) or flexible
synchronization control (G81) is:
0: 1 to 3000
1: 0.1 to 300 (1/10 of a specified value)

NOTE
In either case, a value from 1 to 3000 can be specified.

#3 ART The retract function executed when an alarm is issued is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When an alarm is issued, a retract operation is performed with a set feedrate and travel
distance (parameter Nos. 7740 and 7741).

NOTE
If a servo alarm is issued for other than the axis along which a
retract operation is performed, the servo activating current is
maintained until the retract operation is completed.

#6 PHS When the G81/G80 block contains no R command:

0: Acceleration/deceleration is not performed at the start or cancellation of EGB
synchronization.
1: Acceleration/deceleration is performed at the start or cancellation of EGB
synchronization. After acceleration at the start of synchronization, phase
synchronization is automatically performed.

#7 PHD The direction of movement for automatic phase synchronization is:

0: Positive (+).
1: Negative (-).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7703
ARO ARE ERV

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ERV During EGB synchronization (G81), feed per revolution is performed for:
0: Feedback pulses.
1: Pulses converted to the speed for the workpiece axis.

#1 ARE In the retract function by an alarm, retract operation is:

0: During the function mode (refer to Note.2) or automatic operation (automatic
operation signal OP <Fn000.7> = “1”).
1: During the function mode (refer to Note.2).

- 328 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 ARO In the retract function by an alarm, the tool retracts:
0: During the function mode (refer to Note.2).
1: During the function mode (refer to Note.2) and automatic operation (automatic
operation signal OP = “1”).

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (ARE) of parameter No. 7703 is
set to 1.

The following table lists the parameter settings and corresponding operation.

ARE ARO Operation

1 0 During function mode
1 1 During function mode and automatic operation
0 0
During function mode or automatic operation
0 1

NOTE
1 Parameters ARE and ARO are valid when bit 3 (ART) of parameter
No. 7702 is set to 1 (when the retract function executed when an
alarm is issued ).
2 The function mode described in the parameter ARE and ARO
shows that the following functions are activated.
- Electronic gear box(EGB)
- Flexible synchronous control

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7704 ACR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ACR In the advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control I or AI
contour control II mode, general purpose retract operation is:
0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7705 SEGs

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit spindle

#0 SEGs Simple spindle EGB function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
Set 1 for a serial spindle used as the slave axis for the simple spindle EGB function,.

7709
Number of the axial feed axis for helical compensation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
- 329 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0 or a value outside the set range,
the Z-axis is selected as the axial feed axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7731
HAD EPA HBR ECN EHF EFX

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 EFX As the EGB command or hob command by flexible synchronization control:

0: G80 and G81 are used.
1: G80.4 and G81.4 are used.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, no drilling canned cycle can be
used.

#1 EHF Feed-forward control for the axial feed axis for helical compensation is:
0: Enabled only during cutting.
1: Always enabled in the G81 synchronous mode.
Usually, set 0.
Feed-forward control is usually enabled in the cutting feed mode. When this parameter
is set to 1, feed-forward control is always enabled for the axial feed axis for helical
compensation during synchronization by the command (G81) for a hobbing machine.
When bit 3 (FFR) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, feed-forward control is always
enabled regardless of the setting of this parameter.

#3 ECN When the automatic phase synchronization function for the electronic gear box is
disabled, during EGB synchronization:
0: G81 cannot be specified again. (An alarm (PS1595) occurs.)
1: G81 can be specified.

#5 HBR In EGB synchronization start command G81.4 or flexible synchronization control start
command G81.4, the number of teeth is:
0: Specified in T.
1: Specified in R.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 is
set to 1.

#6 EPA Automatic phase synchronization for the electronic gear box or automatic phase
synchronization for flexible synchronization control by hob command is performed in
such a way that:
0: The machine coordinate 0 of the slave axis is aligned to the position of the master
axis one-rotation signal.
1: The position of the slave axis at synchronization start is aligned to the position of the
master axis one-rotation signal. (Specification of Series 16i)

- 330 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 HAD In electronic gear box, the timing for reflecting helical gear compensation and travel
distance of automatic phase synchronization to absolute coordinates is:
0: When synchronization is canceled.
1: During helical gear compensation and automatic phase synchronization.

7740 Feedrate during retraction

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate during retraction for each axis.

7741 Retracted distance

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the retracted distance for each axis.

7745 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration in retract operation for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
This parameter sets an acceleration rate for linear acceleration/deceleration in retract operation based on the
general-purpose retract function. Set a time (Time constant) used to reach the federate set
in parameter No.7740 for each axis.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ACR) of parameter No. 7704 is
set to 1 to perform a retract operation in the advanced preview
control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control mode.

7772
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about the tool axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of pulses per rotation about the tool axis (on the spindle
side), for the position detector.
For an A/B phase detector, set this parameter with four pulses equaling one A/B phase
cycle.

- 331 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
Specify the number of feedback pulses per rotation about the tool
axis for the position detector, considering the gear ratio with
respect to the position coder.

7773
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about the workpiece axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of pulses per rotation about the workpiece axis (on the
slave side), for the position detector.
Set the number of pulses output by the detection unit.
Set parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773 when using the G81 EGB synchronization command.

[Example 1] When the EGB master axis is the spindle and the EGB slave axis is the C-axis
CNC
×FFG α p/rev
n/m
Command Detector
pulses
Slave axis ×CMR Error counter Speed/current control Motor Gear ratio
Least command increment A
0.001deg
Detection unit Gear Spindle C-axis
ratio B

Synchronization ×FFG Detector

Synchronization factor
N/M β p/rev
switch
Follow-up
Dummy axis ×CMR Error counter

Gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B:

1/1 (The spindle and detector are directly connected to each other.)
Number of detector pulses per spindle rotation β: 80,000 pulses/rev
(Calculated for four pulses for one A/B phase cycle)
FFG N/M of the EGB dummy axis: 1/1
Gear ratio of the C-axis A: 1/36 (One rotation about the C-axis to 36 motor rotations)
Number of detector pulses per C-axis rotation α: 1,000,000 pulses/rev
C-axis CMR: 1
C-axis FFG n/m: 1/100

In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is:

80000 × 1/1 = 80000
Therefore, set 80000 for parameter No. 7772.
The number of pulses per C-axis rotation in the detection unit is:
1000000 ÷ 1/36 × 1/100 = 360000
Therefore, set 360000 for parameter No. 7773.

[Example 2] When the gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B is 2/3 for the above example (When
the detector rotates twice for three spindle rotations)
In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is:
2 160000
80000 × =
3 3

- 332 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
160000 cannot be divided by 3 without a remainder. In this case, change the setting of
parameter No. 7773 so that the ratio of the settings of parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773
indicates the value you want to set.
160000
No.7772 3 = 160000 160000
= =
No.7773 360000 360000 × 3 1080000
Therefore, set 160000 for parameter No. 7772 and 1080000 for parameter No. 7773.
As described above, all the settings of parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773 have to do is to
indicate the ratio correctly. So, you can reduce the fraction indicated by the settings. For
example, you may set 16 for parameter No. 7772 and 108 for parameter No. 7773 for this
case.

7776
Feedrate during automatic phase synchronization for the workpiece axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg/min
[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C).
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate during automatic phase synchronization for the
workpiece axis.
When this parameter is set to 0, the rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used as the
feedrate during automatic phase synchronization.

7777 Angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation signal position) the workpiece axis uses as the
reference of phase synchronization

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0.000 to 360.000 (when the increment system is IS-B)
This parameter sets the angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation signal
position) the workpiece axis uses as the reference of phase synchronization.

7778
Acceleration for acceleration/deceleration for the workpiece axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] deg/sec/sec
[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(For a millimeter machine, 0.0 to +100000.0, for an inch machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
This parameter sets an acceleration for acceleration/deceleration for the workpiece axis.

NOTE
If this parameter is 0, alarm PS1598 is issued when G81 is issued.

7782 Number of pulses from the position detector per flexible synchronization control master axis rotation

[Input type] Parameter input

- 333 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] 2-word axis

[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999
For a slave axis, set the number of pulses generated from the position detector per flexible
synchronization control master axis rotation.
For an A/B phase detector, set this parameter with four pulses equaling one A/B phase
cycle.

NOTE
This parameter is enabled when hob command is specified.

7783 Number of pulses from the position detector per flexible synchronization control slave axis rotation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999
For a slave axis, set the number of pulses generated from the position detector per flexible
synchronization control slave axis rotation.
Set the number of pulses output by the detection unit.

NOTE
This parameter is enabled when hob command is specified.

4.51 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (1 OF 4)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK<Gn044.1> is valid for PMC-controlled axes
0: Valid
1: Invalid
The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx <Gn108>depends on the setting of bit 1
(MLS) of parameter No. 8006.

#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.

No.8001#2=0
No.8001#2=1
Signals (same signals as those
(signals specific to the PMC)
used for the CNC)
*EFOV0 to
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <G012> <G151>
*EFOV7
Override cancellation signal OVC <G006. 4> EOVC <G150.5>
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2 <G014.0, .1> EROV1,2 <G150.0, .1>
Dry run signal DRN <G46.7> EDRN <G150.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection
RT <G19.7> ERT <G150.6>
signal

- 334 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
(The signal addresses at PMC selection time are for the group A.)

#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0: Invalid
1: Valid

#5 NCC When the program specifies a move command for a PMC-controlled axis (with the
controlled axis selection signal *EAX <Gn136> set to 1) not placed under PMC axis
control:
0: CNC command is valid.
1: The alarm (PS0130), “NC AND PMC AXIS ARE CONFLICTED” is issued.

#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command (12H) output size is:
0: 1 byte (0 to 255)
1: 2 bytes (0 to 65535)

#7 SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC

0: Uses the same signal SKIP <X004.7 or X013.7> as CNC.
1: Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP <X004.6 or X013.6> used by the PMC.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 DWE RPD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes

0: Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420
1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC

#1 DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the
increment system is IS-C
0: 1ms
1: 0.1ms

#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control
The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.

F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C

Millimeter input 0 10 1 0.1
(mm/min) 1 100 10 1
Inch input 0 0.1 0.01 0.001
(inch/min) 1 1 0.1 0.01

#4 PF1
#5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
0 1 1 / 10
1 0 1 / 100
1 1 1 / 1000

- 335 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#6 FR1
#7 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.

(1)T series
[Unit of data]
Unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No.
8002.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated following table
must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev

(2)M series
[Unit of data]
Unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No.
8002.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.01 0.0001 0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated following table
must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 FEXx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#3 FEXx The maximum feedrate that can be achieved by the machine during cutting feed or
continuous feed in PMC axis control is:
0: Not extended.
1: Extended.
- 336 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Restrictions
- Parameters for setting the time constants for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
When as the acceleration/deceleration type, linear acceleration/ deceleration after
interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation is used for
each of rapid traverse, cutting feed, and manual feed, the maximum allowable time
constant is a half of the maximum value that can be set conventionally.
The time constant parameters used are as follows:
Parameter No. Meaning
1620 Time constant (T) used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for
each axis, or time constant (T1) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse for each axis
1621 Time constant (T2) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis
1626 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in
the mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
5271 to 5274 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first to
fourth gears)
5365 to 5368 Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping (first to
fourth gears)

- VCMD waveform display function

As the feedrate increases, more data is acquired for VCMD waveform display,
which can prevent waveforms from being displayed correctly.

CAUTION
1 When this function is enabled, the feedrate is extended to the
maximum value that can be specified for cutting feed or continuous
feed in PMC axis control if CMR is 1. If CMR is greater than 1, the
feedrate is limited to a value smaller than the maximum value that
can be specified.
2 Note that the maximum motor speed may be exceeded depending
on the feedrate specified.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NCI DSL JFM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is
specified in axis control by the PMC.

Increment Bit 2 (JFM) of Millimeter input Inch input Rotation axis

-1
system No. 8004 (mm/min) (inch/min) (min )
0 1 0.01 0.00023
IS-B
1 200 2.00 0.046
0 0.1 0.001 0.000023
IS-C
1 20 0.200 0.0046

- 337 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#5 DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled:
0: An alarm PS0139, “CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS” is issued.
1: The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified group.

#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 IFV EVP DRR R10 CDI EDC

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a
PMC-controlled axis:
0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius.
1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with
a radius.
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1 (A move
command for each axis is based on diameter specification.)

#2 R10 When the parameter RPD (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying
a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is:
0: 1 mm/min.
1: 10mm/min.

#3 DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#4 EVP Speed command in PMC axis control is executed by:

0: Velocity control.
1: Position control.
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type (parameter
VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).

#5 IFV When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 in PMC axis control, the feedrate
override signal *EFOVx and the override cancel signal EOVC are:
0: Used on a path-by-path basis. (The group A of each path are used.)
1: Used on a group-by-group basis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8006 EAL EZR EFD MLS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 338 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 MLS When bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock
signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of
feedrate data is:
0: Unchanged (1 times).
1: 100 times greater.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
is invalid.

#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is:
0: Invalid.
With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224), “ZERO RETURN NOT
FINISHED” is not issued.
1: Valid.
A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an
NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.

#7 EAL In PMC axis control, resetting the CNC:

0: Does not release an alarm on the PMC controlled axis
1: Releases an alarm on the PMC controlled axis
If an alarm on the PMC controlled axis is released, the PCM controlled axis alarm
signal (EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2>) is set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8007 ESY VCP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 VCP Speed command in PMC axis control is:

0: FS10/11 type.
1: FS0 type.

#3 ESY In PMC axis control, external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 EMRx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to
MI5 <G106.0 to 4> set to 1 or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1.

- 339 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the
CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is
set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.

8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] T series: 1 to 4 (at 1-path control), 1 to 8 (at 2-path control)
M series: 1 to 4
Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.

P8010 Description
1 Uses path 1 DI/DO group A <G142 to G153>
2 Uses path 1 DI/DO group B <G154 to G165>
3 Uses path 1 DI/DO group C <G166 to G177>
4 Uses path 1 DI/DO group D <G178 to G189>
5 Uses path 2 DI/DO group A <G1142 to G1153>
6 Uses path 2 DI/DO group B <G1154 to G1165>
7 Uses path 2 DI/DO group C <G1166 to G1177>
8 Uses path 2 DI/DO group D <G1178 to G1189>

NOTE
Use path 1 DI/DO (1 to 4) for the axes controlled by path 1.
Use path 2 DI/DO (5 to 8) for the axes controlled by path 2.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8013 R20x ROPx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#3 ROPx When rotation axis rollover is enabled for an axis controlled in PMC axis control, the
direction in which a movement (rotation) is performed to reach an end point by a
reference position return command 07H to 0AH (equivalent to G28, G30P2/P3/P4) is:
0: Determined by the sign of the specified value.
1: The direction in the shortest path.

NOTE
ROPx is valid only when bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 1 and bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0.

#4 R20x When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis
control for the rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of
parameter No.1008 is set to 1), setting the bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008 which
specifies the direction of the rotation for an absolute command is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
The above direction of the rotation is as follows by setting the bit 1 (RABx) of parameter
No.1008 and the bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013.

- 340 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013

0 1
Direction of the Direction of the
0
shortest path shortest path
Bit 1 (RABx) of
Direction of sign of the
parameter No.1008 Direction of sign of the
1 amount of the
command value
movement to be made

NOTE
When "1" is set to R20x, the direction of the rotation is the same as
FS0i-C.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8019 EOS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 EOS In external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) in PMC axis control,
the serial spindle to be synchronized is:
0: The first spindle of path 1.
1: Any spindle.

NOTE
If EOS is set to 0, only the servo axis of path 1 can be specified.

8020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
For each axis, this parameter sets a feedrate (FL feedrate) after deceleration for reference
position return in PMC axis control.

NOTE
If 0 is specified, the value of parameter No. 1425 is used.

8022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control.

8028 Time for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

- 341 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Word axis

[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for parameter No. 8032 or this parameter. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8032, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.

Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8030
axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1622 is used.
The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear
acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.

FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8031
axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
For each axis, this parameters sets a lower feedrate limit (FL feedrate) for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.

NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1623 is used.
However, be sure to set 0 in this parameter and parameter No.
1623 for all axes at all times except for special purposes. If a value
other than 0 is specified, correct linear or circular figures cannot be
obtained.

8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for this parameter or parameter No. 8028. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8028, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
- 342 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment
8040
when speed command in PMC axis control is velocity control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment
when speed command in PMC axis control is velocity control.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and is executed by position control (parameter EVP
(No.8005#4) is 1).

4.52 PARAMETERS OF 2-PATH CONTROL (T SERIES)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DSB IAL RST
8100

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit machine group

#0 RST The pressing of the reset key on the MDI panel is:
0: Valid for two paths.
1: Valid only for the path selected by the path selection signal.

#1 IAL Choice of an option concerning operation continuation when an alarm is issued, and
choice of an option concerning the start of automatic operation in alarm state:
0: - When an alarm is issued, the operation is stopped with the other path(s) in same
group placed in hold state.
- When the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation cannot be started.
1: - Even when an alarm is issued, the operation is continued without stopping the other
path(s).
- Even when the other path or paths in same group are placed in alarm state, automatic
operation can be started.

#6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is:

0: Disabled.
If one of the paths undergoes a single block stop, only the path undergoes a single
block stop.
1: Enabled.
If one of the paths undergoes a single block stop, the other path undergoes a feed
hold stop.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
STW
8101

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 343 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#1 STW Waiting function by specifying start point is

0: not effective.
1: effective.

NOTE
Set STW to be 1 in both of paths when waiting function by
specifying start point is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MWT
8103

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code:

0: The path individual signal interface is used.
1: The path common signal interface is used.
This parameter can be selected only when 2-path control is used.

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, the operation equivalent to that of
the FS0i-C is assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PPW PSW
8105
PSW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit machine group

#1 PSW Timing to turn on the servo activating current when the power is turned on:
0: It is performed after waiting for the spindle to become ready.
1: It is performed without waiting for the spindle to become ready.

#2 PPW Timing to turn on the servo activating current when the power is turned on:
0: It is performed in all paths simultaneously.
1: It is performed in each path independently.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (PSW) of parameter No.8105 is
set to 1.

Waiting M code range (minimum value)

8110

Waiting M code range (maximum value)

8111

- 344 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 ,100to99999999
A range of M code values can be set by specifying a minimum waiting M coder value
(parameter No. 8110) and a maximum waiting M code value (parameter No. 8111).
(parameter No. 8110) ≤ (waiting M code) ≤ (parameter No. 8111)
Set 0 in these parameters when the waiting M code is not used.

NOTE
The M codes specified by these parameters prevent buffering.

4.53 PARAMETERS OF 0i -D / 0i Mate -D BASIC FUNCTIONS

8130 Number of controlled axes

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] T Series : 2 to Maximum number of controlled axes
M Series : 3 to Maximum number of controlled axes

This parameter sets the number of axes for each path.

NOTE
When spindle control with servo motor is enabled, set the number
of axes including this axis for the axes with a spindle controlled axis
with servo motor.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
EDC HPG
8131
AOV EDC F1D HPG

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 HPG Manual handle feed is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#1 F1D One-digit F code feed is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

- 345 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 EDC External deceleration is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#3 AOV Automatic corner override is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
BCD YOF TLF
8132
SCL SPK IXC BCD TLF

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 TLF Tool life management is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#1 YOF Y-axis offset is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#2 BCD Second auxiliary function is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#3 IXC Index table indexing is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

NOTE
When enabling the index table indexing function, set bit 0 (ITI) of
parameter No. 5501 to 0 in addition to this parameter. The index
table indexing function is enabled only when both ITI and IXC are
enabled.

#4 SPK Small diameter peck drilling cycle is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#5 SCL Scaling is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

- 346 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPG SSN SYC MSP SCS AXC SSC
8133
SSN SYC MSP SCS SSC

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SSC Constant surface speed control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#1 AXC Spindle positioning is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 Be sure to set 1 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 0 in bit 2
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the spindle positioning
function.
2 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function and spindle
positioning function cannot be made effective at the same time.
If both are specified as AXC=1 and SCS=1, both functions become
invalid.
Therefore, when a negative value is set in parameter No.1023 with
above specification, alarm (SV1026) is generated.
3 Be sure to set 0 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 1 in bit 2
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour
control function.

#2 SCS Cs contour control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 Be sure to set 0 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 1 in bit 2
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour
control function.
2 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function and spindle
positioning function cannot be made effective at the same time.
If both are specified as AXC=1 and SCS=1, both functions become
invalid.
Therefore, when a negative value is set in parameter No.1023 with
above specification, alarm (SV1026) is generated.
3 Be sure to set 1 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 0 in bit 2
(SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the spindle positioning
function.

- 347 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 MSP Multi-spindle is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#4 SYC Spindle synchronization is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#5 SSN Spindle serial output is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

Set this parameter as shown below depending on the spindle configuration.

Spindle configuration Parameter SSN

When all spindles in the entire system are serial spindles 0
When serial spindles and analog spindles are mixed in the entire system 0
When all spindles in the entire system are analog spindles 1

#6 SPG Polygon turning with two spindles is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

NOTE
Be sure to invalidate the polygon turning with two spindles by this
parameter when polygon turning is used. If the polygon turning is
performed when 1 is set in this parameter, the alarm is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NCT NBG NGR CCR BAR IAP
8134
NCT NBG NGR BAR IAP

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 IAP Conversational programming with graphic function is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#1 BAR Chuck and tail stock barrier function (T series) is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 The chuck and tail stock barrier function is provided only for the T
series.
2 When the chuck and tail stock barrier function is selected, stored
stroke limits 2 and 3 cannot be used.

- 348 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
That is, this parameter also specifies whether to use stored stroke limits 2 and 3 as shown
below.

BAR Stored stroke limits 2 and 3 are:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.

#3 NGR Graphic display is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#6 NBG Background editing is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NPD NCV NMC NOR NRG NSQ NHI NPE

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 NPE Stored pitch error compensation is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#1 NHI Manual handle interruption is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#2 NSQ Program restart is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#3 NRG Rigid tapping is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#4 NOR Spindle orientation is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

- 349 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when spindle serial output can be
used.

#5 NMC Custom macro is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#6 NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 NPD Pattern data input is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NCR NGW NDO NOW NOP NWC NWZ
8136
NTL NGW NOW NOP NWN NWC NWZ

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#1 NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#2 NWN Addition of workpiece coordinate system pair (48 pairs) is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#3 NOP Software operator's panel is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#4 NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#5 NDO Tool compensation count 64(T series 1-path system) / 128(T series 2-path system) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.

- 350 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When the option of tool compensation count 99 (T series 1-path
system) / 200 (T series 2-path system) is added, this parameter
becomes invalid in T series. (Tool compensation count is fixed to
99 (T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system).)

#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 NTL Tool length measurement is:

NCR Tool nose radius compensation is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NVC
8137

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 NVC Balance cutting is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.

NOTE
When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror
image for double turret cannot be used. To use the mirror image
for double turret, set this parameter to 1.

4.54 PARAMETERS OF INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH

PATH (T SERIES) (2-PATH CONTROL)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ZCL IFE IFM IT0 TY1 TY0
8140

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 351 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 TY0 This parameter sets the coordinate system relationship between two tool posts based on
the tool post of path 1.
#1 TY1
(1) When TY1=0 and TY0=0 (2) When TY1=0 and TY0=1
+X +X +X

Tool post 2
Tool post 1 Tool post 2
Tool post 1

+Z +Z
+Z

(3) When TY1=1 and TY0=0 (4) When TY1=1 and TY0=1
+X +X
+Z Tool post 2 Tool post 1
+Z

+Z
Tool post 1 Tool post 2 +Z

+X +X

#2 IT0 When offset number 0 is specified by the T code,

0: Checking interference between paths is stopped until an offset number other than 0
is specified by the next T code.
1: Checking interference between paths is continued according to the previously
specified offset number.

#3 IFM In manual mode, Interference check for each path is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#4 IFE Interference check for each path is:

0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#5 ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference
between paths.
0: Checked.
1: Not checked (Only interference along the X axis is checked.)

Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8151

Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8152

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
- 352 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Each of these parameters sets the distance between the tool posts of two paths.
Tool post 2

Reference
position
+X

ζ ε

+Z
Reference
position

Tool post 1
In the Z-X plane coordinate system with its origin at the represent position of tool
post 1, set the X component value ε of the reference position of tool post 2 in
parameter No. 8151 and set the Z component value ξ in parameter No. 8152.

WARNING
After modifying the parameter values, perform a manual reference
position return operation for both tool posts. Otherwise, the
internally stored positional relationships of the two tool posts are
not updated to the newly set parameter values.

4.55 PARAMETERS OF SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE

CONTROL AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES)
(1 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NRS SPE NCS AXS
8160

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 AXS When the axis moving signals MV1 to MV8<Fn102> or the axis moving direction signals
MVD1 to MVD8<Fn106> of the slave axis in superimposed control is output:
0: State output is performed according to the result of adding superimposed move
pulses.
1: State output is performed according to the result of movement along each axis
instead of superimposed move pulses.

#5 NCS If an overtravel alarm is issued for an axis under synchronous, composite, or

superimposed control, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.

- 353 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
If one of these paths is 1, both paths are assumed to be 1.

#6 SPE The synchronization deviation is:

0: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis.
1: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay.

NOTE
1 When the master and slave axes have different
acceleration/deceleration time constants, set 1.
2 SPE is valid when bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1.
SPE is used to find a synchronization deviation for comparison with
parameter No. 8181.

#7 NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is:
0: Released.
1: Not released.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NSR CRZ NMR
8161

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 NMR When an axis subject to composite control is placed in servo-off state:

0: Composite control is stopped
1: Composite control is not stopped, provided bit 0 (FUP) of parameter No.1819 is set
to 1 to disable follow-up for the axis.

#5 CRZ If the state of the composite control signal is switched in composite control on two axes
under Cs contour control, the reference position establishment state of the two axes in
composite control is:
0: Maintained. (The unestablished state is not assumed.)
1: Assumed to be unestablished.

#7 NSR When servo-off occurs with an axis in synchronous control:

0: Synchronous control is canceled.
1: Synchronous control is not canceled if follow-up operation is disabled for the axis
(with bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 set to 1).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MUMx MCDx MPSx MPMx OMRx PKUx SERx SMRx
8162

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SMRx Synchronous mirror-image control is:

0: Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)
1: Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)

- 354 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 SERx The synchronization deviation is:
0: Not detected.
1: Detected.

NOTE
When both master and slave axes move in synchronization, the
positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are compared with
each other. If the difference is greater than or equal to the value
specified in parameter No.8181, an alarm occurs. When either axis
is in the parking or machine-locked state, however, the
synchronization deviation is not detected.

#2 PKUx In the parking state,

0: The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated.
1: The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine coordinates are not
updated.

NOTE
1 With an axis for which polar coordinate interpolation is specified,
set this parameter to 1. If this parameter is set to 0, a coordinate
shift can occur when a single block stop or feed hold is performed
in the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
2 With an axis that is set to function as a synchronous master axis
and synchronous slave axis at the same time (with bit 1 (SYWx) of
parameter No. 8167), set this parameter to 1.
3 With an axis specified in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode, set this parameter to 1. If this parameter is set to 0, the
alarm PS0367, "3-D CONV. WAS COMMANDED IN SYNC MODE
AS THE PARAMETER PKUx(NO.8162#2) IS 0." is issued.
4 When specify the G53 command during master parking, set this
parameter to 1.

#3 OMRx Superimposed mirror-image control is:

0: Not applied. (The superimposed pulse is simply added.)
1: Applied. (The inverted superimposed pulse is added.)

#4 MPMx When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system is:
0: Not set automatically.
1: Set automatically.

- 355 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
start of composite control, it is calculated from the following:
Current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the
reference point of each axis (parameter No.8184).
When a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including
additional workpiece coordinate systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 0), however, instead of the coordinate value
obtained by the above calculation, the workpiece coordinate value
obtained by workpiece coordinate system presetting (equivalent to
G92.1 IP 0) in the machine coordinate system of the other axis in
composite control is set.

#5 MPSx When composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system is:
0: Not set automatically.
1: Set automatically.

NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
end of composite control, it is calculated from the following: Current
machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the
reference point of each axis under composite control (parameter
No.1250)
When a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including
additional workpiece coordinate systems) is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 0), however, instead of the coordinate value
obtained by the above calculation, the workpiece coordinate value
obtained by workpiece coordinate system presetting (equivalent to
G92.1 IP 0) in the machine coordinate system of the other axis in
composite control is set.

#6 MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the coordinate
systems placed:
0: In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (A movement is made in
the same direction along the corresponding axis.)
1: In opposite directions. Mirror-image composite control is applied. (A movement is
made in the reverse direction along the corresponding axis.)

- 356 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

X1 X2

MCDz MCDx
0 0
Z1 Z2
X1

MCDz MCDx
0 1
Z1 Z2

X2

X1 X2

MCDz MCDx
1 0
Z1 Z2

X1

MCDz MCDx
1 1
Z1 Z2

X2

#7 MUMx In composite control, a move command for the axis:

0: Can be specified.
1: Cannot be specified.

NOTE
Upon the execution of a move command along an axis for which
MUMx is set to 1 during mixed control, alarm PS0353, “THE
INSTRUCTION WAS DONE FOR THE AXIS WHICH WAS NOT
ABLE TO MOVE.” is issued. For example, when axis X1 and axis
X2 are placed under composite control, and a command for axis X2
(motor for axis X1) is to be disabled, set MUMx for path 2 to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NUMx MMIx SMIx SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx
8163

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#1 SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for
the master axis is
0: Not Performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates of each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No.8185.

- 357 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 SPSx When synchronous control terminates, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for
the master axis is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates for each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No.1250.

#3 SCMx When workpiece coordinates are calculated in synchronous control:

0: The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the slave
axis.
1: The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the
master axis and slave axis.

#4 SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the coordinate system in
synchronous control are:
0: Identical.
1: Opposite.
Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the master axis. These settings are
referenced during automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis at the start
of synchronous control.

#5 SMIx In synchronous control, the manual handle interruption amount for the master axis or the
mirror image mode is:
0: Reflected in the slave axis.
1: Not reflected in the slave axis.

When this bit (SMIx) is set to 0

Manual handle interruption :
To the travel distance along the slave axis, the interruption amount of the master axis
is also added.
Mirror image :
When mirror image is applied to the master axis, mirror image is also applied to the
slave axis.

When this bit (SMIx) is set to 1

Manual handle interruption :
To the travel distance along the slave axis, the interruption amount of the master axis
is not added.
Mirror image :
Even when mirror image is applied to the master axis, mirror image is not applied to
the slave axis.

#6 MMIx For a composite control axis, manual handle interruption under composite control is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

- 358 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 NUMx When neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied, a move command for
the axis is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled.

NOTE
If a move command is specified for an axis with NUMx set to 1
when neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied,
alarm PS0353, “THE INSTRUCTION WAS DONE FOR THE AXIS
WHICH WAS NOT ABLE TO MOVE.” is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SOKx OPSx MCEx MCSx MWEx MWSx
8164

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 MWSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
started, a workpiece shift and tool offset are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

NOTE
When bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No.8162 is set to 1 and workpiece
coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional workpiece
coordinate system) is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136
is 1), MWSx is enabled.

#1 MWEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is
canceled, a workpiece shift and tool offset are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

NOTE
When bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional
workpiece coordinate system) is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MWEx is enabled.

#2 MCSx A workpiece coordinate system automatically selected when composite control is started
is:
0: The machine coordinate system of the other path under composite control as
specified with parameter No. 8184.
1: The absolute coordinate system of the other path under composite control.

NOTE
When bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional
workpiece coordinate system) is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MCSx is enabled.

- 359 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 MCEx A workpiece coordinate system automatically selected when composite control is stopped
is:
0: The machine coordinate system of the other path under composite control as
specified with parameter No. 1250.
1: The absolute coordinate system of the other path under composite control.

NOTE
When bit 5 (MPSx) of parameter No. 8162 is set to 1 and
workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, including additional
workpiece coordinate system) is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 1), MCEx is enabled.

#5 OPSx When superimposed control is canceled, control in which an amount of movement along
a master axis subject to superimposed control is added to the workpiece coordinate of a
slave axis is:
0: Not applied.
1: Applied.

NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is enabled (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is 0), workpiece coordinate system presetting
(equivalent to G92.1IP0) is performed to set up a coordinate
system.

#6 SOKx If a master axis subject to superimposed control is also subject to synchronous control:
0: An alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous
control.
1: No alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous
control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MIX
8166

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 MIX Composite control uses:

0: A new 2-path interface. In this case, the composite partner axis is set in parameter
No. 8183 and the signal of the axis set in parameter No. 8183 is used as the
composite control axis selection signals MIX1 to MIX8 <Gn128.0 to Gn128.7>.
1: The conventional 2-path interface. In this case, parameter No. 8183 is set on path 2
and the signal on path 1 is used as the composite control axis selection signals MIX1
to MIX8.

- 360 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPVx SWSx SWMx SGSx SGMx SYWx
8167

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#1 SYWx The axis is:

0: Not used as a master axis and slave axis at the same time.
1: Used as a master axis and slave axis at the same time.

#2 SGMx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the start of synchronous control, a
tool offset is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.

NOTE
SGMx is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No.8163 is set to
1.

#3 SGSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the end of synchronous control, a
tool offset is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.

NOTE
SGSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No.8163 or bit 6
(SPVx) of parameter No.8167 is set to 1.

#4 SWMx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the start of synchronous control, a
workpiece shift is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

NOTE
SWMx is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No.8163 is set
to 1.

#5 SWSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the end of synchronous control, a
workpiece shift is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

NOTE
SWSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No.8163 or bit 6
(SPVx) of parameter No.8167 is set to 1.

#6 SPVx At the end of synchronous control, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the
slave axis is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

- 361 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the
end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is
calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates for each axis at the reference position set in parameter
No.1250.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WST MWR SVF MSO MPA
8168

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite control, or superimposed control

is issued:
0: Both paths are placed in feed hold state.
1: Only the path including the axis placed under synchronous control, composite
control, or superimposed control is placed in the feed hold state.
For example, in synchronous control within the same path, the path in which an
alarm occurred is placed in feed hold state.

#1 MSO When one of the following events occurs in synchronous control, composite control or
superimposed control:
• The emergency stop signal *ESP <Gn008.4> is turned off.
• The servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8 <Gn126.0 to Gn126.7> are turned on.
• A servo alarm is issued.

0: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is canceled and

follow-up operation is not performed.
For the operation to be performed when the servo-off signal is turned on, however,
the setting of bit 7 (NSR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in synchronous control or
the setting of bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161 is used in composite control.
1: The synchronous, composite control or superimposed control mode is not canceled.
The following operation is performed to perform follow-up operation:
When the emergency stop signal *ESP is turned off, the relevant path is determined
and operation is performed so that the emergency stop signal *ESP is virtually
turned off for the determined path.
When the servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8 are turned on, the relevant axis is
determined and operation is performed so that the servo-off signals SVF1 to SVF8
are virtually turned on for the determined axis.
When a servo alarm is issued, the relevant axis is determined and the alarm SV0003,
“SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL MODE CAN'T
BE CONTINUED” is issued for the determined axis to stop moving the tool along
the axis. When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, this servo-off
specification follows the SVF setting.

NOTE
1 This setting is valid also during operation. For all axes placed under
synchronous, composite control or superimposed control, the
emergency stop signal is turned off, the servo-off signal is turned
on, or a servo alarm is issued.

- 362 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
2 If the servo-off signal is turned on, DS1933 "NEED REF RETURN
(SYNC:MIX:OVL)" will be generated in superimposed control.
After canceling alarm, perform a manual reference position return.

#2 SVF When an axis under composite control is placed in the servo-off state:
0: Composite control is canceled.
1: Composite control is not canceled.

Follow-up specification follows the setting of bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819.
When bit 2 (SVF) of parameter No. 8168 is set to 1, bit 0 (NMR) of parameter No. 8161
is invalid. Bit 1 (MSO) of parameter No. 8168, specification for servo-off, is also invalid.

NOTE
If a composite control axis is placed in the servo-off state when
stopped, set this parameter to 1.

#4 MWR When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set if synchronization/

composite/superposition control is started or ended, the tool compensation number is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is
enabled (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).

#6 WST When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set up for a slave axis at the end of
synchronous control, workpiece coordinate system presetting is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is
enabled (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0) and bit 6 (SPV)
of parameter No. 8167 is 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MRFx MVMx MDMx
8169

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 MDMx As machine coordinates in composite control:

0: Coordinates for the local path are displayed.
1: Coordinates for the other path in composite control are displayed.

#1 MVMx In composite control, machine coordinates (#5021 and above) to be read are:
0: Machine coordinates of the local path.
1: Machine coordinates of the other path in composite control.

- 363 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 MRFx In composite control, the rapid traverse rate is:

0: The rapid traverse rate for the specified axis.
1: The rapid traverse rate for the axis along which a movement is made.

Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control

8180

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102,
103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . .)
This parameter sets the path number and intra-path relative axis number of the master axis
with which each axis is synchronized. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a
slave axis and is not synchronized with another axis. When an identical number is
specified in two or more parameters, one master axis has two or more slave axes.

Synchronization error limit of each axis

8181

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
When the synchronization deviation detected (bit 1 (SERx) of parameter No.8162 is set to
1), this parameter specifies the limit of the difference between the positioning deviation
of the slave axis and that of the master axis. Set this parameter to the slave axis.

Composite control axis of the other path in composite control for each axis
8183

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102,
103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . )
This parameter sets with which axis each axis is to be placed under composite control.
When zero is specified, control of the axis is not replaced under composite control. An
identical number can be specified in two or more parameters, but composite control
cannot be exercised for all of them at a time.

NOTE
When using the conventional 2-path interface (bit 1 (MIX) of
parameter No. 8166 is 1, set this parameter on path 2. In this
case, use the composite control axis selection signal on path 1.

Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under
8184 composite control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)

- 364 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter specifies the coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the
coordinate system of another axis under composite control.
This parameter is valid when bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No. 8162 is 1 and the workpiece
coordinate system is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1).
[Example] Exercising composite control to replace the X1-axis with the X2-axis
X1m
ΔZ2m

Z1m Zero point of the

X1 workpiece coordinate
Reference
ΔX2m system of path 2
position of path 1

Zero point of the Z1 Z2

workpiece coordinate
system of path 1 Reference
ΔX1m
X2 position of path 2

Z2m
ΔZ1m

X2m

(ΔX1m, ΔZ1m) are the coordinates of the reference point of path 2 on the workpiece
coordinate system of path 1. (ΔX2m, ΔZ2m) are the coordinates of the reference point of
path 1 on the workpiece coordinate system of path 2.
ΔX1m is specified for the parameter No. 8184x of path 1 and ΔX2m for the parameter No.
8184x of path 2.
If bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No.8162 is set to 1 when composite control is started, the
workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following conditions is specified:
X1 = (Value specified for the X-axis of path 1) ± (Machine coordinate of X2)
Plus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 1 is set to 0
Minus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 1 is set to 1
X2 = (Value specified for the X-axis of path 2) ± (Machine coordinate of X1)
Plus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 2 is set to 0
Minus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 2 is set to 1
If bit 5 of parameter No.8162 MPSx is set to 1 when composite control is terminated, the
workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following conditions is specified:
X1 = (Parameter No.1250 of path 1) + (Machine coordinate of X1)
X2 = (Parameter No.1250 of path 2) + (Machine coordinate of X2)

Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference position

8185

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)

- 365 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the workpiece coordinates on each master axis, subject to
synchronous control, when the master and slave axes are at the reference position. This
parameter is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No.8163 is set to 1. Set this
parameter for the master axis.

Master axis under superimposed control

8186

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 101, 102, 103, . . . , (path number)*100+(intra-path relative axis number) (101, 102,
103, . . . , 201, 202, 203, . . . )
This parameter sets the path number and intra-path relative axis number of a
superimposed master axis for each axis when superimposed control is exercised. When
zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave axis under superimposed control and
the move pulse of another axis is not superimposed.
An identical number can be specified in two or more parameters to exercise superimposed
control simultaneously. This means that superimposed control with one master axis and
multiple slave axes is possible.
A slave axis may function as the master axis of another axis to allow three-generation
superimposed control: parent (master axis) - child (slave axis/master axis) - grandchild
(slave axis).

In this case, a movement along the child is made by its travel distance plus the travel
distance of the parent, and a movement along the grandchild is made by its travel distance
plus the travel distance of the child plus the travel distance of the parent.

Example of the relationship of parent (X1 of path 1) - child (X2 of path 2) - grandchild
(U2 of path 2):
The travel distance of X1 is superimposed on X2, and the travel distances of X1 and X2
are further superimposed on U2.
Parameter No. 8186x of path 2 = 101
Parameter No. 8186u of path 2 = 201

4.56 PARAMETERS OF ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8200 AZP AZR AAC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 AAC
0: Does not perform angular axis control.
1: Performs inclined axis control.

- 366 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 AZR
0: The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference
position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control.
1: The machine tool is not moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference
position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control.

#3 AZP When a movement is made along the Cartesian axis due to a movement along the slanted
axis, reference position return end signals for the Cartesian axis ZP1 to ZP8 <Fn094.0 to
Fn094.7> are:
0: Not cleared.
1: Cleared.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8201 ADG AO3 AO2 AOT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 AOT Stored stroke limit 1 under angular axis control is handled as:
0: Value in the slanted coordinate system.
1: Value in the Cartesian coordinate system.

#1 AO2 Stored stroke limit 2 under angular axis control is handled as:
0: Value in the slanted coordinate system.
1: Value in the Cartesian coordinate system.

#2 AO3 Stored stroke limit 3 under angular axis control is handled as:
0: Value in the slanted coordinate system.
1: Value in the Cartesian coordinate system.

#7 ADG The contents of diagnostic data Nos. 306 and 307 are:
0: Not swapped. The slanted axis and Cartesian axis are displayed in this order.
1: Swapped. The Cartesian axis and slanted axis are displayed in this order.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8209 ARF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 ARF In angular axis control, a movement from an intermediate point to the reference position
in the G28/G30 command is:
0: Made in the angular coordinate system.
1: Made in the Cartesian coordinate system.

- 367 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

8210 Slant angle of a slanted axis in angular axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] -180.000 to 180.000. However, angular axis control is disabled in the ranges -95.000 to
-85.000 and 85.000 to 95.000 (in the case of IS-B).

8211 Axis number of a slanted axis subject to angular axis control

8212 Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis control

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
When angular axis control is to be applied to an arbitrary axis, these parameters set the
axis numbers of a slanted axis and Cartesian axis. If 0 is set in either of the two
parameters, the same number is set in the two parameters, or a number other than the
controlled axis numbers is set in either of the two parameters, a slanted axis and Cartesian
axis are selected as indicated in the following table:

Slanted axis Cartesian axis

Y-axis (axis with 2 set in parameter No. Z-axis (axis with 3 set in parameter No.
M series
1022) of the basic three axes 1022) of the basic three axes
X-axis (axis with 1 set in parameter No. Z-axis (axis with 3 set in parameter No.
T series
1022) of the basic three axes 1022) of the basic three axes

4.57 PARAMETERS OF AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8301 SYA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 SYA In the servo-off state in axis synchronous control, the limit of the difference between the
positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8302 SMA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 368 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#7 SMA When an absolute position detector is attached, and bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815
for an axis in synchronous operation is set to OFF, APZ of the pairing axis in
synchronous operation is:
0: Not set to OFF.
1: Set to OFF.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8303 SOFx SYPx SAFx ATSx ATEx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 ATEx In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

#1 ATSx In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:
0: Not started
1: Started
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

NOTE
When starting automatic setting for grid positioning, set ATS to 1.
Upon the completion of setting, ATS is automatically set to 0.

#2 SAFx In axis synchronous control, a movement along a slave axis is:

0: Not added to actual feedrate display.
1: Added to actual feedrate display.
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

#4 SYPx In axis synchronous control, some parameters must be set to the same value for the master
and slave axes. When a value is set in such a parameter for the master axis:
0: The same value is not automatically set in the parameter for the slave axis.
1: The same value is automatically set in the parameter for the slave axis.

NOTE
1 For the parameters that can be set automatically, refer to
Subsection 1.6.7, "Automatic Setting of Parameters for Slave
Axes", in Connection Manual (Function) (B-64903EN-1).
2 Set this parameter for both the master and slave axes.

- 369 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 SOFx In axis synchronous control, the synchronization establishment function based on

machine coordinates is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8304 SYEx SCAx MVBx ADJx SSAx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SSAx When the one-direction synchronization establishment function under axis synchronous
control is used:
0: The axis with a larger machine coordinate is used as the reference.
1: The axis with a smaller machine coordinate is used as the reference.

NOTE
1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
2 Set this parameter (SSA) to the same value for both the master
and slave axes.

#2 ADJx In axis synchronous control, this parameter specifies an axis along which a movement is
made in the modification mode.
0: A movement is not made in the modification mode along the axis.
1: A movement is made in the modification mode along the axis.
When this parameter is set to 1, the modification mode is set.
Along an axis with this parameter set to 1, a movement is made by a move command for
the master axis.
Set this parameter for one of the master and slave axes.
When there are multiple slave axes for one master axis, set this parameter to 1 for an axis
with which a synchronization error excessive alarm is issued for recovery. If an alarm is
issued with multiple axes, modify this parameter after recovery of one axis to recover
another axis.

#4 MVBx In the modification mode, a move command in a direction that increases a

synchronization error is:
0: Ignored.
1: Valid.
When there are multiple slave axes for one master axis, an attempt to reduce the
synchronous error of a slave axis by a movement along the master axis can increase the
synchronization error of another slave axis. If this parameter is set to 0 in such a case, a
movement can be made in neither direction along the master axis. In this case, set bit 2
(ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 to make a movement along a slave axis to perform a
corrective operation.

#5 SCAx In axis synchronous control:

0: Synchronous operation is performed when the axis synchronous control manual feed
selection signal SYNCJ or the axis synchronous control selection signal SYNC for
slave axes is set to 1.
1: Synchronous operation is performed at all times.
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

- 370 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 SYEx When external machine coordinate system shift is specified by external data input/output
for the master axis in synchronous control, the slave axis is:
0: Not shifted.
1: Shifted by the same amount as specified for the master axis.
Set this parameter for the slave axis.
This function is disabled during normal operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8305 SRF SSE SSO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 SSE After emergency stop, the uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous
control is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#2 SRF In axis synchronous control, G27, G28, G30, and G53:

0: Make the same movement along the slave axis as a movement along the master axis.
1: Make movements along the slave axis and master axis independently to specified
positions.

8311 Axis number of master axis in axis synchronous control

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Select a master axis in axis synchronous control. In the parameter for the slave axis, set
the axis number of the master axis.
[Example 1] When one set of axis synchronous control is used:
When the master axis is the first axis (X-axis), and the slave axis is the third axis (Z-axis),
set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
Parameter No.8311 X (first axis) = 0
Parameter No.8311 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No.8311 Z (third axis) = 1
Parameter No.8311 A (fourth axis) = 0
[Example 2] When two sets of axis synchronous control is used:
When the master axes are the first axis and second axis, and the slave axes are the fourth
axis and third axis, set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
Parameter No.8311 X (first axis) = 0
Parameter No.8311 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No.8311 Z (third axis) = 2
Parameter No.8311 A (fourth axis) = 1

- 371 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

8312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in axis synchronous control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] -127 to 128
This parameter sets mirror image for the slave axis. When 100 or a more value is set with
this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to synchronous control. Set this
parameter to the slave axis.
[Example] For reverse synchronization with the master axis being the third axis and the slave axis
being the fourth axis, set parameter No. 8312 as follows:
Parameter No.8312 X (first axis) = 0
Parameter No.8312 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No.8312 Z (third axis) = 0
Parameter No.8312 A (fourth axis) = 100

NOTE
In synchronous operation with mirror image applied,
synchronization establishment, synchronization error checking, and
modification mode cannot be used.

8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check based on machine coordinates

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a maximum allowable error in a synchronization error check based on
machine coordinates. When the error between the master and slave axes in machine
coordinates exceeds the value set in this parameter, the machine stops with the servo
alarm (SV0005).
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

NOTE
Set 0 in this parameter when a synchronization error check is not
made.

8323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the master axis and slave
axis position deviations. When the absolute value of a positional deviation difference
exceeds the value set in this parameter in axis synchronous control, the alarm (DS0001) is
issued.
Set this parameter with a slave axis. If 0 is specified in this parameter, no position
deviation difference check is made.

- 372 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
8325 Maximum compensation value in synchronization establishment based on machine coordinates

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for synchronization. When a
compensation value exceeding the value set in this parameter is detected, the servo alarm
(SV0001) is issued, and the synchronization establishment is not performed.
Specify a slave axis for this parameter. To enable this parameter, set the parameter SOF
(bit 7 of parameter No.8303) to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, synchronization
establishment is not performed.

8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis reference counters

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
The difference between the master axis reference counter and slave axis reference counter
(master axis and slave axis grid shift) is automatically set when automatic setting for grid
positioning is performed. Then, the difference is transferred together with an ordinary
grid shift value to the servo system when the power is turned on. This parameter is set
with a slave axis.

8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter sets a time from the servo ready signal SA <F000.6>, being set to 1 until
torque difference alarm detection is started in axis synchronous control.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 512 msec is assumed.
Set this parameter with a slave axis.

8337 M code for turning off synchronization in axis synchronous control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter specifies an M code for switching from synchronous operation to normal
operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.

8338 M code for turning on synchronization in axis synchronous control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter specifies an M code for switching from normal operation to synchronous
operation.
- 373 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.

4.58 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON

AND STOP
8341 Program number subject to comparison and stop

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the program number, including a sequence number, subject to
sequence number comparison and stop. Parameter No.8342 is used to set a sequence
number subject to check termination.

8342 Sequence number subject to comparison and stop

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999
This parameter sets the sequence number subject to sequence number comparison and
stop.
If the block containing the sequence number set with this parameter is executed while the
program set with parameter No.8341 is being executed, a single block stop occurs after
the block is executed. At this time, the setting is automatically set to -1.

NOTE
1 When -1 is set in parameter No. 8342, comparison and stop is
disabled.
2 Comparison and stop cannot be performed using a sequence
number contained in a block (such as a macro statement, M98, and
M99) that is processed only inside the CNC.
3 When a match is found with the sequence number of a block (such
as an L specification of a canned cycle) that specifies the number
of repeats, operation stops after executing as many times as the
number of repeats.
4 If the sequence number set in parameter No. 8342 appears more
than once in the program, operation stops at the block where the
first match is found in the order of execution.

4.59 PARAMETERS OF HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION

FUNCTION (1 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8360 CHF CVC ROV

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 ROV As rapid traverse override for a section from the oscillation starts point to point R:
0: Oscillation override is used.
1: Rapid traverse override is used.
- 374 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#2 CVC The feedrate along the oscillation axis is changed:

0: At the upper or lower dead point immediately after the feedrate change command is
issued.
1: At the upper dead point immediately after the feedrate change command is issued.

#7 CHF On the oscillation screen, the oscillation base feedrate:

0: Can be set.
1: Cannot be set.

8370 Oscillation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of control axes
This parameter sets which servo axis the oscillation axis corresponds to.

8371 Oscillation reference point (point R)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the oscillation axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The data set in this parameter is absolute coordinates.

8372 Oscillation upper dead point

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the oscillation axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The data set in this parameter is absolute coordinates.

8373 Oscillation lower dead point

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the oscillation axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The data set in this parameter is absolute coordinates.

8374 Oscillation base feedrate

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the oscillation axis
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
- 375 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the oscillation feedrate.

8375 Maximum oscillation feedrate

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
The oscillation feedrate is clamped at this parameter setting. The maximum feedrate must
be set for the oscillation axis. If this parameter is set to 0, no movement is made for
oscillation.

NOTE
Please set a value that is smaller than the normal rapid traverse
rate (parameter No.1420) to Maximum oscillation feedrate.

4.60 PARAMETERS OF ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI

ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI CONTOUR
CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR CONTROL II (1 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8451 NOF ZAG

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 ZAG The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control II (deceleration
based on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter Nos. 8456, 8457, and 8458.

#7 NOF In AI contour control II, an F command is:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the specification of the maximum allowable feedrate set
in parameter No. 8465 is assumed.

Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour
8456
control II

Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour
8457
control II

Override for range 4 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour
8458
control II

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100
- 376 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
For the function of decelerating according to the cutting load in AI contour control II, the
override set in a parameter can be applied according to the angle at which the tool moves
downward along the Z-axis. The feedrate obtained according to other conditions is
multiplied by the override for the range containing angle θ at which the tool moves
downward.
However, when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No.19515 is set to 0, no parameter is available
to range 1, and 100% is applied at all times. When bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No.19515 is
set to 1, set an override value for range 1 in parameter No.19516.
Range 1 0°≤θ<30°
Range 2 30°≤θ<45°
Range 3 45°≤θ<60°
Range 4 60°≤θ≤90°

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8459 OVR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#3 OVR In deceleration by speed difference or acceleration rate in advance preview control/AI

advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II , an override is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
An override is generally enabled for a specified speed and advance preview control/AI
advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II is applied to the
specified speed. When this parameter is set to 1, an override is applied to the speed
managed by advance preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I
/AI contour control II.

Upper limit of the speed of advance preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI
8465
contour control II

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the upper limit of the speed of advance preview control/AI advance
preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II.
If a speed higher than this parameter is specified in the advance preview control/AI
advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II mode, clamping is
performed at the speed specified by this parameter.
When this parameter is 0, clamping is not performed.

Upper limit of the speed of advance preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI
8466
contour control II (when a rotation axis is specified independently)

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)

- 377 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the upper limit of the speed of advance preview control/AI advance
preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II during independent
specification of a rotation axis.
If a speed higher that this parameter is specified in the advance preview control/AI
advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II mode, clamping is
performed at the speed specified by this parameter.
When this parameter is 0, clamping is performed at the value specified by parameter No.
8465.

8486
Maximum travel distance of a block where Nano smoothing is applied

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter specifies a block length used as a reference to decide whether to apply
Nano smoothing. If the line specified in a block is longer than the value set in the
parameter, Nano smoothing is not applied to that block.

8487
Angle at which Nano smoothing is turned off

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 90
This parameter sets the angle used to determine whether to apply Nano smoothing.
At a point having a difference in angle greater than this setting, Nano smoothing is turned
off.

8490
Minimum travel distance of a block where Nano smoothing is applied

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a block length used to determine whether to apply Nano smoothing.
If the line specified in a block is shorter than the value set in this parameter, Nano
smoothing is not applied to that block.

4.61 OTHER PARAMETERS (1 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8650 CNA RSK

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
- 378 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 RSK When the key is pressed, the key code is:

0: Not passed to the application.
1: Passed to the application.

#1 CNA If a CNC alarm is issued when the user screen for the C language executor is displayed:
0: Whether the screen display is automatically switched to the alarm screen depends on
the setting of bit 7 (NPA) of parameter No. 3111.
1: The screen display is not switched to the alarm screen, regardless of the setting of bit
7 (NPA) of parameter No. 3111.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8654 DCC CGC CXW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 CXW In stand-alone type CNC unit, the main task of C Language Executor is started:
0: Simultaneously when the CNC screen display function is started.
1: Simultaneously when the CNC is started.

#2 CGC When the crt_setmode function is called, the graphic plane is:
0: Cleared.
1: Not cleared.

#5 DCC With rs_status function of C Language Executor, the transmission stop status and
reception stop status are:
0: Posted.
1: Not posted.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8655 RCC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.

- 379 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 RCC When rs_close function is executed in RS-232C communication of C Language Executor

with DC control exercised in the transmission/reception mode:
0: Communication is ended after checking the DC code of the communication
destination device.
1: Communication is ended without checking the DC code of the communication
destination device.

8661 Variable area size

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 When the setting of this parameter is modified, the variable area
and SRAM disk are initialized.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] KByte
[Valid data range] 0 to 59(251)
This parameter sets the size of the static variable area that can share among each task for
using in C Language Executor application. Set a size in steps of 1KB. The maximum
specifiable size is 59KB (or 251KB when the C Language Executor additional SRAM
option is selected). However, the total size of the variable area and the SRAM disk area
should not exceed [Usable SRAM Size - 1]KB (namely, 63KB or 255KB). When the total
size exceeds [Usable SRAM Size - 1]KB or the set value is illegal data range, C
Language Executor application is not executed.

8662 SRAM disk size

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 When the setting of this parameter is modified, the SRAM disk is
initialized.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] KByte
[Valid data range] 0 to 63(255)
This parameter sets the size of the SRAM disk for using in C Language Executor
application. Set a size in steps of 1KB. The minimum size of the SRAM disk is 4KB.
When this parameter set 0 to 3, the size of the SRAM disk becomes 4KB. The maximum
specifiable size is 63KB (or 255KB when the C Language Executor additional SRAM
option is selected). When the total size exceeds [Usable SRAM Size - 1]KB or the set
value is illegal data range, C Language Executor application is not executed.

8663 Time zone setting

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

- 380 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] -12x3600 to 12x3600
This parameter specifies the time-zone difference from Greenwich Mean Time in seconds.
The difference for Japan is -9 hours. (The setting is -9×3600 = 32400 seconds)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8706 MRD

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#6 MRD The communication device used in remote machine diagnosis is:

0: not available.
1: Fast Ethernet board.

8760 Program number of data input/output (Power Mate CNC manager)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
This parameter sets the program numbers of programs to be used for inputting and
outputting slave data (parameters) when the Power Mate CNC manager function is used.
For a slave specified with I/O LINK channel m and group n, the following program
number is used:
Setting + (m - 1) × 100 + n × 10

8781 DRAM size used for the C language executor

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 64KByte
[Valid data range] 16 to 192
This parameter sets the size of DRAM used for the C language executor. Specify a value
greater than or equal to 1024K bytes in 64K-byte units. When a value not within the valid
data range is set, the specification of 0 is assumed.
When 0 is set, the C language executor is not started.

NOTE
The actually usable size depends on the RAM capacity and option
configuration.

- 381 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8801
to #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8805
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path

8811
to
8813
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word

8814
to
8816

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path

8820
to
8829

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path

Parameters Nos. 8801 to 8805, 8811 to 8813, 8814 to 8816, and 8820 to 8829 are
designed specifically for use by the machine tool builder, and the usage of these
parameters varies from machine to machine. For details, refer to the manual issued by the
machine tool builder.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8850 MDG

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:

0: Available.
1: Not available.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8855 TRFx TRSx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 TRSx Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:

0: Not available.
1: Available. (Set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8860.)
- 382 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#1 TRFx Trouble forecast of disturbance level of servo axis is:

0: Not available.
1: Available. (Set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8861.)

8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation is set.

8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance level

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for disturbance level is set.

4.62 PARAMETERS OF MAINTENANCE

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8900 PWE

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of those parameters that cannot be
set by setting input is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8901 MEN

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8903 PDM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PDM When the remaining time of an item falls to a value less than the percentage of the life
specified in parameter No.8911, the life warning status on CNC status display area is
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
- 383 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MPM
8906

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#7 MPM On the periodic maintenance screen,

0: the life time is not counted in each path.
1: the life time is counted in each path.

8911 Percentage for life warning display on the periodic maintenance screen

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 99
On the periodic maintenance screen, if the remaining time of an item falls to a value less
than the percentage of the life specified in this parameter, the item name and remaining
time is displayed in red as a warning.

8940 Initial screen title character code 1

to
8949 Initial screen title character code 10

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0, 32, 45, 46, 48 to 57, 65 to 90
This parameter sets the character codes of the character string to be displayed on the
initial screen immediately after power-on.
If the number of characters to be displayed is less than 10, the parameters corresponding
to the space exceeding the character length are set to 0.

NOTE
For character codes, see APPENDIX A, "CHARACTER CODE
LIST".

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8950 MEM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MEM The memory contents display screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Is displayed.

- 384 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

WARNING
1 The memory contents display screen can be displayed by setting 1
to this parameter.
In this screen, trying to specify the address of any memory location
to which access is inhibited for the address search function will
result in a system alarm.
Before starting to use the address search function, confirm that the
address you will specify is accessible, and be sure to input the
address correctly.
2 This function is intended for maintenance purposes. It should not
be used by general users.

- 385 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.63 PARAMETERS OF THE INCORRECT OPERATION

PREVENTION FUNCTION
10000 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.01
to to
10019 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis and geometry offsets
• M series, tool offset memory A offset
• M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and length offsets

10020 Upper limit 1 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10039 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis and geometry offsets
• M series, tool offset memory A offset
• M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and length offsets

10040 Lower limit 2 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10059 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis and geometry offsets
• M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and radius offsets

- 386 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
10060 Upper limit 2 of tool offsets No.01
to to
10079 Upper limit 2 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis and geometry offsets
• M series, tool offset memory C, geometry, and radius offsets

10080 Lower limit 3 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10099 Lower limit 3 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, tool nose radius offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, tool nose radius and geometry offsets

10100 Upper limit 3 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10119 Upper limit 3 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, tool nose radius offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, tool nose radius and geometry offsets

10120 Lower limit 4 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10139 Lower limit 4 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:

- 387 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis and wear offsets

• M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and length offsets

10140 Upper limit 4 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10159 Upper limit 4 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, X-axis and wear offsets
• M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and length offsets

10160 Lower limit 5 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10179 Lower limit 5 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis and wear offsets
• M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and radius offsets

10180 Upper limit 5 of tool offsets No.01

to to
10199 Upper limit 5 of tool offsets No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Z-axis and wear offsets
• M series, tool offset memory C, wear, and radius offsets

Lower limit 6 of tool offsets No.01

10200

to to
Lower limit 6 of tool offsets No.20
10219

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)

- 388 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, tool noise radius and wear offsets

Upper limit 6 of tool offsets No.01

10220

to to
Upper limit 6 of tool offsets No.20
10239

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, tool noise radius and wear offsets

10240 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01

to to
10259 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the lower limit of a tool offset number range.
These parameters correspond to the tool offset lower/upper limits set in parameter Nos.
10000 to 10239.

10260 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01

to to
10279 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the upper limit of a tool offset number range.
These parameters correspond to the tool offset lower/upper limits set in parameter Nos.
10000 to 10239.

Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.01

10280

to to
Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.04
10283

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
- 389 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis and geometry offsets

Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.01

10284

to to
Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.04
10287

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, without tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis offset
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis and geometry offsets

Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.01

10288

to to
Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.04
10291

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the lower limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis and wear offsets

Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.01

10292

to to
Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.04
10295

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the upper limits of the following offset values:
• T series, with tool geometry/wear offsets, Y-axis and wear offsets

- 390 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01
10296

to to
Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04
10299

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the lower limit of a tool offset number range.
These parameters correspond to the tool offset lower/upper limits set in parameter Nos.
10280 to 10295.

Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01

10300

to to
Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04
10303

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the upper limit of a tool offset number range.
These parameters correspond to the tool offset lower/upper limits set in parameter Nos.
10280 to 10295.

10304 Lower limit of workpiece zero point offsets No.01

to to
10309 Lower limit of workpiece zero point offsets No.06

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Each of these parameters sets the lower limit of workpiece zero point offset values.

10310 Upper limit of workpiece zero point offsets No.01

to to
10315 Upper limit of workpiece zero point offsets No.06

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Each of these parameters sets the upper limit of workpiece zero point offset values.

10316 Lower limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.01

to to
10321 Lower limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.06

[Input type] Parameter input

- 391 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Word path

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the lower limit of a workpiece zero point offset range. For
an additional workpiece coordinate system, set a value after adding 1000.
These parameters correspond to the workpiece zero point offset lower/upper limits set in
parameter Nos. 10304 to 10315.

10322 Upper limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.01

to to
10327 Upper limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.06

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets
Each of these parameters sets the upper limit of a workpiece zero point offset range. For
an additional workpiece coordinate system, set a value after adding 1000.
These parameters correspond to the workpiece zero point offset lower/upper limits set in
parameter Nos. 10304 to 10315.

Lower limit of workpiece shifts

10328

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a workpiece shift lower limit.

Upper limit of workpiece shifts

10329

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a workpiece shift upper limit.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10330 RSC ASD MID HSC ADC PDC IIC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 IIC At the time of incremental input, a confirmation message is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#1 PDC At the time of program deletion, a confirmation message is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

- 392 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#2 ADC At the time of deletion of all data, a confirmation message is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#3 HSC When a cycle start is executed halfway in the program, a confirmation message is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#4 MID Updated modal information is:

0: Highlighted.
1: Not highlighted.

#6 ASD Axis state display is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

#7 RSC When the cycle start is performed after the single block stop is performed and the
program is edited:
0: An automatic operation is restarted.
Moreover, the program edit is prohibited in the single block stop on the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen.
1: The message and the soft key which confirm whether the cycle start is permitted or
not are displayed.
When the soft key operation to permit is performed,
An automatic operation is restarted if the cycle start is performed again.
When the soft key operation to permit is not performed,
the cycle start becomes invalid.
Moreover, the program edit is permitted in the single block stop on the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen.

NOTE
In the state of automatic operation stop or feed hold, It is judged
that the program edit operation is performed when the time
specified for parameter No.10333 passes after the mode is
changed to EDIT.

10331 Lower limit of external workpiece zero point offsets

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the lower limit of external workpiece zero point offsets.

10332 Upper limit of external workpiece zero point offsets

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
- 393 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the upper limit of external workpiece zero point offsets.

10333 Time to judge the editing time for the function to confirm operation restart after program is edited

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
In the state of automatic operation stop or feed hold, It is judged that the program edit
operation is performed when the time specified for parameter No.10333 passes after the
mode is changed to EDIT and bit 7 (RSC) of parameter No.10330 is set to 1.
When 0 is set, It is considered as 1000ms.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10334 MDW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MDW When a reset occurs during program operation, a message saying "MODAL DATA IS
CHANGED BY BLOCK STOP" is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402 is 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10335 MSC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MSC In the 2-path system of FANUC Series 0i-TD, a confirmation of the start from a middle
block is :
0: executed only on a started path.
1: executed on both paths.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only in the case HSC(No.10330#3) is 0.
2 This parameter is valid only on 2-path system.
3 Although the data type of this parameter is “bit path” , the same
value should be input to every path.

4.64 OTHER PARAMETERS (2 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10339 SI5

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 394 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 SI5 αi Spindle amplifier for Series 30i-B is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 A spindle amplifier for Series 0i/0i Mate-D is available, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
2 FSSB connection with the optical fiber cable is not available.

4.65 PARAMETERS OF AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10340 EEB EIB AAP ABI ABP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ABP Automatic data backup at power-on is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 ABI Overwrite-protected backup data is:

0: Regarded as invalid.
1: Regarded as valid.

#2 AAP Backup of NC programs in FROM is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#6 EIB When the CNC is turned on next, overwrite-protected backup data is:
0: Not updated.
1: Updated.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (ABI) of parameter No. 10340 is
set to 1.

#7 EEB When an emergency stop occurs, a backup operation is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

10341 Interval at which automatic data backup is performed periodically

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] No unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 365

- 395 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When automatic data backup is performed periodically, this parameter sets the interval as
the number of days. When the power is turned on after a set number of days has passed
from the date of the previous backup, a backup operation is performed. If 0 is set in this
parameter, this function is disabled.

4.66 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10350 SOT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 SOT When Flexible synchronization control is used with High precision oscillation function
and the master axis of Flexible synchronization control is operated by High precision
oscillation function, stored stroke check 1 for slave axis is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
Stored stroke check 1 for master axis is executed at the upper
dead point and lower dead point regardless of the setting of this
parameter before High precision oscillation function is executed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10351 DWS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#2 DWS Dwell status signal DWL <Fn526.5> is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

4.67 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (2 OF 4)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10410 EAXx NRTx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 NRTx In manual intervention and return, the axis is:

0: Subject to manual intervention and return.
1: Not subject to manual intervention and return.

- 396 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 EAXx When other axis is preset with the workpiece coordinate system preset signal while this
axis is moving under the PMC axis control:
0: The alarm (PS1820), “ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE” occurs.
1: An alarm doesn’t occur.

4.68 PARAMETERS OF SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (2 OF 2)

10421 RGB value of color palette 1 for text for color set 2

10422 RGB value of color palette 2 for text for color set 2
to to
10435 RGB value of color palette 15 for text for color set 2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 to 151515
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette for text by specifying a
6-digit number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.

10461 RGB value of color palette 1 for text for color set 3

10462 RGB value of color palette 2 for text for color set 3
to to
10475 RGB value of color palette 15 for text for color set 3

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 to 151515
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette for text by specifying a
6-digit number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.

4.69 PARAMETERS OF WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS

Parameter Nos. 10600 to 10719 shown below hold initial values and values set through screen
manipulations during waveform diagnosis.
These parameters are set by the CNC. So, never input values from the parameter screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10600

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 397 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

10601
to to
10719

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte / 2-word

4.70 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO

MOTOR (1 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11000 SRVx PCAx SPCx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 SPCx SV speed control mode of spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Position control type.
1: Velocity control type.

#4 PCAx When bit 0(PCE) of parameter No.11006 is set to 0, to each axis, positional control under
spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 SRVx In spindle control with servo motor:

0: Use as the servo motor spindle is not performed.
1: Use as the servo motor spindle is performed.

NOTE
For the axes that use spindle control with servo motor, set also
parameter No. 11010.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11001 DCSx DDMx TCRx SRBx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SRBx Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed during rigid tapping with
servo motor is:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.

#1 TCRx When the speed is controlled under spindle control with servo motor,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation:
0: Enables parameter No. 1622 (time constant of cutting feed acceleration/deceleration
for each axis)
1: Enables parameter No.11016 (time constant specific to speed control)
- 398 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Set the parameter for the axis subject to spindle control with servo motor.

#2 DDMx The motor used for spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Not a DD motor.
1: A DD motor.

#6 DCSx Special acceleration for deceleration is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11005 SIC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SIC Spindle indexing is:

0: Performed based on absolute coordinates.
1: Performed based on machine coordinates.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11006 PCE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 PCE Positional control under spindle control with servo motor is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
This parameter enables positional control with all axes with spindle
control with servo motor. To each axis, when you want to set
positional control enabled or disabled, use bit 4 (PCAx) of
parameter No.11000.

11010 Number of an axis subject to spindle control with servo motor

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of controlled spindles
This parameter sets a spindle number for a servo axis subject to spindle control with servo
motor.

- 399 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
Set a spindle number for the axis set by bit 7 of parameter No.
1100. Set 0 for an axis not subject to spindle control with servo
motor.

11011 Movement of spindle control with servo motor axis per revolution

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the amount of movement per revolution of the servo motor spindle in
spindle control with servo motor.

11012 Spindle indexing speed for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
If 0 is set, the spindle indexing speed is assumed to be the setting of parameter No. 11020
(speed (S0) for switching acceleration/ deceleration for each axis).

11013 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the positioning deviation limit during movement for each axis in
spindle control with servo motor.

11014 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the positioning deviation limit during a stop for each axis in spindle
control with servo motor.

11015 Maximum motor speed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

- 400 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets the maximum motor speed in spindle control with servo motor.

11016 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter sets acceleration/deceleration after interpolation during speed control in
spindle control with servo motor. Set this parameter for the axis subject to spindle
control with servo motor. Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/
deceleration in cutting feed, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or
linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Type of
acceleration/deceleration is applied by parameter CTLx, CTBx (No.1610#0, #1).

11017 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in SV speed control mode for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the lower limit speed (FL speed) of exponential
acceleration/deceleration during speed control in spindle control with servo motor.
Set this parameter for the target axis for spindle control with servo motor.

11020 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (1st) for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the speed at which acceleration/deceleration is switched during
rotation control in spindle control with servo motor. (First step)

11021 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (2nd) for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the speed at which acceleration/deceleration is switched during
rotation control in spindle control with servo motor. (Second step)

11030 Individual acceleration / deceleration 1 (Leg 1)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1/s
[Valid data range] 0 to 100000
This parameter sets the acceleration/deceleration used during rotation control in spindle
control with servo motor. When the speed ranges from 0 to acceleration switching speed
1, acceleration/deceleration 1 is applied. Acceleration switching speed 1 is the speed set
in parameter No. 11020.
- 401 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

11031 Individual acceleration / deceleration 2 (Leg 2)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1/s
[Valid data range] 0 to 100000
This parameter sets the acceleration/deceleration used during rotation control in spindle
control with servo motor. When the speed ranges from acceleration switching speed 1 to
acceleration switching speed 2, acceleration/ deceleration 2 is applied. Acceleration
switching speed 1 and acceleration switching speed 2 are the speeds set in parameter Nos.
11020 and 11021, respectively.

11032 Individual acceleration / deceleration 3 (Leg 3)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1/s
[Valid data range] 0 to 100000
This parameter sets the acceleration/deceleration used during rotation control in spindle
control with servo motor. The speed is acceleration/deceleration 3 in the range from
acceleration switching speed 2 to the maximum speed. Acceleration switching speed 2
is the speed set in parameter No. 11021.

Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis in
11050
rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, 0.0 to +10000.0)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation for each axis.
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, the value is clamped to 100000.0. If 0 is set, the
specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed.

11051 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation (time for changing from the state of constant federate (A) to the state of
constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 11050: time of (B) in the figure below).

- 402 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Speed in tangent direction

Based on the setting of parameter

No. 11050, an optimum inclination
is calculated automatically.

(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)

Set time in parameter No. 11051.

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the

11052
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode in rigid tapping

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in advanced preview control,
not the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is
used.
Be sure to specify the same time constant value for all axes except for a special
application.
If different values are set, correct linear and circular figures cannot be obtained.

11060 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (first gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (second
11061
gear)

11062 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (third gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping (fourth gear)
11063

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Set the time constant of rigid tapping with servo motor in these parameters (Nos. 11060
to 11063).
Set these parameters with the servo motor spindle in rigid tapping.

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping
11065
extraction (first gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping
11066
extraction (second gear)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping
11067
extraction (third gear)

- 403 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in rigid tapping
11068 extraction (fourth gear)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
When bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, time constants for extraction of rigid
tapping with servo motor can be set in these parameters (Nos. 11065 to 11068).
Set these parameters with the servo motor spindle in rigid tapping.

Path number with which the rotation of each spindle is specified

11090

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
When a path is specified for spindle commands, this parameter sets a path number with
which the rotation of a spindle can be specified.
0: Spindle commands can be output from both paths.
1 to 2: Spindle commands can be output from a set path.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when SPSP<Gn536.7> is set to 1.
2 If the setting is illegal, an alarm (PS5305) is issued when a spindle
command is issued from any one of the paths.
3 This setting does not apply to spindle commands using the spindle
select signals (SWS1 to SWS3<Gn027.0 to 2>).

4.71 PARAMETERS OF TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING

(M SERIES) (1 OF 2)

11220 Minimum distance used for determining a plane when a tilted working plane indexing with three points
is specified

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
When a tilted working plane indexing with three points is specified, if the distance (used
for determining a place) between a straight line passing two points and the remaining one
point is short, the plane is unstable. In this parameter, set the minimum distance used for
determining a plane. If the distance is shorter than the value set in this parameter, an
alarm PS5457, “G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR” is issued.

- 404 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
D3R
11221
CFW TLC 3DW D3R MTW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MTW Multiple tilted working plane indexing are:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#1 D3R In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode or tilted working plane indexing
mode, rapid traverse in canned cycle for drilling is:
0: Performed in the cutting feed mode.
1: Performed in the rapid traverse mode.

#2 3DW If, in the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, workpiece coordinate
system selection using a G code is specified, the selection:
0: Operates in accordance with conventional specifications. (The workpiece coordinate
system difference is reflected in the program coordinate system direction.)
1: Operates in accordance with the same specifications as those of workpiece
coordinate system selection (bit 6 (3TW) of parameter No. 1205 = 1) during the
tilted working plane indexing. (The workpiece coordinate system difference is
reflected in the workpiece coordinate system direction.)

CAUTION
If this parameter is set to 1, only G54 to G59 and G54.1 can be
specified. If G52 and G92 are specified, alarm PS5462, "ILLEGAL
COMMAND (G68.2/G69)" is issued.
If G54 to G59 and G54.1 are specified, buffering is suppressed.

#3 TLC During tool length compensation, 3-dimensional coordinate conversion:

0: Cannot be used.
1: Can be used.

#4 CFW When the end point of tool axis direction control (G53.1/G53.6) during execution of the
tilted working plane indexing is a singular point:
0: The second rotation axis is not operated.
1: The second rotation axis is controlled so that the direction of the second feature
coordinate system matches that of the workpiece coordinate system.

4.72 PARAMETERS OF INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND

DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (1 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 CIM NIM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 405 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command

(G20 or G21) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece
coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below:
0: An alarm PS1298, “ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC CONVERSION” is issued.
1: Clearing is performed.

This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is 1 or bit 2 (IRF) of
parameter No. 14000 is 1 and clears the following items.:
• Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal *ABSM <Gn006.2>
is ”1”
• Issuance of a move command with the machine locked
• Movement by handle interrupt
• Operation with a mirror image
• Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system is set up

4.73 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO (2 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TRS
11223

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 TRS In threading cycle retraction, when a block that specifies return to the start point of the
threading cycle is executed, threading signal THRD <Fn002.3> is:
0: Set to 0.
1: Set to 1.

4.74 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE CONTROL AND

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11240 AMP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 AMP Movement from the midpoint to the reference position by the G28 or G30 command or
movement by the G53 command in the advance preview control/AI advance preview
control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II mode uses:
0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

- 406 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
The setting of this parameter is valid when the following conditions
are met.
1 Bit 4 (ZRL) of parameter No. 1015 is 1 (G28, G30, and G53
must be interpolation commands).
2 Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is 1 (interpolation positioning
is enabled).
3 Parameter No. 1671 (maximum acceleration during rapid
traverse) is set.
4 Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 is 1
(acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for rapid
traverse).

To enable blinking display and signal output indicating the advance

preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI
contour control II mode even when G28, G30, or G53 is specified,
set bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 1612 to 1 in addition to the above
settings.

4.75 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATE SYSTEM

11275 The top number of M code used to turn on each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
Specify the top number of M code for turning “1” each axis workpiece coordinate system
preset signals WPRST1 to WPRST7 <Gn358.0 to Gn358.6> during automatic operation.
When the specified M codes are within the range specified with this parameter and
parameter No.11276, each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal is checked and
preset workpiece coordinate system for axis that the signal is turned “1”.
The specified M codes prevent buffering.

NOTE
When each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals are
turned “1” more than two signals by an M code, turn “1” the signals
of all axis at the same timing. If the timing is different, only the axis
of the first signal turned “1” is preset.
If you want to turn “1” the signals at the different timing, please
specify M code separately.

11276 The number of M code used to turn on each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
Specify the number of M code for turning “1” each axis workpiece coordinate system
preset signals WPRST1 to WPRST7 <Gn358.0 to Gn358.6> during automatic operation.
For example, when parameter No.11275 = 100 and parameter No.11276 = 10 are set,
From M100 to M109 are used for turning “1” each axis workpiece coordinate system
preset signal.
- 407 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When 0 is set, the number of M code is assumed to be 1.

NOTE
Set only M code that is not used for another function.
(M00 to 05,30,98,99, 198 M code used to call the subprogram, etc.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11277 PWR WPA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 WPA When an M code for turning on the workpiece coordinate system preset signal for an axis
is specified, but the signal is not turned on, or an auxiliary function lock is provided:
0: An alarm PS1820, “ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE” is issued.
1: The alarm PS1820 is not issued.

#5 PWR When bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No.3104 is set to 0, the relative coordinate value is
0: Preset to 0.
1: Preset to the machine coordinate value.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (PPD) of parameter
No.3104 is set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11278 WMC

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 WMC In the "direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured", the workpiece origin
offset value is
0: calculated based on the absolute coordinate value.
Workpiece origin offset value =
Absolute coordinate value before measurement - Measured value
+ Selected workpiece origin offset value
+ External workpiece origin offset value
1: calculated based on the machine coordinate value. (FS0i-C compatible specification)
Workpiece origin offset value = Machine coordinate value - Measured value

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MWK
11284

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 408 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 MWK When the workpiece coordinate system is valid (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No.8136
is 0), the behavior of the coordinate system setting when the composite control is begun
or ended is:
0: The FS0i-D specification. (The preset which corresponds to G92.1 is performed.)
1: The FS0i-C specification.

4.76 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (2 OF 6)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11300 MUC ATH MPH ASH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 ASH When the actual feedrate is read with FOCAS2 and the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.
If this parameter is set to 1, the machine coordinates of the machine unit with the delay in
acceleration/deceleration and the servo delay considered are read for all axes, regardless
of the setting of bit 7 (EMP) of parameter No. 11313.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#5 MPH When the machine coordinates of the machine unit with the delay in
acceleration/deceleration and the servo delay not considered are read with FOCAS2 and
the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#6 ATH When the disturbance load torque data are read with FOCAS2 and the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#7 MUC When the modal data are read with FOCAS2 and the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

- 409 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11302 PES ADC SMD SDG SPR SPG

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 SPG Initially, the program screen is:

0: Displayed full-screen.
1: Displayed in a window.

#1 SPR Initially, the parameter screen is:

0: Displayed full-screen.
1: Displayed in a window.

#2 SDG Initially, the diagnosis screen is:

0: Displayed full-screen.
1: Displayed in a window.

#3 SMD The MDI program screen is:

0: Displayed according to the setting of bit 0 (SPG) of parameter No. 11302.
1: Displayed in a window.

If this parameter is set to 0, the first display mode entered after the power is turned on is
determined according to the setting of bit 0 (SPG) of parameter No. 11302. Depending on
the display mode, the MDI program screen is displayed full-screen or in a window. Also,
the screen display can be dynamically switched between the full-screen mode and the
window mode by interacting with the program screen in another mode.

If this parameter is set to 1, the MDI program screen is always displayed in a window,
and it is impossible to switch between the full-screen mode and the window mode by
operations.

#4 ADC When all alarms have been eliminated, or the message key is pressed on the alarm screen:
0: The screen display does not change.
1: The screen display changes to the screen displayed before the alarm screen.

#5 PES After a program search operation is performed on the program list screen:
0: The cursor moves to a program on the list screen.
1: A specified program is selected as the main program, and the screen display changes
to the edit screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11303 ISQ DPM LDP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 410 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#0 LDP The servo load meter axis display:
0: Interacts with the axis display of coordinate values.
1: Does not interact with the axis display of coordinate values.

#4 DPM During MDI program execution, blocks that call an execution macro are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#5 ISQ During MDI editing, automatic sequence number insertion is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

11304
GGD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 GGD The guidance screen for tilted working plane indexing is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

11307 Display sequence of the coordinates in current position display

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 5
This parameter sets the display sequence of the coordinates of a position displayed on the
following screens:
10.4” display units
• Total position display screen
• Total position display on each screen
8.4” display units
• Total position display screen
The display sequence of coordinates corresponds to the parameter setting as follows:

Display sequence of
coordinates 1 2 3 4
Setting
Relative Absolute Machine Remaining
0 coordinates coordinates coordinates travel distance
Relative Machine Absolute Remaining
1 coordinates coordinates coordinates travel distance
Relative Remaining Absolute Machine
2 coordinates travel distance coordinates coordinates

- 411 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Display sequence of
coordinates 1 2 3 4
Setting
Absolute Machine Relative Remaining
3 coordinates coordinates coordinates travel distance
Absolute Remaining Relative Machine
4 coordinates travel distance coordinates coordinates
Machine Remaining Relative Absolute
5 coordinates travel distance coordinates coordinates

If the setting is beyond the valid data range, 0 is assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGH ABH SPH PGS DOP
11308
DGH ABH SPH PGS

[Input type] parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 DOP If an alarm was issued in a path not being displayed:

0: The screen display does not change to the alarm screen.
1: The screen display changes to the alarm screen.

#4 PGS In program search operation:

0: A specified program name is searched for.
1: An O number program is searched for with "O" omitted.

#5 SPH When the spindle speed data are read with FOCAS2 or the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#6 ABH When the absolute coordinates data are read with FOCAS2 or the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

#7 DGH When the Remaining travel distance data are read with FOCAS2 or the PMC window:
0: Data that has been updated at conventional intervals (approximately 32 ms) is read.
1: Data that has been updated at short intervals is read.

NOTE
When quick response is not required in particular for display
operation and so on, normally set this parameter to 0 to reduce the
load on the CNC.

- 412 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11309 Menu number selected on the pattern menu screen

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] -128 to 127
This parameter displays the menu number selected on the pattern menu screen.
This value is the same as that of system variable #5900.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11313 EMPx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#7 EMPx In FOCAS2 and PMC window, the machine coordinate which acceleration/deceleration
delay and servo delay are considered:
0: cannot be read. (0 is read as a machine coordinate.)
1: can be read.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTC DFM
11318
RTC LSO DFM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 DFM On the program list screen, of the soft key character strings when devices are selected and
selected device name character strings, the character strings related to the memory card
are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.

Soft key character strings when devices are selected

(10.4-inch display unit)
DFM=0 DFM=1
Mode Name Name
EDIT M CARD
EDIT
MEMCARD
Other than EDIT M CARD
OPER.
EDIT M CARD
MEMORY I/O
Other than EDIT CARD M CARD
DNC

Soft key character strings when devices are selected

(8.4-inch display unit)
DFM=0 DFM=1
Mode Name Name
EDIT MC-EDT
MEMCARD
Other than EDIT MC-OP.
EDIT MC-I/O
M-CARD
Other than EDIT MC-DNC

- 413 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Selected device name character strings

DFM=0 DFM=1
MEMCARD MC-PROG
M_CARD MC-FILE

#5 LSO When level is selected on precision level select screen or machining quality level
adjustment screen:
0: Soft key and MDI key can be used.
1: Only soft key can be used.

#6 RTC On the program list screen, a file selected by a selection operation:

0: Can be copied repeatedly.
1: Cannot be copied repeatedly.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11320 DHN

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DHN On the program check screen, HD.T and NX.T, and a T number are:
0: Not displayed at the same time.
1: Displayed at the same time.
If DHN is set to 1, HD.T, NX.T, and T are displayed regardless of the setting of bit 2
(PCT) of parameter No. 3108.

11321 Spindle tool name (1st character)

11322 Spindle tool name (2nd character)

11323 Spindle tool name (3rd character)

11324 Spindle tool name (4th character)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
The name of the spindle tool (HD.T) displayed on the program check screen can be
changed.
Any character string consisting of numeric characters, alphabetical characters, katakana
characters, and symbols with a maximum length of four characters can be displayed.

NOTE
For characters and codes, see Appendix A, "CHARACTER-CODE
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE".
If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code, "HD.T" is
displayed.

11325 Next machining tool name (1st character)

11326 Next machining tool name (2nd character)

11327 Next machining tool name (3rd character)

- 414 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11328 Next machining tool name (4th character)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
The name of the next machining tool (NX.T) displayed on the program check screen can
be changed.
Any character string consisting of numeric characters, alphabetical characters, katakana
characters, and symbols with a maximum length of four characters can be displayed.

NOTE
For characters and codes, see Appendix A, "CHARACTER-CODE
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE".
If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code, "NX.T" is
displayed.

4.77 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (2 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

11329
GST ACT AER GTF BGM GTL DPC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 DPC The current coordinates displayed on each screen of the dynamic graphic display function
are:
0: Absolute coordinates.
1: Machine coordinates.

#2 GTL When animated simulation is performed with the dynamic graphic display function,
drawing at positions with tool length compensation considered is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#3 BGM Coordinates used by the dynamic graphic display function are:

0: Absolute coordinates.
1: Machine coordinates.

#4 GTF In tool path drawing with the dynamic graphic display function, drawing at in a position
where tool compensation (tool length compensation, cutter compensation) is considered
is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#5 AER When the tool path is drawn with the dynamic graphic display function, automatic erasure
at the start of drawing is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

- 415 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#6 ACT In tool path drawing with the dynamic graphic display function, the drawing color of a
tool path is:
0: Not changed automatically.
1: Changed automatically.

#7 GST When drawing cannot be performed for a command with the dynamic graphic display
function:
0: The command is ignored, and drawing continues without stopping drawing.
1: Drawing stops.

11330
Magnification of drawing in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] 0.01
[Valid data range] 1 to 10000
This parameter sets the magnification of the drawing range in the dynamic graphic
display function.

11331
Screen center coordinate value in the drawing range in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999）
This parameter sets the coordinate value of the center of the drawing range in the
dynamic graphic display function.

NOTE
If bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No. 11329 is set to 1, set the coordinate
value on each axis in the machine coordinate system.

11332
Drawing range of tool path drawing in dynamic graphic display (maximum value)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the maximum coordinates in the drawing range in tool path drawing
with dynamic graphic display function.

11333
Drawing range of tool path drawing in dynamic graphic display (minimum value)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
- 416 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the minimum coordinates in the drawing range in tool path drawing
with dynamic graphic display function.

11334
Rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system in dynamic graphic display (vertical direction)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] degree
[Valid data range] -360 to 360
This parameter sets the rotation angle (vertical direction) of the drawing coordinate
system in the dynamic graphic display function.

11335
Rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system in dynamic graphic display (horizontal direction)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] degree
[Valid data range] -360 to 360
This parameter sets the rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system in the dynamic
graphic display function (the angle of rotation about the vertical axis on the screen, that
passes the center position of the blank).

11336
Drawing color of the tool path in tool path drawing in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
This parameter sets the color in which the tool path is drawn with the dynamic graphic
display function.

11337 Color of the cursor indicating the tool position on the PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen of
dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
This parameter sets the color of the cursor indicating the tool position on the PATH
GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen of the dynamic graphic display function.

11339
Drawing start sequence number in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999
This parameter sets the sequence number at which drawing is started by the dynamic
graphic display function.

- 417 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

11340
Drawing end sequence number in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999
This parameter sets the sequence number at which drawing is ended by the dynamic
graphic display function.

11341
Drawing color of a blank figure in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
This parameter sets the color in which a blank figure is drawn with the dynamic graphic
display function.

11342
Rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system of dynamic graphic display (screen center)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] degree
[Valid data range] -360 to 360
This parameter sets the rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system in dynamic
graphic display function (the angle of rotation about the vertical axis on the screen plane,
that passes the center position of the blank).

11343
Blank figure in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
This parameter sets the type of a blank figure in dynamic graphic display function.
Setting Figure
0 Cylinder or hollow cylinder (parallel to the Z-axis)
1 Rectangular parallelepiped

11344
Blank reference position in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999）
This parameter sets the reference position of a blank in the dynamic graphic display
function by using coordinate values in the workpiece coordinate system.

- 418 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
If bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No. 11329 is set to 1, set coordinate
values in the machine coordinate system.

11345
Blank dimension I in dynamic graphic display

11346
Blank dimension J in dynamic graphic display

11347
Blank dimension K in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.000 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the dimensions of a blank in the dynamic graphic display function
according to the blank figure as follows:

Blank figure Address I Address J Address K

Rectangular Length in the X-axis Length in the Y-axis Length in the Z-axis
parallelepiped direction direction direction
Cylinder Radius of a cylinder 0 Length of a cylinder
Barrel Radius of the outer Radius of the inner Length of a barrel
circle of a barrel circle of a barrel

11348
Drawing color of a tool in animated simulation in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
This parameter sets the color in which a tool is drawn during animated simulation in the
dynamic graphic display function.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PDM PLI DAS
11349
PDM PLI GSP ABC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 ABC In animated simulation in the dynamic graphic display function, when a fine boring cycle
or back boring cycle, which is a hole machining canned cycle, is performed, the
movement for a shift at the hole bottom is:
0: Not drawn.
1: Drawn.

- 419 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 GSP In tool path drawing in the dynamic graphic display function, the drawing start position
is:
0: The end position of a block that makes a movement for the first time.
1: The current position.

NOTE
When G92, G52, or G92.1 is specified at the beginning of a
program to be drawn, the position specified in this G code is
assumed to be the drawing start position.

#5 DAS The scroll mode when displaying a multi-path editing screen first is:
0: Single scroll mode
1: Simultaneous scroll mode

#6 PLI When program list screen (CNC_MEM) extends over two or more pages, the transition of
head page and the final page by page change key/cursor movement key is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (FS0i-C compatible specification)
1150
#7 PDM When the pattern data input function is enabled (bit 7 (NPD) of parameter No. 8135 is 0),
displaying of the variable name and comment on the custom macro screen is:
0: Performed only during menu selection.
1: Always performed.

4.78 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (3 OF 6)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PAD 9DE
11350
QLS PAD 9DE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#4 9DE The number of axes that can be displayed on one screen of the 8.4-inch monitor is:
0: Up to 4.
1: Up to 5.

#5 PAD On the pitch error compensation screen, axis names are:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#6 QLS The machining quality level adjustment screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11353 SEK

[Input type] Parameter input

- 420 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Bit

#0 SEK When the power is turned on, or when the clear state is present, sequence numbers are:
0: Not maintained.
1: Maintained.

NOTE
During a subprogram call, the sequence number of the subprogram
is maintained.

11363
Radius of a tool figure in dynamic graphic display

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm,inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.000 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the radius of a tool figure in animated simulation with the dynamic
graphic display function.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11369 MDP MDL MDC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MDC MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for C language executor is

0: not displayed
1: displayed

#1 MDL MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for PMC ladder program is

0: not displayed
1: displayed

#2 MDP MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for CNC parameters is

0: not displayed
1: displayed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11370 NVL

[Input type] parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#1 NVL When the touch panel is used, virtual MDI key is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 421 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When this parameter is set, virtual MDI key is displayed on the IPL
screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11372 MSH MSM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 MSM The machine state monitoring screen

0: is not displayed.
1: is displayed.

#7 MSH The machine state history screen

0: is not displayed.
1: is displayed.

11376 Time-out period of USB memory

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the time-out period of the USB memory. Please adjust this parameter according to the
USB memory.

NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, it is assumed to 30.

11378 PMC path number of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to to
11381 PMC path number of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Data range] 0 , 1, 9
The PMC path number of the PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is
set.
The value and the PMC path number that can be set are as follows.
No.11378 to 11381 PMC Path Number
0 Unsetting
1 1st PMC
9 Dual Check Safety

11382 Address kind of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to to
11385 Address kind of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Data range] 0 to 10
Address kind of PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is set.
- 422 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
The value and the address kind that can be set are as follows.
No.11382 to 11385 Address Kind
0 Unsetting
1 X
2 Y
3 G
4 F
5 A
6 R
7 T
8 K
9 C
10 D

11386 Address number of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to to
11389 Address number of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-Word
[Data range] Refer to PMC Programming Manual (B-64393EN) for detail.
Address number of PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is set.

4.79 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (2 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
M8D
11400

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 M8D The number of digits of a T code used to change tool compensation automatically is:
0: 4. (Existing DI signals G68 and G69 are used.)
1: 8. (DI signals G525 to G528 are used.)

4.80 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING (2 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11420 RAU

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 RAU The rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

11421 Maximum acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11422 Maximum acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

- 423 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

11423 Maximum acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

Maximum acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11424

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] rev/sec２
[Valid data range] 0 to 10000.0
This parameter sets the maximum acceleration.

11425 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping optimum

acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11426 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping optimum

acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11427 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping optimum

acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0~200
This parameter sets the acceleration change time (time required to change from constant
speed state (A) to acceleration/deceleration state (C) at the acceleration calculated from
rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (indicated by (B) below)) of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration.
Speed min-1
The maximum acceleration within the
maximum allowable acceleration is
calculated automatically.

(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)

Acceleration change time

11429 P1 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11430 P2 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11431 P3 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11432 P1 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11433 P2 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

- 424 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11434 P3 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11435 P1 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11436 P2 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11437 P3 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

P1 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11438

P2 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11439

P3 spindle speed of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11440

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets the ratio of the spindle speed at acceleration setting points P1 to P3 of
P0 to P4 to the maximum spindle speed (parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244). The spindle
speed at P0 is 0 and the spindle speed at P4 is the maximum spindle speed. The
acceleration setting point at which 0 is set is skipped.

11441 P0 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11442 P1 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11443 P2 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11444 P3 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11445 P4 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11446 P0 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11447 P1 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11448 P2 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11449 P3 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11450 P4 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11451 P0 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11452 P1 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11453 P2 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11454 P3 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

- 425 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

11455 P4 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

P0 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11456

P1 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11457

P2 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11458

P3 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11459

P4 allowable acceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11460

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets the ratio of the allowable acceleration at acceleration setting points P0
to P4 to the maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424). The rate of the
acceleration setting point at which 0 is set is assumed to be 100%.

11461 P0 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11462 P1 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11463 P2 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11464 P3 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11465 P4 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (1st gear)

11466 P0 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11467 P1 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11468 P2 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11469 P3 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11470 P4 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (2nd gear)

11471 P0 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11472 P1 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11473 P2 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

11474 P3 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

- 426 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11475 P4 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (3rd gear)

P0 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11476

P1 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11477

P2 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11478

P3 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11479

P4 allowable deceleration of rigid tapping optimum acceleration/deceleration (4th gear)

11480

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets the ratio of the allowable deceleration at acceleration setting points
P0 to P4 to the maximum acceleration (parameters Nos. 11421 to 11424). The rate of
the acceleration setting point at which 0 is set is assumed to be 100%.

4.81 PARAMETERS OF ARBITRARY SPEED THREADING

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11485 RMT AST

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 AST Arbitrary speed threading is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 RMT Re-machining thread is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
When setting this parameter to 1, set bit 0 (AST) to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11486 AMM ART ADQ

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
- 427 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 ADQ Command for shifting the threading start angle by address Q in re-machining thread is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 ART Arbitrary speed threading mode is:

0: Canceled by reset.
1: Not canceled by reset.

NOTE
1 In case of this parameter is 0, if reset operation is executed in
arbitrary speed threading mode, Cs contour control change signal
CON <Gn027.7> (or Cs contour control change signals in each
axis CONSx <Gn274.0 ~ 2>) must be set to "0".
2 In case of this parameter is 1, if reset operation is executed in
arbitrary speed threading mode, Cs contour control change signal
CON <Gn027.7> (or Cs contour control change signals in each
axis CONSx <Gn274.0 ~ 2>) must be maintained to "1". If it
cancels the arbitrary speed threading mode, M code of cancel the
arbitrary speed threading (No.11488) must be specified and CON
(or CONSx) must be set to "0".

#2 AMM In arbitrary speed threading mode, M code to start arbitrary speed threading mode is:
0: Disable to command (Alarm (PS0529) "THREADING COMMAND IMPOSSIBLE"
occurs).
1: Enabled to command.

NOTE
In case of this parameter is 1, M code to start arbitrary speed
threading can be re-commanded in arbitrary speed threading
mode. Arbitrary speed threading mode is already selected. So
process to change to arbitrary speed threading is not performed,
but M code is output. Operate properly with PMC ladder.

11487 M code to start arbitrary speed threading mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] None
[Valid data range] 0 ~ 99999999
This parameter sets the M code to start arbitrary speed threading mode.

NOTE
1 The parameter setting must not be the same as the M code used
for any other function.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, this function is invalid.
3 If the same value is set for two or more Cs contour control axes
within the path, the alarm PS0531, "THREADING PARAMETER
ERROR" is issued.
4 The M code set in this parameter prevents buffering.

- 428 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11488 M code to cancel arbitrary speed threading mode

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] None
[Valid data range] 0 ~ 99999999
This parameter sets the M code to cancel arbitrary speed threading mode.

NOTE
1 The parameter setting must not be the same as the M code used
for any other function.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, this function is invalid.
3 If the same value is set for two or more Cs contour control axes
within the path, the alarm PS0531, "THREADING PARAMETER
ERROR" is issued.
4 The M code set in this parameter prevents buffering.

11489 Acceleration in arbitrary speed threading

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
This parameter sets acceleration of major axis in arbitrary speed threading.
Set this parameter to the feed axis of threading.
If this parameter is set to 0, acceleration is assumed to 100000.0.

11490 Spindle speed arrival level in arbitrary speed threading

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
In arbitrary speed threading, threading can be started when the value of subtraction
between the specified speed and the actual one (feedback pulse from a position coder)
become smaller than the value set in this parameter.

NOTE
1 Threading is not started if the value of subtraction between the
specified speed and the actual one is larger than the value set in
this parameter
2 If the value of subtraction between the specified speed and the
actual one is large, that may affect the screw accuracy.

11492 Adjusting parameter 1 for arbitrary speed threading (position error of servo)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] 0.01%
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767 (If this parameter is set to 0, the setting is assumed to 10000.)
- 429 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Set this parameter to 0.

11493 Adjusting parameter 2 for arbitrary speed threading (position error of spindle)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] 0.01%
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767 (If this parameter is set to 0, the setting is assumed to 10000.)
Set this parameter to 0.

11496 Measurement result of thread groove

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (A)
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Measurement result of thread groove is stored.

CAUTION
This parameter stores measurement result of thread groove. Don’t
input this parameter.

4.82 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (2 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11500 RS2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#5 RS2 When CS/RS of the communication cable for the RS-232-C crosses :
0: Communication is ended after checking the CS signal.
1: Communication is ended without checking the CS signal.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11502 WPP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 WPP Programmable parameter input (G10)-based parameter re-setting that requires power-off
is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
Setting bit 2 (WPP) of parameter No. 11502 to 1 enables
programmable parameter input (G10)-based parameter re-setting
that requires power-off even when "PARAMETER WRITE " is
disabled.

- 430 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11505 ISU

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ISU When an USB memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed
using :
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.

WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11507 HSR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 HSR OPEN(POPEN)／CLOSE(PCLOS) execute speed of the RS-232-C communication is :

0: Executed at normal speed.
1: Executed at high speed.

4.83 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (4 OF 6)

11528 Spindle name (1st character)

11529 Spindle name (2nd character)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word spindle
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
The codes of numbers, alphanumeric characters, and special characters displayed as
spindle name (Sxx) in the spindle setting screen, the spindle tuning screen, and the
spindle monitor screen is set.

When it is the following, the spindle name (Sxx) is displayed according to the table
below.
• When "0" is set in parameter No.11528
• When an illegal code is set in parameter No.11528 or No.11529

- 431 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Spindle name
Spindle setting
Spindle setting
screen Spindle tuning Spindle monitor
screen
(machine screen screen
(parameters)
constants)
Path1
S11 S11 S11 S11
1st spindle
Path1
S21 S21 S21 S21
2nd spindle
Path2
S11 S11 S11 S11
1st spindle
Path2
S21 S21 S21 S21
2nd spindle

4.84 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (3 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11600 D3A D3IT D3MV

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 D3MV In following modes, axis moving signals is:

- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
- Tilted working plane indexing
0: The signals for axes on programming coordinate system.
1: The signals for axes on workpiece coordinate system.

#2 D3IT In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, the valid interlock signals
(interlock signal for each axis (*ITx) or interlock signal for each axis direction (MITx,
PITx)) are:
0: The signals for all of the target axes for 3-dimensional coordinate system
conversion.
1: The signals for axes along which a movement is made during 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion.

#4 D3A In 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion cancellation, if the compensation vector

has not been canceled:
0: Alarm PS5462, "ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69)", is issued.
1: No alarm is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11602 NCP

[Data type] Bit path

#5 NCP If there is a non-threading block between two threading blocks, the second threading
block:
0: Waits until the spindle one-rotation signal and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR)
are detected.
1: Does not wait until the spindle one-rotation signal and the spindle speed arrival
signal (SAR) are detected unless a non-threading G code in group 01 is commanded.
(FS0i-C-compatible specification)

- 432 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MDE FRD
11630
TFR MDE FRD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 FRD The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of coordinate rotation and
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree. (1/100,000)

#1 MDE An external device subprogram call (M198 command) in the MDI mode is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#2 TFR The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of the tilted working plane indexing
is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree.

4.85 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL

ADJUSTMENT (M SERIES)

11681
Smoothing level currently selected when Nano smoothing is used

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 10
This parameter sets the smoothing level currently selected when Nano smoothing is used.

11682
Tolerance when Nano smoothing is used (smoothing level 1)

11683
Tolerance when Nano smoothing is used (smoothing level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
Each of these parameters sets a tolerance value when Nano smoothing is used.
It is necessary to set the value of both level 1 and level 10.

11686
Standard value of smoothing level when Nano smoothing is used

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 10
- 433 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Set standard value of smoothing level when Nano smoothing is used.

When the power is turned on or the system is reset, the smoothing level
0 : keeps its value.
1 to 10 : becomes the level set to this parameter.

11687 Standard value of precision level when AI contour control II is used

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 10
Set standard value of precision level when AI contour control II is used.
When the power is turned on or the system is reset, the precision level
0 : keeps its value.
1 to 10 : becomes the level set to this parameter.

4.86 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (2 OF 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11802 KSV

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#4 KSV Servo axis is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

NOTE
1 This setting is effective regardless of the value of parameter
No.1023.
2 If this setting is made for the axis subject to Cs axis contour/spindle
positioning, Cs axis contour/spindle positioning will be disabled.

4.87 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (3 OF 4)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11850 CMI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CMI In PMC axis control, when the rapid traverse rate is specified by the axis control block
data signal with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 assumed to be 1, the rapid traverse
rate:
0: Always represented in millimeters.
1: Is determined by bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.

- 434 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.88 PARAMETERS OF PMC

11930 1st level execution cycle of ladder

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0, 4, 8
This item specifies the execution cycle for 1st level of ladder.

Setting Meaning
0, 8 1st level of ladder is executed in 8ms cycle.
In this case, the 2nd level of a ladder is started in multiple of 8ms cycle.
4 1st level of ladder is executed in 4ms cycle.
In this case, the 2nd level of a ladder is started in multiple of 4ms cycle.

CAUTION
1 Setting this parameter to a value other than "0", "4", or "8" results in
the PMC alarm "ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION CYCLE ERROR",
and all PMCs are not executed.
2 When this parameter is set "4", the execution frequency of 1st level
of ladder becomes double compared with the setting "0" or "8". As
a result, the scan time of 2nd level of ladder may increase in some
case because execution time for 2nd level decrease.

NOTE
This parameter is effective when the 0i-D package 1. When the
0i-D package 2 and 0i Mate-D, please be sure to set "0" to this
parameter. If you set other than "0" to this parameter, a preset
value is ignored and a ladder execution cycle is always set to 8ms
now, but it is not guaranteed over the future.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11931 M16

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 M16 In the external data input and external messages, the maximum number of external alarm
messages and external operator messages that can be displayed is:
0: 4.
1: 16.

- 435 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.89 PARAMETERS OF MALFUNCTION PROTECTION

12255 Maximum servo motor speed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a maximum servo motor speed. When the value set in this parameter
is exceeded, the servo motor stops with the alarm (DS0004). When 0 is set in this
parameter, the specification of a maximum allowable value (999000 for IS-B) is assumed.

12256 Maximum servo motor acceleration rate

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
This parameter sets a maximum servo motor acceleration rate. When the value set in this
parameter is exceeded, the servo motor stops with the alarm (DS0005). When 0 is set in
this parameter, alarm check is not performed.

4.90 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE

12300 X address of the 1st. manual pulse generator

12301 X address of the 2nd. manual pulse generator

12302 X address of the 3rd. manual pulse generator

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] -1, 0 to 127, 200 to 327
To set X address of manual pulse generator connected with I/O Link in PMC.
When the manual pulse generator is not connected, set -1 to this parameter.

NOTE
Set these parameters when bit 1 (HDX) of parameter No. 7105 is set
to 1. When HDX = 0, these parameters are automatically set. If a
manual handle is not connected when HDX = 0, -1 is set
automatically.

- 436 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

12310 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt
and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt are performed

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 15
This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signal (HS1A to
HS1D for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selection signal
(HS1IA to HS1ID for the first manual handle) to perform tool axis direction handle
feed/interrupt and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt.
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.

<Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals>
If parameter No. 12323 is set to 1, the states of the manual handle feed axis selection
signals or manual handle interrupt axis selection signals for the first manual handle in the
3-dimensional manual feed (handle feed) mode and corresponding parameter settings are
listed in the table below. When the first manual handle pulse generator is turned after
setting the signals corresponding to the value set in the parameter, operation is performed
in the specified mode.
HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A Parameter
(HS1ID) (HS1IC) (HS1IB) (HS1IA) (No. 12310)
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 10
1 0 1 1 11
1 1 0 0 12
1 1 0 1 13
1 1 1 0 14
1 1 1 1 15

If parameter No. 12323 is set to 2 to 3, replace 1 in HS1A to HS1D and HS1IA to HS1ID
above with 2 to 3.

12311 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when a movement is made in the first axis
direction in tool axis normal direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction handle
feed/interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 15
This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
HS1D for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selection signal
(HS1IA to HS1ID for the first manual handle) when a movement is made in the first axis
direction. (For settings, see "Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis
selection signals" in the description of parameter No. 12310.)
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.

- 437 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

The table below indicates the relationships of tool axis directions, first axis directions,
and second axis directions.
Second axis
Parameter No. 19697 Tool axis directions First axis directions
directions
1 X Y Z
2 Y Z X
3 Z X Y
Note, however, that the table above indicates the directions applicable when the angles of
all rotation axes are set to 0.
In tool axis direction/tool axis normal direction feed (not table-based), the directions
indicated above assume that 0 is set in parameter No. 19698 and No. 19699. When a
rotation axis has made a turn or a nonzero value is set in these parameters in tool axis
direction/tool axis normal direction feed, the relevant directions are inclined accordingly.

12312 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when a movement is made in the second axis
direction in tool axis normal direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction handle
feed/interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 15
This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
HS1D for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selection signals
(HS1IA to HS1ID for the first manual handle) when a movement is made in the second
axis direction. (For settings, see "Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed
axis selection signals" in the description of parameter No. 12310.)
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.

12313 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when the first rotation axis is turned in tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 15
This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
HS1D for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selection signals
(HS1IA to HS1ID for the first manual handle) when the first rotation axis is turned in tool
tip center rotation handle feed or interrupt. (For settings, see "Table of correspondence
with the manual handle feed axis selection signals" in the description of parameter No.
12310.)
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.

12314 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when the second rotation axis is turned in tool
tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 15

- 438 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
HS1D for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selection signals
(HS1IA to HS1ID for the first manual handle) when the second rotation axis is turned in
tool tip center rotation handle feed or interrupt. (For settings, see "Table of
correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals" in the description of
parameter No. 12310.)
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.

12318
Tool length in 3-dimensional machining manual feed

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a tool length when tool tip center rotation feed is performed with the
3-dimensional machining manual feed function and when the 3-dimensional machining
manual feed screen is displayed.

NOTE
1 Specify a radius value to set this parameter.
2 Don't change this parameter during 3-dimensional manual feed
mode.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

12319
CAC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CAC If a workpiece coordinate system offset is set for the rotation axis, the coordinate system
of the rotation axis used to calculate the 3-dimensional manual feed is:
0: Machine coordinate system.
For those parameters Nos. 19680 to 19714 used to configure the machine that
depend on the coordinates of the rotation axis, set the values assumed when the
machine coordinates of the rotation axis are 0.
1: Workpiece coordinate system.
For those parameters Nos. 19680 to 19714 used to configure the machine that
depend on the coordinates of the rotation axis, set the values assumed when the
workpiece coordinates of the rotation axis are 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

12320
JFR FLL TWD

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

- 439 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#0 TWD The directions of 3-dimensional machining manual feed (other than tool tip center
rotation feed) in the tilted working plane indexing mode are:
0: Same as those not in the tilted working plane command. That is, the directions are:
Tool axis normal direction 1 (table-based horizontal direction 1)
Tool axis normal direction 2 (table-based horizontal direction 2)
Tool axis direction (table-based vertical direction)
1: X, Y, and Z directions in the feature coordinate system.

NOTE
Don't change this parameter during 3-dimensional manual feed
mode.

#1 FLL The directions of tool axis normal direction feed or table-based horizontal direction feed
in the 3-dimensional machining manual feed mode are:
0: Tool axis normal direction 1 (table-based horizontal direction 1) and tool axis
normal direction 2 (table-based horizontal direction 2).
1: Longitude direction and latitude direction.

Bit 1 (FLL) of Bit 0 (TWD) of

parameter No. parameter No. Directions of 3-dimensional machining manual feed
12320 12320
Tool axis normal direction 1, Tool axis normal direction 2
0 0
and Tool axis direction
In the tilted working plane indexing mode: X, Y, and Z
directions in the feature coordinate system
0 1 Not in the tilted working plane indexing mode: Tool axis
normal direction 1, Tool axis normal direction 2 and Tool
axis direction
1 0 Longitude direction and latitude direction
In the tilted working plane indexing mode: X, Y, and Z
directions in the feature coordinate system
1 1
Not in the tilted working plane indexing mode: Longitude
direction and latitude direction

NOTE
Don't change this parameter during 3-dimensional manual feed
mode.

#2 JFR As the feeedrate of 3-dimensional machining manual feed (jog feed or incremental feed) :
0: The dry run rate (parameter No. 1410) is used.
1: The jog feedrate (parameter No. 1423) is used.

NOTE
Don't change this parameter during 3-dimensional manual feed
mode.

12321
Normal axis direction

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Set an axis that is parallel to the normal direction in the following functions.
- 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the latitude direction
- 440 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
- 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the longitude direction
- Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction (G68.3)

1 : Positive (+) X-axis direction

2 : Positive (+) Y-axis direction
3 : Positive (+) Z-axis direction
0 : Reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697)

12322 Angle used to determine whether to assume the tool axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction
(parameter No. 12321)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 90
Set an angle to determine whether to assume the tool axis direction to be parallel to the
normal direction (parameter No. 12321) in the following functions.
- 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the latitude direction
- 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the longitude direction
- Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction (G68.3)

NC assumes the tool axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction on condition that
the angle between the tool axis direction and the normal direction is less than this
parameter.
When this parameter is set to 0 or a value outside the valid range, it is used as 1 degree.

12323
Number of a manual handle used for 3-dimensional machining manual feed

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
When 3-dimensional machining manual feed (handle feed) is performed, set the number
of the manual handle to be used.
When the second or third manual handle is used for 3-dimensional machining manual
feed, the option for manual handle feed with 2/3 handles is required.
If 0 or the number of an unavailable handle is set, the first handle is assumed.

NOTE
Don't change this parameter during 3-dimensional manual feed
mode.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12330 G17 G16 G15 G14 G13 G12 G11 G10
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12331 G1F G1E G1D G1C G1B G1A G19 G18
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12332 G27 G26 G25 G24 G23 G22 G21 G20
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12333 G2F G2E G2D G2C G2B G2A G29 G28

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit
- 441 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

G10 to G2F When the Power Mate or I/O Link βi is connected to the I/O Link, these bits set whether
to transfer pulses from manual pulse generators connected to the I/O Link to the Power
Mate or I/O Link βi.

The setting of each bit has the following meaning:

0: Pulses are transferred.
1: Pulses are not transferred.

The bits and the corresponding I/O Link channel numbers and group numbers are listed
below:
Parameter Channel number Group number
G10 1 0
G11 1 1
G12 1 2
: : :
G1F 1 15
: : :
G4F 4 15

12350 Manual handle feed magnification m in each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 2000
For each axis, this parameter sets the magnification m when manual handle feed
movement selection signals MP1 <Gn019.4> is 0, MP2 <Gn019.5> is 1.

NOTE
When value is set to 0 for this parameter, the parameter No. 7113 is
valid.

12351 Manual handle feed magnification n in each axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 2000
For each axis, this parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signals MP1 <Gn019.4> is 1, MP2 <Gn019.5> is 1.

NOTE
When value is set to 0 for this parameter, the parameter No. 7114 is
valid.

- 442 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.91 PARAMETERS OF SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE

CONTROL AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES)
(2 OF 2)
Identification Number for synchronous, composite and superimposed control by program command
12600

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0,1 to 32767
Set identification numbers that can be specified with P,Q addresses.
The axis whose identification number is "0" cannot become under synchronous,
composite, and superimposed control by program command.
The same identification number cannot be set to two or more axes through all paths.
When the same identification number is set, alarm PS5339, "ILLEGAL FORMAT
COMMAND IS EXECUTED IN SYNC/MIX/OVL CONTROL." occurs at
G50.4/G50.5/G50.6/G51.4/G51.5/G51.6 block.

4.92 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (4 OF 4)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12730 PTC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 PTC Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a

speed command in PMC axis control is:
0: Normal.
1: Extended.
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type (parameter
VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).

2nd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12731
command in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When this parameter is set 0, 2nd time constant data is not available, and then
acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 1st feedrate to 2nd
feedrate.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

3rd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12732
command in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
- 443 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1

[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When this parameter is set 0, 3rd time constant data is not available, and then
acceleration/deceleration of speed command is not available in from 2nd feedrate to 3rd
feedrate.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

4th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12733
command in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When this parameter is set 0, 4th time constant data is not available, and then
acceleration/deceleration of speed command is not available in from 3rd feedrate to 4th
feedrate.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

5th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12734
command in PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When this parameter is set 0, 5th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration
/ deceleration of speed command is not available in from 4th feedrate to 5th feedrate.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12735
PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set feedrate parameters as following.
No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

- 444 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12736
PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set feedrate parameters as following.
No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12737
PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range]
Set feedrate parameters as following.
No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12738
PMC axis control

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set feedrate parameters as following.
No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0 type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).

4.93 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (5 OF 6)

12801 Operation history signal selection address type (No.01)
to to
12820 Operation history signal selection address type (No.20)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 5
These parameters set operation history signal selection address types Nos. 1 to 20.
The correspondence between address types and settings is as given in the table below.
Address type Parameter value
Not selected. 0
- 445 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Address type Parameter value

X 1
G 2
Y 3
F 4
R 5

Nos. 1 to 20 correspond to Nos. 1 to 20 on the operation history signal selection screen.

These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below.
No. Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … …
20 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900

NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets.
2 To deselect a signal, set 0.
At this time, 0 is set as the initial value in the address number (Nos.
12841 to 12860) and the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900)
corresponding to that signal.
3 When an address type is set, 0 is set as the initial value in the
address number (Nos. 12841 to 12860) and the bit number (Nos.
12881 to 12900).
[Example]
If parameter No. 12801 is set to 2, the parameters are initialized
as follows:
No. 12841=0 Address number
No. 12881=00000000 Bit number
4 If an attempt is made to set a value that cannot be set, a warning,
"DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a value.

12841 Operation history signal selection address number (No.01)

to to
12860 Operation history signal selection address number (No.20)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] For an explanation of the address ranges of the G, F, X, Y, and R signals, refer to the
PMC Programming Manual (B-64393EN).
System area of internal relay (R9000-R9499) can not be set.

These parameters set operation history signal selection address numbers Nos. 1 to 20.
Nos. 1 to 20 correspond to Nos. 1 to 20 on the operation history signal selection screen.
These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below.
No. Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … …
20 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900

- 446 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets.
2 When an address number is set, 0 is set as the initial value in the
bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900) corresponding to that signal.
3 If an attempt is made to set a value that cannot be set or if the
address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820) corresponding to that signal is
0, a warning, "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a
value.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12881 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0
to to
12900 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

RB7 - RB0 History of the respective operation history signal selection bits Nos. 1 to 20 (RB7 to RB0)
corresponding to the operation history signal selection addresses set in parameters Nos.
12801 to 12860 is:
0 : Not retained. (History of the bit is not recorded.)
1 : Retained. (History of the bit is recorded.)

These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below.

No. Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … …
20 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900

NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets.
2 If the value of the address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820)
corresponding to that signal is 0, a warning, "DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE" appears; retry setting a value.

12990 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (1 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 01 group is recorded.

12991 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (2 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group

- 447 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 02 group is recorded.

12992 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (3 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 03 group is recorded.

12993 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (4 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 04 group is recorded.

12994 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (5 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 05 group is recorded.

12995 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (6 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 06 group is recorded.

12996 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (7 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 07 group is recorded.

12997 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (8 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group

- 448 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 08 group is recorded.

12998 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (9 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 09 group is recorded.

12999 G code modal group recorded in history when alarm is issued (10 of 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of G code group
When an alarm is issued, G code modal group number recorded in alarm history and
operation history is set.
When the value within the range of data is not set, G code of 10 group is recorded.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13101 TPB

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#1 TPB Baud rate used with the external touch panel

0: 19200 bps is always used.
1: The baud rate with the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 is
used.

As mentioned in the description of bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119, when TPA is set
to 0, the baud rate is always set to 19200 bps.
To allow the baud rate to be changed, set bit 1 (TPB) of parameter No. 13101 to 1.
This allows the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 to be used.

NOTE
Baud rates that can be set may vary depending on the ETP used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13102 EDT BGD TAD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

- 449 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 TAD When current position display is disabled (bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115 is 1), the
current position display section of the axis for which display position specification
(parameter No. 3130) is performed is:
0: Embedded with spaces.
1: Displayed with top-alignment by the axis for which the current position is displayed.

#5 BGD When background editing is enabled (bit 6 (NBG) of parameter No. 8134 is 0),
background editing on the CNC program editing screen is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

When MANUAL GUIDE i is used, set this parameter to 1 to disable background editing
on the CNC program edit screen.

#7 EDT During memory operation, program editing is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

NOTE
1 When 0 is set, during memory operation, you can stop the program
by a single block stop or feed hold, select the EDIT mode, and edit
the program.
When the main program is running:
- The same edit functions as used for ordinary editing can be
used.
When a subprogram is running:
- Only the word-unit edit function can be used.
- Any program called from DNC or MDI operation cannot be
edited.
- Only the subprogram can be edited.
2 Before restarting memory operation, take extreme caution to return
the cursor to the position before stopping the program. If you want to
execute the program from other than the cursor position when
stopped, be sure to reset the machine before executing the program.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPI SVI IDW
13112
NTD NTA SPI SVI IDW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is:

0: Prohibited.
1: Not prohibited.

#1 SVI The servo information screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 450 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#2 SPI The spindle information screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#6 NTA On the 3-dimensional machining manual feed screen, a table-based movement amount is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#7 NTD On the 3-dimensional machining manual feed screen, a tool axis based movement amount
is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

13113
CFD CLR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 CLR Upon reset, the display of a travel distance by 3-dimensional machining manual feed is:
0: Not cleared.
1: Cleared.

#3 CFD As feedrate F, the 3-dimensional machining manual feed screen displays:

0: Composite feedrate at the linear axis/rotation axis control point.
1: Feedrate at the tool tip.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13115 KBC SI2 SI1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#4 SI1 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and
lowercase input modes by a soft key are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
<>¥%$!~:"'

#5 SI2 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and
lowercase input modes by a soft key are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
()?*&@_

#6 KBC With the standard ONGP-MDI unit, in the lowercase input mode, "[" and "]" are:
0: Not converted to "<" and ">", respectively.
1: Converted to "<" and ">", respectively.

When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off then back on to make the setting
of this parameter valid.

- 451 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13117 SVO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 SVO On the servo setting screen:

0: Both the machine constant input screen and the parameter input screen are
displayed.
1: Only the parameter input screen is displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13118 SDO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 SDO On the initial screen of the spindle setting screen:

0: Both the machine constant input screen and the parameter input screen are
displayed.
1: Only the parameter input screen is displayed.

The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously
13130

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is
set.
The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.

System Setting Display order

0 1st path, 2nd path
2 paths
1 2nd path, 1st path

First character in spindle load meter display

13140

Second character in spindle load meter display

13141

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] This parameter sets the name of each spindle using the corresponding character code in
spindle load meter display on the screen displayed on the left half of the 10.4-inch display
unit. Any character string consisting of numeric characters, alphabetical characters,
katakana characters, and symbols with a maximum length of two characters can be
displayed as a spindle name.
If 0 is set, the following is displayed:
1st spindle S1
2nd spindle S2
3rd spindle S3

- 452 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.94 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (2

OF 3)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13200 NFD NAM T0O TP2 ETE TRT THN TCF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TCF When a T code is specified with the tool management function:

0: A cartridge number and pot number found by the NC are output.
1: The specified T code is output without modification.

#1 THN When NX.T and HD.T are displayed with the tool management function:
0: The tool type numbers at the first spindle position and the first standby position are
displayed.
1: The values specified from the PMC window are displayed.

#2 TRT As the remaining lifetime value for outputting the tool life arrival notice signal:
0: The remaining lifetime of the last tool is used.
1: The sum of the remaining lifetimes of the tools with the same type number is used.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is
set to 0 (arrival notice for each type number).

#3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output:

0: For each tool type.
1: For each tool.

#4 TP2 The output format of cartridge management data is:

0: New registration format (G10L76P1 format).
1: Modification format (G10L76P2 format).

#5 T0O When T0 is specified:

0: A tool search is made assuming that the tool type number is 0.
1: The cartridge number and pot number are assumed to be 0.

#6 NAM When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a remaining lifetime cannot be found:
0: The alarm PS5317, "LIVES OF ALL TOOLS EXPIRED" occurs.
1: The alarm PS5317 does not occur. Instead, the tool with the maximum tool
management number is selected from the tools of the specified tool type, and Life
expiration signal TMFNFD<F315.6> is set to “1”.

#7 NFD When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a remaining lifetime cannot be found in
the cartridge:
0: The spindle position and standby position are also searched.
1: The spindle position and standby position are not searched.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13201 TDS TFT TME TDB TDN TDC

[Input type] Parameter input

- 453 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#0 TDC The function of customizing the tool management data screen of the tool management
function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 TDN On the tool management function screen, the character string for indicating the tool life
status can contain:
0: Up to 6 characters.
1: Up to 12 characters.

#2 TDB The tool management function displays tool information in the:

0: Conventional mode.
1: 1/0 mode.

#3 TME In the tool management function, multi-edge tools are:

0: Not supported.
1: Supported.

#4 TFT On the tool management data screen, data extraction for a specified item is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#6 TDS A tool data search using a tool type number is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13202 DOM DOT DO2 DOB DOY DCR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 DCR On the tool management function screen, tool nose radius compensation data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system or compound system.

#2 DOY On the tool management function screen, Y-axis offset data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

- 454 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system or compound system.

#3 DOB On the tool management function screen, B-axis offset data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system or compound system.

#4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the second geometry tool offset data is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system or compound system.

#6 DOT On the tool management function screen, the tool offset data (X, Z) of the T series is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe
system or compound system.

#7 DOM On the tool management function screen, the tool offset data of the M series is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the
machining center system or compound system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13203 TCN SWC NTS TSI NM4 NM3 NM2 NM1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NM1 The first cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.

#1 NM2 The second cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.

- 455 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#2 NM3 The third cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.

#3 NM4 The fourth cartridge is:

0: Searched.
1: Not searched.

#4 TSI When multi-edge tools are supported by the tool management function, tools are searched
as follows:
0: A tool is selected by remaining tool life. (Conventional search)
1: In selection, priority is given to a tool located at the spindle position or standby
position.

#5 NTS When multi-edge tools are supported by the tool management function, if the life of an
edge that belong to an edge group has expired, the edge group is:
0: Not excluded from the target tools to be searched during tool search operation.
1: Excluded from the target tools to be searched during tool search operation.

#6 SWC The tools with the same tool type number are searched for:
0: Tool with the shortest lifetime.
1: Tool with the small customization data number.
In this case, a customization data number is to be set in parameter No. 13260.

#7 TCN Tool life count operation is triggered by:

0: M06/restart M code. (A T code alone does not start counting.)
1: T code. (Count operation is not started by M06.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13204 DTA ATA TDL

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 TDL The protection function for tool management data using a key is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 ATA The tool attachment signal, magazine number signal, and pot number signal are:
0: Used. (Auto attachment)
1: Not used. (Manual attachment)

#2 DTA The tool detachment signal, magazine number signal, and pot number signal are:
0: Used. (Auto detachment)
1: Not used. (Manual detachment)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13206 OVI SSM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 456 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#1 SSM As a chapter selection soft key of the tool management function, a soft key for changing
the screen display to the MANUAL GUIDE i screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

#4 OVI When tool management data is output, it includes:

0: No offset value.
1: Offset values.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13210 FNS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#7 FNS Acquisition of unused multi-edge group numbers and tool offset numbers and their
display on the tool management screen are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of valid tools in tool management data.

13221 M code for tool life count restart

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is set, this parameter is ignored.
- For tool management function
When an M code for tool life count restart is specified, the counting of the life of the tool
attached at the spindle position is started. When the type for counting the number of use
times is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the tool attached at the spindle
position, and the life count is incremented by 1.
When the type for counting time is selected, the target of life counting is switched to the
tool attached at the spindle position but no other operations are performed. If the tool
attached at the spindle position is not a tool under tool life management, no operation is
performed.
The M code set in parameter No. 6811 waits for FIN. However, the M code set in this
parameter does not wait for FIN.
The M code set in parameter No. 13221 must not be specified in a block where another
auxiliary function is specified.
- 457 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

The M code set in parameter No. 13221 does not wait for FIN. So, do not use the M code
for other purposes.

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether it is used
by the tool management function or tool life management function.

13222 Number of data items in the first cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the first cartridge.

13223 Start pot number of the first cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the first cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

13227 Number of data items in the second cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the second cartridge.

13228 Start pot number of the second cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999

- 458 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the second cartridge. Pot
numbers starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1
are assigned to all data items.

13232 Number of data items in the third cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the third cartridge.

13233 Start pot number of the third cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the third cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

13237 Number of data items in the fourth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the fourth cartridge.

13238 Start pot number of the fourth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the fourth cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

- 459 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13240 MT8 MT7 MT6 MT5 MT4 MT3 MT2 MT1

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 MT1 The first cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13222 is invalid.

#1 MT2 The second cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13227 is invalid.

#2 MT3 The third cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13232 is invalid.

#3 MT4 The fourth cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13237 is invalid.

#4 MT5 The fifth cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13501 is invalid.

#5 MT6 The sixth cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13503 is invalid.

#6 MT7 The seventh cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13505 is invalid.

#7 MT8 The eigth cartridge is of the:

0: Chain type.
1: Matrix type.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 13507 is invalid.

- 460 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13241 Number of rows of the first cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the first cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13241) × (setting of parameter No. 13242) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the first cartridge is invalid.

13242 Number of columns of the first cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the first cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13241) × (setting of parameter No. 13242) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the first cartridge is invalid.

13243 Number of rows of the second cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the second cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 1 (MT2) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13243) × (setting of parameter No. 13244) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the second cartridge is invalid.

- 461 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

13244 Number of columns of the second cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the second cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 1 (MT2) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy
the following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13243) × (setting of parameter No. 13244) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the second cartridge is invalid.

13245 Number of rows of the third cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the third cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 2 (MT3) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13245) × (setting of parameter No. 13246) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the third cartridge is invalid.

13246 Number of columns of the third cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the third cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 2 (MT3) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13245) × (setting of parameter No. 13246) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the third cartridge is invalid.

- 462 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13247 Number of rows of the fourth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the fourth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 3 (MT4) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13247) × (setting of parameter No. 13248) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the fourth cartridge is invalid.

13248 Number of columns of the fourth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000

When the fourth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 3 (MT4) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13247) × (setting of parameter No. 13248) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the fourth cartridge is invalid.

13250 Number of valid spindles

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
This parameter sets the number of spindle positions usable with the tool management
function.

13251 Number of valid standby positions

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

- 463 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
This parameter sets the number of standby positions usable with the tool management
function.

13252 M code for specifying a particular tool

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
This parameter sets not a tool type number but an M code for directly specifying the T
code of a particular tool.

13260 Customization data number to be searched for

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 40
When bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is set to 1, this parameter sets a customization
data number to be searched for.
The valid data range is 1 to 4 when the option for customization data extension is not
selected. When the option for customization data extension (5 to 20) is selected, the valid
data range is 1 to 20. When the option for customization data extension (5 to 40) is
selected, the valid data range is 1 to 40.
When bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is set to 0, or a value not within the valid data
range is set, the search function based on customization data is disabled, and the tool with
the shortest lifetime is searched for.

13265 Number for selecting a spindle position offset number

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
- For tool management function
This parameters sets an H/D code for selecting an offset number registered in the data of
the tool attached at the spindle position.
When 0 is set, an ordinary used code such as H99/D99 is used. When a value other than 0
is set, H99/D99 no longer has a particular meaning. So, when H99/D99 is specified in this
case, the specification of offset number 99 is assumed.
With the T series, address D only is used to specify a tool number and offset number, so
that a restriction is imposed on the number of digits. So, the valid data range of this
parameter varies according the number of digits of an offset number.
When the number of digits of an offset number is 1: to 9
When the number of digits of an offset number is 2: to 99
When the number of digits of an offset number is 3: to 999

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether it is used
by the tool management function or tool life management function.

- 464 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.95 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (2 OF 2)

13221 M code for tool life count restart

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is set, this parameter is ignored.
For the operation of an M code for tool life count restart, see the description of parameter
No. 6811.
This parameter is used when an M code for tool life count restart exceeds 127.
Set parameter No. 6811 to 0, and set the value of an M code in this parameter.

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether it is used
by the tool management function or tool life management function.

13265 H code for using the tool length offset in tool life management

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Setting this parameter to H99 generally validates the compensation for the tool currently
being used. By setting any H code in this parameter, the H code instead of H99 can be
used. If 0 is specified, H99 is assumed.
A value ranging from 0 to 9999 can be set.

NOTE
The use of this parameter varies depending on whether it is used
by the tool management function or tool life management function.

13266 D code for enabling cutter compensation in tool life management

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Setting this parameter to D99 generally validates the compensation for the tool currently
being used. By setting any D code in this parameter, the D code instead of D99 can be
used. If 0 is set, D99 is assumed.

4.96 PARAMETERS OF FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION

CONTROL (2 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13420 DID DIC DIB DIA

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 DIA The movement direction of the automatic phase synchronization of group A is:
0: + direction.
1: - direction.
- 465 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#1 DIB The movement direction of the automatic phase synchronization of group B is:
0: + direction.
1: - direction.

#2 DIC The movement direction of the automatic phase synchronization of group C is:
0: + direction.
1: - direction.

#3 DID The movement direction of the automatic phase synchronization of group D is:
0: + direction.
1: - direction.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13421 FSV FRF FCN FRS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

NOTE
Set these parameters for the first path only. It will be effective to all
paths.

#0 FRS In a program containing an M code for turning the flexible synchronization mode on/off,
a program restart is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 FCN In the emergency stop/servo off state, Inter-Path flexible synchronization control is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.

#2 FRF If G27/G28/G29/G30/G53 is specified during flexible synchronization control, alarm

PS0010, “IMPROPER G-CODE” is:
0: Issued.
1: Is not issued. Commands to the master axis are possible.
Even if, however, parameter bit FRF is set to 1, and G28 is specified for the master axis
in the state in which the reference position of the master axis subject to flexible
synchronization control is not established, or if G27/G28/G29/G30/G53 is specified for
the slave axis, alarm PS5381, “INVALID COMMAND IN FSC MODE” is issued.

NOTE
If the option for inter-path flexible synchronization control is
specified, even if 0 is set in the parameter bit FRF, the operation
will be the same as that if 1 is set.

#3 FSV When the axis related to synchronization is servo off satate while flexible synchronization
control or inter-path flexible synchronization control, an automatic operation is:
0: Stopped.
1: Stopped if the axis related to synchronization moves.

- 466 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE
In inter-path flexible synchronization control, this parameter
becomes effective when parameter FCN (No.13421#1) is set to 1.

Acceleration/deceleration time constant of the slave axis when synchronization is started/canceled

13425
(group A)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant of the slave axis when synchronization is started/canceled

13426
(group B)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant of the slave axis when synchronization is started/canceled

13427
(group C)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant of the slave axis when synchronization is started/canceled

13428
(group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
These parameters set the acceleration/deceleration time constants of the slave axis subject
to automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control.
The acceleration when synchronization is started/canceled will be as follows:
Acceleration = parameter No. 1420 / parameters Nos. 13425 to 13428

13429 Automatic phase synchronization rate for the slave axis (group A)

13430 Automatic phase synchronization rate for the slave axis (group B)

13431 Automatic phase synchronization rate for the slave axis (group C)

13432 Automatic phase synchronization rate for the slave axis (group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
These parameters set the automatic phase synchronization rates for the slave axis subject
to automatic phase synchronization.
These rates are superimposed on the rate synchronized to the master axis.
If the setting of one of the parameters is 0, the automatic phase synchronization rate for
the corresponding group will be 6 (mm/min).

13433 Machine coordinates of the master axis used as the reference for phase synchronization (group A)

13434 Machine coordinates of the master axis used as the reference for phase synchronization (group B)

13435 Machine coordinates of the master axis used as the reference for phase synchronization (group C)

13436 Machine coordinates of the master axis used as the reference for phase synchronization (group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

- 467 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the machine coordinates of the master axis used as the reference for
phase synchronization. If the setting of this parameter is 0, the origin position
(coordinates: 0) of the machine coordinate system of the master axis will be the reference
position for automatic phase synchronization.

13437 Threshold value for automatic phase synchronization error detection signal output (group A)

13438 Threshold value for automatic phase synchronization error detection signal output (group B)

13439 Threshold value for automatic phase synchronization error detection signal output (group C)

13440 Threshold value for automatic phase synchronization error detection signal output (group D)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.000 to +999999.999)
If error between master axis and slave axis after executing automatic phase
synchronization for flexible synchronization control, automatic phase synchronization
error detection signal PHERA, PHERB, PHERC, PHERD<Fn553. 0 to 3> is turned "1".
Set this parameter in the path of slave axis in inter-path flexible synchronization control.

4.97 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS (4 OF 4)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

13451
ATW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 ATW When I, J, and K are all set to 0 in a block that specifies a feature coordinate system setup
command (G68.2) for tilted working plane indexing:
0: An alarm PS5457, "G68.2 FORMAT ERROR" occurs.
1: Tilted working plane indexing works in the feature coordinate system on condition
that a tilted plane angle is 0 degree.

4.98 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (3

OF 3)

13501 Number of data items in the fifth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

- 468 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the fifth cartridge.

13502 Start pot number of the fifth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the fifth cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

13503 Number of data items in the sixth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the sixth cartridge.

13504 Start pot number of the sixth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the sixth cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

13505 Number of data items in the seventh cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the seventh cartridge.

- 469 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

13506 Start pot number of the seventh cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the seventh cartridge. Pot
numbers starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1
are assigned to all data items.

13507 Number of data items in the eighth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of data items used with the eighth cartridge.

13508 Start pot number of the eighth cartridge

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the start pot number to be used with the eighth cartridge. Pot numbers
starting with the value set in this parameter and sequentially incremented by 1 are
assigned to all data items.

13510 Number of rows of the fifth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the fifth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 4 (MT5) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13510) × (setting of parameter No. 13511) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the fifth cartridge is invalid.

- 470 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13511 Number of columns of the fifth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the fifth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 4 (MT5) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13510) × (setting of parameter No. 13511) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the fifth cartridge is invalid.

13512 Number of rows of the sixth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the sixth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 5 (MT6) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13512) × (setting of parameter No. 13513) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the sixth cartridge is invalid.

13513 Number of columns of the sixth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the sixth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 5 (MT6) of parameter No. 13240 is set
to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13512) × (setting of parameter No. 13513) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the sixth cartridge is invalid.

- 471 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

13514 Number of rows of the seventh cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the seventh cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 6 (MT7) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13514) × (setting of parameter No. 13515) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the seventh cartridge is invalid.

13515 Number of columns of the seventh cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the seventh cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 6 (MT7) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy
the following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13514) × (setting of parameter No. 13515) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the seventh cartridge is invalid.

13516 Number of rows of the eighth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the eighth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 7 (MT8) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of rows in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy the
following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13516) × (setting of parameter No. 13517) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the eighth cartridge is invalid.

- 472 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13517 Number of columns of the eighth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
When the eighth cartridge is of the matrix type (bit 7 (MT8) of parameter No. 13240 is
set to 1), set the number of columns in the pot in this parameter. The setting must satisfy
the following condition, however: The sum total of the value obtained by (setting of
parameter No. 13516) × (setting of parameter No. 13517) and the number of pots of other
cartridges should not exceed 64 (1000 at maximum). If this condition is not satisfied or
this parameter is set to 0, the eighth cartridge is invalid.

4.99 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING CONDITION

SELECTION FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MCR
13600
MSA MCR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 MCR When an allowable acceleration rate adjustment is made with the machining condition
selection function (machining parameter adjustment screen, precision level selection
screen), parameter No. 1735 for the deceleration function based on acceleration in
circular interpolation is:
0: Modified.
1: Not modified.

#7 MSA When the machining condition selection function is used, the acceleration rate change
time (bell-shaped) (LV1, LV10) is:
0: Set using parameter Nos. 13612 and 13613.
1: Set using parameter Nos. 13662 and 13663.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13601 MPR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 MPR The machining parameter adjustment screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Even when this parameter is set to 1, the precision level selection screen is displayed.

- 473 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Acceleration rate for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation in advanced preview

13610
control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II (precision level 1)

Acceleration rate for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation in advanced preview

13611
control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
Each of these parameters sets an acceleration rate for acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
control I /AI contour control II. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on
speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision.

Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used
13612
(precision level 1)

Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used
13613
(precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Each of these parameters sets an acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) in AI contour
control I /AI contour control II. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on
speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision.

13614 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate
change under control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level 1)

13615 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate
change under control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
Each of these parameters sets an allowable acceleration rate change amount per 1 ms for
each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of
change of acceleration during AI contour control II.
Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level
10) with emphasis on precision.

- 474 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

13616 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate
change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive linear interpolation
operations (precision level 1)

13617 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate
change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive linear interpolation
operations (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
Each of these parameters sets an allowable acceleration rate change amount per 1 ms for
each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of
change of acceleration in successive linear interpolation operations during AI contour
control II.
Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level
10) with emphasis on precision.

NOTE
1 For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, parameter No. 13614 and
No. 13615 (allowable acceleration rate change amount in speed
control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate
of change of acceleration) are valid.
2 For an axis with 0 set in parameter No. 13614 and No. 13615
(allowable acceleration rate change amount in speed control based
on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of change of
acceleration), speed control based on acceleration rate change is
disabled, so that the specification of this parameter has no effect.

13618 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation when AI contour control II is used (precision level 1)

13619 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation when AI contour control II is used (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 50
Each of these parameters sets the rate (percentage) of the change time of the rate of
change of acceleration to the change time of acceleration rate change in smooth
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation during AI contour
control II.
Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level
10) with emphasis on precision.

- 475 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When 0 or a value not within the valid data range is set in this
parameter, smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before
look-ahead interpolation is not performed.

Allowable acceleration rate when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13620
control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 1)

Allowable acceleration rate when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13621
control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0)
Each of these parameters sets an allowable acceleration rate in advanced preview
control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II. Set a
value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10)
with emphasis on precision.

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation when advanced preview control/AI
13622
advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 1)

Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation when advanced preview control/AI
13623
advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1 to 512
Each of these parameters sets a time constant for acceleration/ deceleration after
interpolation when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
control I /AI contour control II is used. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis
placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision.

Corner speed difference when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13624
control I /AI contour control II control is used (precision level 1)

Corner speed difference when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13625
control I /AI contour control II control is used (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets an allowable speed difference for speed determination
based on corner speed difference in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview
control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II. Set a value (precision level 1) with
emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision.

- 476 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Maximum cutting speed when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13626
control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 1)

Maximum cutting speed when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour
13627
control I /AI contour control II is used (precision level 10)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets a maximum cutting speed in advanced preview control/AI
advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II. Set a value
(precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with
emphasis on precision.

Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when advanced preview control/AI advanced
13628
preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used

Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when advanced preview control/AI advanced
13629
preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535
These parameters set the parameter numbers corresponding to arbitrary items 1 and 2.

NOTE
The parameter numbers corresponding to the following cannot be
specified:
• Bit parameters
• Spindle parameters (No. 4000 to No. 4799)
• Parameters of real number type
• Parameters that require power-off (for which the alarm
(PW0000) is issued)
• Nonexistent parameters

Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1
13630 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II
is used

Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2
13631 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II
is used

Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1
13632 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II
is used

- 477 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2
13633 when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II
is used

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Depend on the type of parameter for an arbitrary item
[Valid data range] Depend on the type of parameter for an arbitrary item
Each of these parameters sets a value with emphasis placed on speed or precision for a
parameter.

Precision level currently selected when advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI
13634
contour control I /AI contour control II control is used

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 10
This parameter sets the level currently selected.

Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used
13662
(precision level 1), range extended

Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control I /AI contour control II is used
13663
(precision level 10), range extended

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
Each of these parameters sets an acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) in AI contour
control I /AI contour control II. Set a value (precision 1) with emphasis placed on speed,
and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision.

4.100 PARAMETERS OF PARAMETER CHECK SUM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13730 CSR CKS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#0 CKS During power-on, a checksum of parameters is:

0: Not checked.
1: Checked.

#7 CSR Alarm DS5340 “PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR” is cleared with:

0: + keys.

1: key.

- 478 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13731 NC parameter checksum exclusion number 01
to to
13750 NC parameter checksum exclusion number 20

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum parameter number
This parameter sets the numbers of parameters to be excluded from a checksum
performed by the parameter checksum function.

13751 NC parameter checksum exclusion range start number 01

13752 NC parameter checksum exclusion range end number 01

to to
13769 NC parameter checksum exclusion range start number 10

13770 NC parameter checksum exclusion range end number 10

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to Maximum parameter number
This parameter specifies the range of the numbers of parameters to be excluded from a
checksum performed by the parameter checksum function. The parameters included in
the range is excluded from a checksum.

NOTE
1 The start number and end number are included in the exclusion
range.
2 If the start number is greater than the end number (start number >
end number), the checksum exclusion number setting is invalid.
3 If the start number is equal to the end number (start number = end
number), only the number is excluded.

4.101 PARAMETERS OF INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND

DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (2 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14000 IMAx IRFx

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 479 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and
metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm
(PS5362) is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled.
Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before
switching between the inch and metric unit.

NOTE
1 This function enables the inch/metric switching commands (G20
and G21) at the reference position. It does not enable the
switching of the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No.
0000).
2 Swithching between inch and metric by setting the setting input unit
(bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000) is enabled only when the
machine coordinate of the first reference position is 0 (parameter
No. 1240 is 0) and presence on the first reference position is
assumed.
For a system in which the machine coordinate of the first reference
position is not 0, set this parameter to 1 and specify G20/G21 in the
first reference position to switch between inch and metric.

#7 IMAx When switching between inch and millimeter was performed in a position other than the
reference position:
0: An alarm occurs.
1: No alarm occurs.

NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 for the rotation axis or other axes not
related to inch/millimeter switching.

4.102 PARAMETERS OF LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE

ADDRESS REFERENCE POSITION
Maximum allowable travel distance when the reference position is established for a linear scale with an
14010
absolute address reference position

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the maximum allowable travel distance at the FL feedrate when the
reference position is established for a linear scale with an absolute address reference
position. When the travel distance exceeds the setting of this parameter, the alarm
(DS0017) (SCALE WITH REFERENCE POSITION: REFERENCE POSITION
ESTABLISHMENT FAILED) is issued. When this parameter is set to 0, the maximum
allowable travel distance is not checked.

- 480 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.103 PARAMETERS OF FSSB

14340 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB
to to
14357 ATR value corresponding to slave 18 on FSSB

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7,64,-56,-96
Each of these parameters sets the value (ATR value) of the address translation table
corresponding to each of slave 1 to slave 18 on FSSB.
The slave is a generic term for servo amplifiers and separate detector interface units
connected via an FSSB optical cable to the CNC. Numbers 1 to 18 are assigned to slaves,
with younger numbers sequentially assigned to slaves closer to the CNC.
A 2-axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3-axis amplifier consists of three slaves.
In each of these parameters, set a value as described below, depending on whether the
slave is an amplifier, separate detector, or nonexistent.
• When the slave is an amplifier:
Set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No. 1023 for the
axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
• When the slave is a separate detector interface unit:
Set 64 for the first separate detector interface unit (connected near the CNC), and set
-56 for the second separate detector interface unit (connected far from the CNC).
• When the slave is nonexistent:
Set -96.

NOTE
1 When the electric gear box (EGB) function is used
Although an amplifier is not actually required for an EGB dummy
axis, set this parameter with assuming that a dummy amplifier is
connected. That is, as the address conversion table value for a
nonexistent slave, set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the
setting of parameter No. 1023 for the EGB dummy axis, instead of
-96.
2 When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14340 to
14357 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting
screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), be sure to directly set
values in parameter Nos. 14340 to 14357.

- 481 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Example of axis configuration and parameter settings

- Example 1
CNC
Slave ATR
Controll Program Servo number No.14340 Axis
ed axis axis name axis to 14357
number No.1020 No.1023
Single-axis 1 0 X
1 X 1 amplifier
2 Y 3 Two-axis 2 1 A
amplifier
3 Z 4 3 2 Y

4 A 2 Two-axis 4 3 Z
amplifier
5 B 5 5 4 B
M1 6 64 (M1)

M2 7 -56 (M2)
8 to 18 -96 (None)

CNC
Slave ATR
Controll Program Servo number No.14340 Axis
ed axis axis name axis to 14357
number No.1020 No.1023
Single-axis 1 0 X
1 X 1 amplifier
2 Y 3 Two-axis 2 2 Y
amplifier
3 Z 4 3 3 Z

4 A 2 Two-axis 4 1 A
amplifier
5 B 5 5 4 B
M1 6 64 (M1)
M2 7 -56 (M2)
8 to 18 -96 (None)

M1/M2: First/second separate detector interface units

- 482 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

- Example 2
Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the electronic gear box (EGB) function is
used
(EGB slave axis: A-axis, EGB dummy axis: B-axis)

CNC
Slave ATR
Controlled Program Servo number No.14340 Axis
axis axis axis to 14357
number name No.1023
No.1020
Single-axis 1 0
1 X 1 X
amplifier

2 Y 2 2 1 Y
Two-axis
amplifier 3 2 A
3 Z 5
Single-axis
4 A 3 4 4 Z
amplifier
5 B 4 M1 5 64 (M1)

M2 6 -56 (M2)

7 3 B(Dummy)

8 to 18 -96 (None)

M1/M2: First/second separate detector interface units

14376 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the first separate detector interface unit
to to
14383 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the first separate detector interface unit

14384 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the second separate detector interface unit
to to
14391 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the third separate detector interface unit

NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 32
Each of these parameters sets the value (ATR value) of the address translation table
corresponding to each connector on a separate detector interface unit.
In each of these parameters, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of
parameter No. 1023 for the axis connected to a connector on a separate detector interface
unit.
When there are axes for which settings are made to use a separate detector interface unit
(bit 6 (PM1x) of parameter No. 1905 is set to 1 or bit 7 (PM2x) of parameter No. 1905 is
set to 1, set 32 for connectors not used.

- 483 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

NOTE
When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14376 to
14391 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting
screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), be sure to directly set
values in parameter Nos. 14376 to 14407.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14476 DFS

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 DFS The FSSB enters:

0: The FS0i-D-specific mode.
1: The FS0i-C-compatible mode.

4.104 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY (3 OF 3)

14713 Unit of magnification by which enlargement and reduction is performed with the dynamic graphic
display function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets the unit of magnification by which enlargement and reduction is
performed with the dynamic graphic display function.
Unit of magnification = 64 / setting
If 0 is set, 64 is assumed.

14714
Unit of horizontal movement when a movement is made with the dynamic graphic display function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets the unit of horizontal movement (in dots) applied when a movement
is made with the dynamic graphic display function.
If 0 is set, 64 is assumed.

14715
Unit of vertical movement when a movement is made with the dynamic graphic display function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 255

- 484 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets the unit of vertical movement (in dots) applied when a movement is
made with the dynamic graphic display function.
If 0 is set, 35 is assumed.

14716
Unit of rotation angle when rotation is performed with the dynamic graphic display function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets the unit (in degrees) of a rotation angle by which the drawing
coordinate system is rotated with the dynamic graphic display function.
If 0 is set, 10 is assumed.

14717 Axis number of the C-axis in simulation (specific to MANUAL GUIDE i)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the axis number of the C-axis in simulation.
For details, refer to the FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63874EN).

4.105 PARAMETERS OF EMBEDDED ETHERNET

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS D1E PCH ETH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (a built-in port or PCMCIA LAN card) is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.

#1 PCH At the start of communication of the FTP file transfer function for built-in port, checking
for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

NOTE
Usually, set 0.
If 1 is set not to check the presence of the server by using PING, it
may take several tens of seconds to recognize an error when the
server is not present in the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. To communicate
with such a personal computer, set 1.

- 485 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#3 D1E When the DHCP function on a built-in port is used:

0: Default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function are set.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0
TIME INTERVAL :0
1: Default parameters for FANUC i CELL communication are set.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 8192
TIME INTERVAL : 50

#5 DNS With a built-in port, the DNS client function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

#6 DHC With a built-in port, the DHCP client function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

14890 Selects the host computer 1 OS.

14891 Selects the host computer 2 OS.

14892 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX, VMS.
2: Linux.

NOTE
Some FTP server software products do not depend on the OS. So,
even when the above parameters are set, it is sometimes
impossible to display a list of files properly.

4.106 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (2 OF 2)

18060 Backward movement prohibition M code that outputs no M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
When an M code that prohibits backward movement is specified during backward
movement, backward movement of blocks before the M code is prohibited. In this case,
backward movement prohibition signal MRVSP<Fn091.2> is output.

This backward movement prohibition M code is not output to the PMC as an M code.
Set an M code that is not used by an auxiliary function or macro as the backward
movement prohibition M code.

- 486 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
18065 Backward movement prohibition M code 1 that outputs an M code

18066 Backward movement prohibition M code 2 that outputs an M code

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
When an M code that prohibits backward movement is specified during backward
movement, backward movement of blocks before the M code is prohibited. In this case,
backward movement prohibition signal MRVSP<Fn091.2> is output.

These backward movement prohibition M codes are output to the PMC as M codes. Set
M codes that are not used by an auxiliary function or macro as the backward movement
prohibition M codes.

4.107 PARAMETERS OF ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI

ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI CONTOUR
CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR CONTROL II (2 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19500 FCC FNW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#6 FNW In the speed determination method by the speed difference of advanced preview
control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II and the
speed determination method by the acceleration of advanced preview control/AI contour
control I /AI contour control II:
0: The maximum speed that does not exceed the allowable speed difference or
allowable acceleration is selected.
1: The feedrate is determined so that the allowable speed difference and allowable
acceleration of each axis are not exceeded and that the deceleration speed is constant
regardless of the movement direction if the shape is the same.

#7 FCC When there is an axis that requires one or more seconds for acceleration in
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation:
0: Emphasis is placed on precision, so that the specified feedrate may not be reached.
1: Emphasis is placed on speed, so that the specified feedrate is produced.
When this parameter is set to 1, the precision of curved interpolation such as circular
interpolation may decrease.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19501 FRP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#5 FRP linear-shaped rapid traverse in the advanced preview control/AI advance preview
control/AI contour control I /AI contour control II mode is:
0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in parameter No. 1671.
- 487 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, set an acceleration

rate change time in parameter No. 1672.

When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is also

applied to rapid traverse if all conditions below are satisfied. At this time,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is not applied.
• Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1: Linear interpolation type positioning
• A value other than 0 is set in parameter No. 1671 for an axis.
If all of these conditions are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.

NOTE
To enable blinking display and signal output indicating the advance
preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control I /AI
contour control II mode even when rapid traverse command is
specified, set bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 1612 to 1 in addition to
the above settings.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19503 ZOL HPF

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 HPF When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration in AI contour control II, smooth
feedrate control is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

#4 ZOL The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control II (deceleration
based on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Enabled for all commands.
1: Enabled for linear interpolation commands only.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19515 ZG2

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control II
(deceleration based on Z-axis fall angle) is used:
0: Stepwise override values are applied.
1: Inclined override values are applied.
This parameter is valid only when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter Nos. 19516, 8456, 8457, and
8458.

19516 Override for area 1 in deceleration based on cutting load in AI contour control II

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100
- 488 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
This parameter sets an override value for area 1 when the deceleration function based on
cutting load in AI contour control II is used.
This parameter is valid only when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is set to 1.

4.108 PARAMETERS OF NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES)

(1 OF 2)

19581
Tolerance smoothing for Nano smoothing

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a tolerance value for a program created using miniature line segments
in Nano smoothing.

When 0 is set in this parameter, a minimum amount of travel in the increment system is
regarded as a tolerance value.

19582 Minimum amount of travel of a block that makes a decision based on an angular difference between
blocks for Nano smoothing

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the minimum amount of travel of a block that makes a decision based
on an angular difference between blocks for Nano smoothing. A block that specifies an
amount of travel less than the value set in this parameter makes no decision based on an
angular difference.
When 0 is set in this parameter, a decision based on an angular difference is made with all
blocks.
(However, when 1 is set in the parameter SHP (No.19592#1), this parameter setting value
is regarded as 0.5.)
A value greater than the value set in parameter No. 8490 for making a decision based on
the minimum travel distance of a block must be set.

19592
SHP

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

- 489 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

#1 SHP Judgment of Nano smoothing cancellation by a programmed shape.

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

19593
Angle at which Nano smoothing is turned off in the block shorter than parameter No.19582 setting

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 180
The angle to judge whether to do the Nano smoothing is set.
At a point having a difference in angle larger than this setting and in the block length
shorter than the parameter No.19582 setting value, Nano smoothing is cancelled.
When 1 is set in the parameter SHP (No.19592#1), this parameter is enabled.
When 0 is set in this parameter, this parameter setting value is regarded as 180.

4.109 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION (3 OF 3)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19605
NSC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 NSC For the machine type that has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No.
19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type), control point shifting in the tilted
working plane indexing is:
0: Enabled.
Set bit 4 (SPR) and bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665.
1: Disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NAG NAA CAV CCC
19607
NAG NAA CAV CCC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 CCC In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the outer corner
connection method is based on:
0: Linear connection type.
1: Circular connection type.

#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred:

0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041).
(Interference check alarm function)
1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference
(overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)
For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No.
5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.

- 490 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function considers that an avoidance operation is
dangerous or that a further interference to the interference avoidance vector occurs:
0: An alarm is issued.
When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the alarm (PS5447) is
issued.
When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector is considered to
occur, the alarm (PS5448) is issued.
1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.

CAUTION
When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be shifted largely.
Therefore, set this parameter to 0 unless special reasons are
present.

#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference check avoidance function for cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation is used:
0: Avoidance operation is performed.
1: Avoidance operation is not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19608
PRI

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#5 PRI Among multiple end point candidates that exist when a movement is made on a rotation
axis by a command such as I, J, and K in tilted working plane indexing:
0: A combination in which the master (first rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of tool rotation type or table rotation type. A
combination in which the table (second rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of composite type.
1: A combination in which the slave (second rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of tool rotation type or table rotation type. A
combination in which the tool (first rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of composite type.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19609 CCT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#1 CCT The cancellation of the G codes in group 08 is:

0: Specified by G49.
1: Able to be specified by G49.1 as well.
If G49 is specified when cancellation using G49.1 is set, the G codes of group 08 are
canceled.

19625 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 3 to 8
- 491 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose
radius compensation mode. When a value less than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is
assumed. When a value greater than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a
greater number of blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made with
a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read and analyzed increases, so
that a longer block processing time becomes necessary.

Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by stopping in the
cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the setting does not become
valid immediately. Before the new setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter
compensation/tool noise radius compensation mode must be canceled, then the mode
must be entered again.

4.110 PARAMETERS OF TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING

(M SERIES) (2 OF 2) / 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M
SERIES)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19665
SVC SPR

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by:

0: Automatic calculation.
1: Using parameter No. 19667.

Bit 5 (SVC) of Bit 4 (SPR)

parameter of parameter Shift of controlled point
No. 19665 No. 19665
0 - Shift is not performed.
The controlled point is shifted according to the result of the
following automatic calculation:
- (Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first
1 0 rotation axis of the tool + intersection offset vector between the
second and first rotation axes of the tool + tool holder offset
(parameter No. 19666))
(See the figure next.)
The controlled point is shifted.
1 1 As the shift vector, the vector set in parameter No. 19667 is
used.

- 492 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Shift of controlled point

First rotary axis of tool

F Controlled point

Controlled-point shift vector

E
Second rotary axis of tool
D
Tool holder offset

Tool length offset

Tool center point

[Controlled-point shift vector when automatically calculated]

#5 SVC The controlled point is:

0: Not shifted.
1: Shifted.
The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665.

NOTE
When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when
parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type),
the controlled point is not shifted regardless of the setting of this
parameter.

19666
Tool holder offset value

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) specific to the machine from the control
point to the tool attachment position in tool length compensation (after specification of
G53.1 in the tilted working plane indexing mode) or 3-dimensional manual feed. In tool
length compensation (not in the tilted working plane indexing mode), however, tool
holder offset can be enabled or disabled with bit 7 (ETH) of parameter No. 19665.

NOTE
Set a radius value.

19667
Controlled-point shift vector

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

- 493 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the shift vector for the controlled point. This value becomes valid when bit 5 (SVC)
of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1, and bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1.

NOTE
Set a radius value.

19680
Mechanical unit type

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 21
Specify the type of the mechanical unit.
Parameter Mechanical Controlled rotation
Master and slave
No. 19680 unit type axis
Mechanism having no
0
rotation axis
Tool rotation Two rotation axes of The first rotation axis is the master, and
2
type the tool the second rotation axis is the slave.
Table Two rotation axes of The first rotation axis is the master, and
12
rotation type the table the second rotation axis is the slave.
One rotation axis of The first rotation axis is the tool rotation
21 Mixed type the tool + one rotation axis, and the second rotation axis is the
axis of the table table rotation axis.

First rotary axis (master)

Tool rotary
Second rotary axis (slave) axes

Second rotary axis (slave)

Table rotary
First rotary axis (master) axes

NOTE
A hypothetical axis is also counted as a controlled rotary axis.
<Hypothetical axis>
In some cases, it is convenient to use an imaginary rotary axis
whose angle is fixed to a certain value. For example, suppose that
a tool is mounted in a tilted manner through an attachment. In such
a case, the rotary axis considered hypothetically is a hypothetical
axis. Bits 0 (IA1) and 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696 determine
whether each rotary axis is an ordinary rotary axis or a hypothetical
axis.

- 494 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

19681
Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis.
For a hypothetical axis (when bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0.
Example)
Assuming that the axis configuration is X,Y,Z,B,C, set the parameter to 5 if C is the first
rotation axis.

19682
Axis direction of the first rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Specify the axis direction of the first rotation axis.
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis

2
Y

X Parameter No.19682

19684
Rotation direction of the first rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a
positive move command is output.
0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the axis
specified in parameter No. 19682 (right-hand thread rotation)
1: Counterclockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the
axis specified in parameter No. 19682 (left-hand thread rotation)
Normally, 0 is set for a tool rotation axis, and 1 is set for a table rotation axis.
- 495 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

19685
Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis (bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is
1), set the rotation angle.

19686
Controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis.
For a hypothetical axis (bit 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0.
Example)
Assuming that the axis configuration is X,Y,Z,B,C, set the parameter to 4 if B is the
second rotation axis.

19687
Axis direction of the second rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Specify the axis direction of the second rotation axis.
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis
When the second rotation axis is the slave axis, the direction when the master axis is at 0
degrees must be set.

19689
Rotation direction of the second rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Set the direction in which the second rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a
positive move command is output.
0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the axis
specified in parameter No. 19687 (right-hand thread rotation)
1: Counterclockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the
axis specified in parameter No. 19687 (left-hand thread rotation)
Normally, 0 is set for a tool rotation axis, and 1 is set for a table rotation axis.

- 496 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

19690
Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis (bit 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696
is 1), set the rotation angle.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19696
IA2 IA1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 IA1
0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis.
If IA1 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis (parameter No.
19681).
Also, set parameters Nos. 19682 to 19685 on the assumption that there is a rotation axis.

#1 IA2
0: The second rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
1: The second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis.
If IA2 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis (parameter No.
19686).
Also, set parameters Nos. 19687 to 19690 on the assumption that there is a rotation axis.

19697
Reference tool axis direction

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for
controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees. Also, set the tool axis direction in the machine
coordinate system in a mechanism in which only the rotation axes for controlling the
table are present (there is no rotation axis for controlling the tool).
1: Positive X-axis direction
2: Positive Y-axis direction
3: Positive Z-axis direction
When the reference tool axis direction is neither the X-, Y-, nor Z-axis direction, set the
reference direction in this parameter, then set appropriate angles as the reference angle
RA and reference angle RB (parameters Nos. 19698 and 19699).

- 497 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

Reference tool axis direction

Tool axis direction is positive Z-axis direction.

Tool axis direction is positive Y-axis direction.

X
Tool axis direction is positive X-axis direction.

19698
Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA)

19699
Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697) is set to 1, the tool axis is
tilted the RA degrees on the Z-axis from the positive X-axis direction to positive Y-axis
direction, then the tool axis is tilted the RB degrees on the X-axis from the positive
Y-axis direction to positive Z-axis direction.
When the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697) is set to 2, the tool axis is
tilted the RA degrees on the X-axis from the positive Y-axis direction to positive Z-axis
direction, then the tool axis is tilted the RB degrees on the Y-axis from the positive Z-axis
direction to positive X-axis direction.
When the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697) is set to 3, the tool axis is
tilted the RA degrees on the Y-axis from the positive Z-axis direction to positive X-axis
direction, then the tool axis is tilted the RB degrees on the Z-axis from the positive X-axis
direction to positive Y-axis direction.

- 498 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Tool axis direction when the reference tool axis direction is Z-axis

Z Z Z
X
X X

Y Y Y

RA RB

Tool holder offset

Tool length offset

19700
Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes)

19701
Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes)

19702
Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 or 21. The vector from the
origin of the machine coordinate system to point A on the first rotation axis of the table is
set as the rotary table position in the machine coordinate system.
Rotary table position

A
First rotary axis of table

Zm

Ym

Rotary table position

Xm

NOTE
As point A, set a position that is easy to measure on the first rotary
axis of the table.
Set a radius value.
If the rotary table is moved along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis or all of these
axes, set the position of the rotary table when the machine
coordinates of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes are all set to 0.

- 499 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic
three axes)

19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic
three axes)

19705 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Z-axis of the basic
three axes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when the first rotation axis and second rotation axis of the table do
not intersect. These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12. When
the rotation axes for controlling the table are all at 0 degrees, the vector from point A to
point B on the second rotation axis of the table is set as the intersection offset vector in
the machine coordinate system.

When table rotary axes do not intersect

Second rotary axis of table

A
First rotary axis of
table

Zm

Ym Intersection offset vector between first and second rotary

axes of table

Xm
Rotary table position

NOTE
As point B, set a position that is easy to measure on the second
rotary axis of the table.
Set a radius value.

19709
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes)

19710
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes)

19711
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Z-axis of the basic three axes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
- 500 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when the tool axis and tool rotation axis do not intersect.
These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 2 or 21.
If parameter No. 19680 is 21, set the vector from point D on the tool axis to point E
determined on the tool rotation axis as the intersection offset vector in the machine
coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees.
If parameter No. 19680 is 2, set the vector from point D on the tool axis to point E
determined on the second rotation axis of the tool as the intersection offset vector in the
machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0
degrees.

When tool axis and tool rotary axis do not intersect

Controlled point

Intersection offset vector between tool axis and

tool rotary axis
E
Tool rotary
axis
D
Tool holder offset

Tool length offset

Tool center point

NOTE
Point D is determined by adding the tool length offset and tool
holder offset (parameter No. 19666) to the tool tip. As point E, set a
position that is easy to measure.
Set a radius value.

19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic
three axes)

19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic
three axes)

19714 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Z-axis of the basic
three axes)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when the rotation axes of the tool do not intersect.
These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 2.
Set the vector from point E on the second rotation axis of the tool to point F on the first
rotation axis of the tool as the intersection offset vector in the machine coordinate system
when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees.
- 501 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

When tool axis and tool rotary axis do not intersect

First rotary axis of tool Controlled point

Intersection offset vector between second and first

F rotary axes of tool

Intersection offset vector between tool axis and second

E rotary axis of tool
Second rotary
axis of tool D
Tool holder offset

Tool length offset

Tool center point

NOTE
As point F, set a position that is easy to measure.
Set a radius value.

19741
Upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis in tool
axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the movement
range of the first rotation axis is not specified, this parameter and parameter No. 19742
must both be set to 0.

19742
Lower limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the lower limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis in tool
axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the movement
range of the first rotation axis is not specified, this parameter and parameter No. 19741
must both be set to 0.

19743
Upper limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

- 502 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the upper limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis in
tool axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the
movement range of the second rotation axis is not specified, this parameter and parameter
No. 19744 must both be set to 0.

19744
Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis in
tool axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the
movement range of the second rotation axis is not specified, this parameter and parameter
No. 19743 must both be set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

19746
LOZ LOD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#2 LOD As the tool length for 3-dimensional machining manual feed:

0: The value of parameter No. 12318 is used.
1: The tool length currently used for tool length compensation is used.

#3 LOZ When bit 2 (LOD) of parameter No. 19746 is set to 1 and tool length compensation is not
applied, as the tool length for 3-dimensional machining manual feed:
0: The value of parameter No. 12318 is used.
1: 0 is used.

4.111 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (6 OF 6)

24302 Delay time for operation history save for the machine state monitoring function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Data range] -1, 0, 1 to 32767
Delay time for operation history save is set.
The value and the delay time that can be set are as follows.
Parameter No.24302 Delay Time
-1 0ms
0 160ms
1 to 32767 Parameter No.24302 × 16ms

- 503 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

4.112 PARAMETERS OF HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION

FUNCTION (2 OF 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
25650 SSO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 SSO High precision oscillation function is

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
25651 HST SGS FFS OST

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 OST During oscillation motion, if G80 command or reset is specified,

0: Oscillation axis moves to point R and stops. (Standard specification)
1: Oscillation axis decelerates and stops.

#1 FFS When oscillation motion is started by G81.1 command,

0: Oscillation motion is begun, after the oscillation axis passes point R and the center
point between upper and lower dead points are passed. (Standard specification)
1: Movements to point R and to the center point between upper and lower dead points
is omitted, and oscillation motion can be immediately started.
If this parameter is set to 1, the first dead point is as follows.

State before G81.1 command The first dead point

First command of oscillation motion after the power is turned on or in the
state of reset.
Lower dead point
In the state that command of cancel was specified on the way to lower
dead point at last oscillation motion.
In the state that command of cancel was specified on the way to upper
Upper dead point
dead point at last oscillation motion.

NOTE
If this parameter is effective, parameter OST(No.25651#0) need be
set to 1.

#2 SGS If oscillation motion is canceled by oscillation start signal CHPST <Gn051.6>,

0: Oscillation axis moves to point R and stops. (Standard specification)
1: Oscillation axis decelerates and stops.

If the oscillation axis decelerates and stops by oscillation start signal CHPST, use each
axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal WPRST1-WPRST8<Gn358> together.
Refer to the following manual for details of the setting method and so on.
- 504 -
B-64310EN/04 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
- FANUC Series 0i/0i Mate -MODEL D CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(B-64303EN-1) "1.5.2.6 Each Axis Workpiece Coordinate System Preset Signal"

NOTE
If this parameter is effective, parameter OST(No.25651#0) need be
set to 1.

#3 HST During oscillation motion, if oscillation hold signal *CHLD <Gn051.7> is set to"0" from
"1",
0: Oscillation axis moves to point R and suspends. (Standard specification)
1: Oscillation axis decelerates and suspends.

NOTE
If this parameter is effective, parameter OST and SGS
(No.25651#0 and #2) need be set to 1.

25652 Maximum allowable acceleration rate of oscillation motion

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (D)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for oscillation axis during oscillation motion
(with sine curve feedrate).
If a value greater than maximum value is set, the value is clamped to maximum value.
If 0 is set, maximum value is assumed to be set.

25653 Acceleration rate of starting or cancellation oscillation motion

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (D)
It is the acceleration rate of starting motion (from point R to center point between upper
and lower dead points) or cancel motion.
Moreover, when override is changed during oscillation motion, the
acceleration/deceleration is set by this parameter.
If a value greater than maximum value is set, the value is clamped to maximum value.
If 0 is set, maximum value is assumed to be set.

4.113 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO

MOTOR (2 OF 2)
25700 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S10) for deceleration

25701 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed (S11) for deceleration

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

- 505 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-64310EN/04

These parameters set the speed at which acceleration/deceleration is changed for each
axis (S0, S1, S10, S11).

NOTE
If this parameter is set the following values, the subsequent
acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
- Over the maximum speed
-0
- The value of upper step is smaller than that of lower step

25710 Special acceleration for deceleration (0 to S10)

25711 Special acceleration for deceleration (S10 to S11)

25712 Special acceleration for deceleration (S11 to maximum speed)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameters set acceleration/deceleration of sections 0 to S0, S0 to S1, S1to maximum
speed, 0 to S10, S10 to S11, S11 to maximum speed for each axis.

- 506 -
APPENDIX
B-64310EN/04 APPENDIX A.CHARACTER CODE LIST

A CHARACTER CODE LIST

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 ” 034 Quotation marks
H 072 # 035 Sharp
I 073 $ 036 Dollar mark
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 ’ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Positive sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Negative sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 @ 064 Commercial at mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 094
3 051 ¥ 092 Yen mark
4 052 ] 093 Right square bracket
5 053 _ 095 Underline

- 509 -
B-64310EN/04 INDEX

INDEX
DISPLAY AND EDIT (1 OF 6)...................................129
<Number> DISPLAY AND EDIT (2 OF 6)...................................409
0i -D / 0i Mate -D BASIC FUNCTIONS .....................345 DISPLAY AND EDIT (3 OF 6)...................................420
2-PATH CONTROL (T SERIES) ................................343 DISPLAY AND EDIT (4 OF 6)...................................431
DISPLAY AND EDIT (5 OF 6)...................................445
<A> DISPLAY AND EDIT (6 OF 6)...................................503
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL ......71 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS.......................................1
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI <E>
CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR EMBEDDED ETHERNET ..........................................485
CONTROL II (1 OF 2).............................................376 ETHERNET/DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS................27
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT .......................286
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL / AI
CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR <F>
CONTROL II (2 OF 2).............................................487 FEEDRATE ...................................................................59
ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ....................................366 FEEDRATE CONTROL AND
ARBITRARY SPEED THREADING..........................427 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL.406
AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP.................................395 FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL (1 OF
AXIS CONTROL.........................................................396 2) ..............................................................................254
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (1 OF 4) ..........................334 FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL (2 OF
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (2 OF 4) ..........................396 2) ..............................................................................465
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (3 OF 4) ..........................434 FSSB ............................................................................481
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC (4 OF 4) ..........................443
AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM..................33 <G>
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ..........................368 GRAPHIC DISPLAY (1 OF 3)....................................292
GRAPHIC DISPLAY (2 OF 3)....................................415
<B> GRAPHIC DISPLAY (3 OF 3)....................................484
Bit Axis Format................................................................8
Bit Format ........................................................................7 <H>
Bit Machine Group Format ..............................................7 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION (1
Bit Path Format ................................................................7 OF 2) ........................................................................374
Bit Spindle Format ...........................................................8 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION (2
Byte/Word/Two-Word Axis Format ..............................10 OF 2) ........................................................................504
Byte/Word/Two-Word Format.........................................9
Byte/Word/Two-Word Machine Group Format...............9 <I>
Byte/Word/Two-Word Path Format.................................9 I/O FORMATS ................................................................6
Byte/Word/Two-Word Spindle Format..........................10 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND
DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (1 OF 2)........405
<C> INCH/METRIC CONVERSION AND
Canned Cycle for Drilling (1 of 2) ...............................215 DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING (2 OF 2)........479
Canned Cycle for Drilling (2 of 2) ...............................226 Inch/Metric Switching......................................................7
Canned Cycle for Grinding (for Grinding Machine)....230 INCLINATION COMPENSATION............................259
CANNED CYCLES.....................................................215 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)..................251
CHARACTER CODE LIST ........................................509 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ......................27 THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER
COORDINATE SYSTEM ...........................................407 INTERFACE................................................................4
COORDINATES............................................................44 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
CUSTOM MACROS ...................................................261 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE............................5
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T
<D> SERIES) (2-PATH CONTROL) ..............................351
DATA TYPE..................................................................14
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND <K>
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 Keywords .........................................................................6
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.............................14
DI/DO (1 OF 2)............................................................122
DI/DO (2 OF 2)............................................................406
i-1
INDEX B-64310EN/04

<L> REFERENCE POSITION WITH MECHANICAL

LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS STOPPER.................................................................314
REFERENCE POSITION ........................................480 REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS....................15
RIGID TAPPING (1 OF 2) ..........................................233
<M> RIGID TAPPING (2 OF 2) ..........................................423
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY..........296
SERIES) ...................................................................433
MAINTENANCE ........................................................383 <S>
MALFUNCTION PROTECTION ...............................436 SCALING (M SERIES) /COORDINATE ROTATION
MANUAL HANDLE ...................................................436 (M SERIES) .............................................................245
MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (1 OF 2) .....................295
INTERRUPTION AND HANDLE FEED IN TOOL SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (2 OF 2) .....................397
AXIAL DIRECTION ...............................................310 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP 374
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (1 OF 2) .................287 SERVO (1 OF 2)............................................................84
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE (2 OF 2) .................486 SERVO (2 OF 2)..........................................................434
MANUAL OPERATION AND AUTOMATIC SETTING.......................................................................18
OPERATION ...........................................................309 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI .........................2
Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle (T Series) ..............221 SIMPLE STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION (M
SERIES) ...................................................................258
<N> SINGLE DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING (M SERIES)
NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES) (1 OF 2).............489 ..................................................................................248
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) .....250 SKIP FUNCTION........................................................275
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL..........................315
<O> SPINDLE CONTROL .................................................169
OTHER PARAMETERS (1 OF 2)...............................378 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR (1 OF
OTHER PARAMETERS (2 OF 2)...............................394 2) ..............................................................................398
OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR (2 OF
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE............................4 2) ..............................................................................505
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES........16
<P> Start and End of a Record ..............................................13
PARAMETER CHECK SUM......................................478 STORED STROKE CHECK .........................................51
Parameters Common to All Channels ............................21 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL AND
Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) ...............24 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES) (1 OF 2)
Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) ...............25 ..................................................................................353
Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) ...............26 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL AND
PATTERN DATA INPUT ...........................................275 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES) (2 OF 2)
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............................164 ..................................................................................443
PMC .............................................................................435 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................31
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T
SERIES) ...................................................................248 <T>
POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES)............................319 THE CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T
POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS ............................308 SERIES) .....................................................................55
POWER MATE CNC ....................................................30 THE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (EGB) (M SERIES) /
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 GENERAL-PURPOSE RETRACTION...................326
PROGRAM RESTART ...............................................318 THE INCORRECT OPERATION PREVENTION
PROGRAMS (1 OF 3) .................................................155 FUNCTION..............................................................386
PROGRAMS (2 OF 3) .................................................430 THE MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION
PROGRAMS (3 OF 3) .................................................432 FUNCTION..............................................................473
PROGRAMS (4 OF 4) .................................................468 Thread Cutting Cycle (T Series) ..................................221
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
<R> (1 OF 2) ....................................................................404
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .............................20 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
Real Number Axis Format .............................................12 (2 OF 2) / 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M
Real Number Format......................................................10 SERIES) ...................................................................492
Real Number Machine Group Format ............................11 TOOL COMPENSATION (1 OF 3) ............................202
Real Number Path Format..............................................11 TOOL COMPENSATION (2 OF 3) ............................423
Real Number Spindle Format.........................................12 TOOL COMPENSATION (3 OF 3) ............................490
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (1 OF 2) .....................300

i-2
B-64310EN/04 INDEX
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT (2 OF 2) .....................465
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (1 OF 3)..........299
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (2 OF 3)..........453
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (3 OF 3)..........468

<W>
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS ........................................397

i-3
B-64310EN/04 REVISION RECORD

REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Addition of following items
- Parameters of flexible synchronization control (1 of 2)
- Parameters of high precision oscillation function (1 of 2)
- Other parameters (2 of 2)
- Parameters of axis control
04 May., 2014 - Parameters of arbitrary speed threading
- Parameters of flexible synchronization control (2 of 2)
- Parameters of display and edit (6 of 6)
- Parameters of high precision oscillation function (2 of 2)
- Parameters of spindle control with servo motor (2 of 2)
• Correction of errors
• Addition of following items
- Parameters of tool management functions
- Parameters of axis control by PMC
03 Dec., 2011 - Parameters of nano smoothing
- Parameters of tilted working plane indexing (M series)
- 3-dimensional manual feed (M series)
• Correction of errors
02 Aug., 2010 Total revision
01 Apr., 2008

r-1
 B-64310EN/04

* B - 6 4 3 1 0 E N / 0 4 *